The History and Power of Mind - Richard Ingalese

Charles Josselyn
fijistorg emir
flower of Jttino
BY
RICHARD INGALESE
Fourth Edition
THE OCCULT BOOK CONCERN

Publishers
9 to 15 Murray Street
New York
City
COPYRIGHT,
1902
BY RICHARD INGALESE
COPYRIGHT,
1903
BY RICHARD INGALESE
COPYRIGHT,
1905
BY RICHARD INGALESE
JOHN
B.
WATKINS COMPANY
PRINTERS CITY
NEW YORK
DEDICATED TO
MY WIFE
WHO WAS MY
INSPIRATION
AND CO-WORKER
IN
THE
PREPARATION, DELIVERY AND COMPILATION OF THESE LECTURES.
615739
"Unto you
it is
given to
know
the mysteries
of the kingdom of God :
but to others in par-
ables ; that seeing- they might not see,
and
hear-
ing they might not understand."
PREFACE.
r
PHIS BOOK
is
made up from
personal notes and
stenographic reports of lectures delivered in New York City during the seasons of 1900-1901-1902, with
JL
the addition of
fications.
some new matter in the form of ampliThe compilation is made at the request of my
is
students and
The
ered,
material
is left
published primarily for their benefit. in the form in which it was delivis
and the photograph of the author
inserted, also
at their request.
The book may not appeal

nor to the materialist
but
to the orthodox religionist
; may prove interesting, if not to the enlightening, agnostic and to the investigator of either psychic phenomena, or the phenomena of mental
therapeutics.
The modern teachings of the Science of Mind have not appealed to many thinkers because of the vagueness of thought and expression of the majority of those who attempt to present it ; and also because of the lack of a
working hypothesis needed to explain the law under which both psychic and mental phenomena occur. This book is an attempt toward supplying the latter deficiency by stating laws under which Mind evolves and
operates.
The author does not claim any original research or discoveries along these lines, having had the matter
herein contained given to him in the course of his study, under trained minds who had verified these facts
and who required him to do the same. forces of nature and their modes of manifestation have been known for ages to certain secret orders which have not deemed it wise heretofore to give their knowledge to the world. This age, howfor themselves
The Occult
seems, in their judgment, propitious for the wider spread of such knowledge both because many independent investigators are discovering for themselves something about these forces and, in their ignorance,
ever,
are perverting the use of them as witness hypnotism and because the advanced men of the race have
reached a point where they are desirous of this knowledge, and every mental demand brings its supply.
"THE HISTORY AND POWER OF MIND/' was
selected
for a title because the history of mind is the history of man; and these lectures first trace mind, or psychic
man's, origin and development, and then describe the power of mind and its modes of manifestation.
It
may
is
not be amiss to state in conclusion that the
book
not written for the purpose of propagandism. Something of the operation of Nature's Laws is de-
scribed in these lectures,
of the statements
affect the author.
made
and the acceptance or rejection will not change the Laws nor
R.
I.
New
York
City,
October
ist,
1902.
CONTENTS
CHAPTER
Preface
I
PAGE
Occultism
Its
Past, Present
Its Its
and Future
11
II
Divine Mind
Nature and Manifestation

Origin
.
31
III
Dual Mind and
52
IV
The
Art of Self-Control
.78
.
V
VI
VII
VIII
The Law of Re-embodiment

Colors of Thought Vibration
100
.120
144
their
Meditation, Creation and Concentration

Lesser Occult or Psychic Forces and
Dangers
IX
.168
It
Hypnotism and
How
to
X
XI
XII
Higher Occult or Spiritual Forces and their Uses
....
of Disease
.
.
Guard Against
189
219
.
The Cause and Cure
239
The Law of Opulence
.259
THE HISTORY AND POWER OF MIND.
LECTURE ONE.
OCCULTISM, ITS PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE.
To many persons the subjects discussed in these may appear preposterous, and therefore those of you who have not studied along metaphysilectures
cal lines are requested to hold yourselves agnosti-
cally until this entire course shall be finished.

;
You
do not know whether Occultism is true or not you are now ready to examine the subject and, after having heard the entire exposition, you will be in a position to judge whether it offers a logical, working hypothesis, and whether it is worthy to receive more of your time and consideration. If it is true it can be demonstrated, for truth is always demonstrable. You can prove by demonstration each of the fundamental statements that will be made, as you can prove a proposition in mathematics. When I say truth is demonstrable, do not understand me to mean that it is capable of being demonstrated imme-
upon hearing it. Everything must unfold. raise your body on a horizontal bar the first time you try because your muscles are not strong enough but after your muscles have become strengthened by practice you may be capable of raising your body to any position you desire. So it is with a person who has never used his mind in
diately
You cannot
12
The History and Power
of Mind.
reasoning or in concentration. He should not flatter himself that he can immediately accomplish what a person who has practiced for many years can do. If you use your mind along the lines
scientific
indicated in these lectures
you
will find that there
will be a continuous growth for you, and that the time will come when you can do anything that you desire. A very large promise, you may say, but if it is true I assure you it is demonstrable. Our first subject is "Occultism, Its Past, Present and Future." This is an introductory lecture, giving something of the history of Occultism and of the Occultists in order that we may know the source from which our information is derived.
The Century Dictionary gives the definition of Occultism as: "The doctrine, practice or rites of things occult or mysterious the Occult Sciences or their study mysticism ; esotericism." In the middle ages Occult Science or Occultism embraced pri; ;
marily what is now known as the physical sciences. It was understood to mean those things which were unknown, but which by experimentation might become known. Chemistry, as a branch of Alchemy, was regarded as one of the Occult Sciences because
it was largely unknown, but through investigation and experimentation it constantly became better known. But Occultism also had a secondary meaning which was coupled with the first, namely, mysti-
it
cism, esotericism. In ancient days people thought not unwise to attempt the discovery of the un-
known through experimentation with
the subjec-
Occultism, Its Past, Present and Future.

tive as well as the objective side of nature,
13
and the two meanings, that which pertained to the objective, which was unknown but could be ascertained, and that which pertained to the subjective, which was unknown but could be ascertained, were both included in the term Occultism.
Materialism as it grew in strength called unknown (which was becoming known on
objective
the
the
or visible side of
life)
"Science," but
belief in or the investigation of the subjective side of life as "superstition." And most people became very much afraid of that word, and
stamped the
became afraid of being known as superstitious even more than to be known as ignorant; and such persons preferred to remain ignorant of the Occult. In time the word Occultism grew to mean that which
pertained to the subjective
esotericism, ism.
and
at present
it is
that which pertained to defined as esoteric-
As you go back in history you will find that esotericism has everywhere played a large part in moulding the thoughts of men. There were always
the esoteric and the exoteric religions and sciences. There always has been and there will be for ages yet to come one religion for the masses and another for the students. There have been for a long time, and for some time yet to come there will be two sciences one for the materialist, diluted for the masses, and another for the students of Occultism.
You
will find traces of this duality in
any
the
religion at
any period
in history.
The Nazarene,
14
of
Mind.
inspired leader of the Christians, after having taught the multitude in parables and having withdrawn to
one
side, was questioned by his disciples: "Why speakest thou to them in parables?" He answered: "Because it is given unto you to know the mysteries of the kingdom of heaven, but to them it is not
given." And afterwards he unfolded to his disciples the esoteric side of his teachings, thus giving them truths that were not for the masses. And in all
religions,
whether
it
be the Egyptian, Buddhism, or
that precursor of the Christian religion Judaism, there are truths which are revealed only to the
student.
In Judaism there was the Jehovic teach-
ing for the masses, the Cabalistic for the most secret students, and between these two was a third,
the Talmudic, which partook of the nature of both. So the truth reached all grades of society according the comprehension of each a plan that was adopted later by the Church of Rome with very great success.
to
religionists, especially those callthemselves Christians, will deny that there is ing in their faith. esotericism But those who are any with the of the acquainted history early Christian
Of course many
who
of the Fathers, and those are familiar with the philosophy of The Logos, and the mysticism of Paul as shown in his Epistles,
Church and the writings
will never
attempt to deny it to the educated. But however violent the denial of esotericism may be by the religionist, it will not exceed in violence
the denial of the term "science" to anything per-
15
taining to the occult by the majority of the modern physicists; yet scorn, laughter or denial will not blot from the pages of either sacred or profane his-
tory the fact that Magic was and is practiced among all people. The existence of magic necessitates the
knowledge of certain laws and forces which are as yet unknown to the materialist, though modern
having gone almost to the limit of the now beginning to knock at the door of the Occult Sciences and to pry into the invisible. It is already studying the ether, ions, electrical invisibles, atoms and radiant matter. It is only a few weeks since Flammarion, in one of his articles, said that he was a student of Occultism, and that henceforth all progressive men of science would have to study
science,
visible, is
along that line. According to the teachings of esotericism Occultism is the science of Divine Unfoldment. The student of Occultism regards Deity as the All and is taught that there is not nor cannot be any mani;
festation outside of Deity. Whether we look at a blade of grass, or a drop of water, or upon our
planet with its teeming myriads of men and animals, or look away into space at system after system of
Deity in various states of manifestais primarily an evolutionist and that all evolution is carried on during vast says of which he calls Cosmic Days; that periods time,
worlds,
all is
tion.
The
Occultist
Deity idealizes a picture of what It will accomplish during a Cosmic Day, and then the whole impulse of evolution which is Divine Energy or Impulse is
The History and Power of Mind.

striving ever to reach that
onward and upward,

idealization.
Everything in the universe is an unfoldment of Deity Itself, and Occultism is the science of that Unfoldment. It teaches the laws under which that Unfoldment takes place, not only upon the objective plane of life but also upon the subjective The Occultist finds that where he merely plane. studies the modern sciences he is only studying the sciences of effects, for there is not one of the modern
sciences
that
teaches
the
cause
of
phenomena.
Take the subject where modern science has perhaps made as much progress as in any other line embryology. We find there is a germ it has a form of life; a method of accretion; it reaches a certain
;
point of development; then ask a scientific man what it is going to be, a fish, a bird, a reptile or a
man, and he cannot answer. Up to this pc'nt the formation of a germ of each kind is identical w^ch the others. But after this point has been reached there is new accretion, a new form is assumed, and the germ may become a bird, a fish, a reptile or a man but the form that it takes was indelibly stamped
;
upon
it
What
from the beginning. How was it stamped? determines the diverging point, what deter-
mines the form of consciousness, the form of expression ? In the science of embryology there is no satisfactory answer to be had because here, as you
see, is the
for, is
study of
effects.
The cause
I
is
not looked
to
not found. The student of Occultism says
want
know
17
when
the ideal which determined all its future growth was stamped upon that germ. I want to know why, when it reached that point, it became a man instead of a bird why it drew to itself certain elements and threw off others. I want to know the laws that govern the subjective side of life I want
; ;
the veil to be torn away, that I may see the cause of form, and not only its effects. This is why he attempts to study first upon the objective side of
life
and then upon the subjective, or to study them
contemporaneously.
As materialistic as was the Nineteenth Century, we find that a few men once more began to turn their thoughts toward the realm of the unknown
and unseen
in
order to discover,
if
possible, the
"why"
of existence.
it
And
certain
scientific
men
not unreasonable nor undignified to investigate the Occult or to organize The Society for Psychical Research for the purpose of investigating these occult subjects. have seen the great cult of
thought
We
Spiritualism spreading through the world and have witnessed the revival of Palmistry and of Astrology and other quasi Occult Sciences. Then following these, the crowning effort of all, we find that a great psychic wave swept over the world and man began to realize that he was Mind and as such was neither bound by time nor by space, but could send his thoughts in any given direction and could communicate without words with distant minds; and that mind could compel matter to obey it. With the
awakening
of the world the Occult Sciences have
of Mind.
again challenged the attention of the most progressive men of the race. But man grows tired of externals and life after
as he evolves he studies deeper and deeper into do not always accomplish the Nature's laws. same amount of study in each life because we think
life
We
not the time for study. We believe we have so much else to do that is of much more importance to us. Then there is the external world with its duties and pleasures and our attention is so deeply engaged with these things that we have no time left for more serious subjects. But in each life
we have
we
as
take up as
much
we have the ally after many
of the study of these sciences time and inclination for, and gradu-
ages have passed we become earnest and devoted students. A knowledge of Occult Law may be gained in two ways, by original research and by teachers. There are courageous souls who choose to progress
along the lines of personal experimentation instead of taking the easier and perhaps the better way of gaining a knowledge of its principles through the aid of teachers. These strong souls often make terrible mistakes and unnecessary sacrifices, for, after leaving the objective plane, they come upon the hidden or subjective side where there are forces and agencies that turn to naught man's thought and efforts unless both be properly directed. But even when knowledge has been gained through teachers it does not put an end to experimentation because the
;
teacher
explains
the
law
and leaves the pupil

to
19
make his own verification after having been taught how it should be done. The knowledge comes, however, as all real knowledge must, by experimentation and by experience. Who are the teachers? They
may be grouped
into three great classes, Masters, Adepts and Students. The Masters of Occultism are those who, in
a prior period of
Cosmic evolution, passed upward

stage until they reached the
through the Divine, and
human
became Gods. When a new Cosmic and new planets are formed, and commences, Day
are brought into existence for the purpose of unfolding more and more of the Deity within themselves
men
and enlarging their consciousness as individ-
ualized parts of nature, the Masters are they who lead and teach the evolving race. The Adepts are
those advanced
men
of our race
who
are students of
the Masters, while at the same time they are teachers of their less developed brothers. They are men who
have perfected themselves along certain lines, but have not reached perfection along all lines. The Students are they who are studying under these
Adepts; they are persons who desire to know the truth, and have devoted themselves to the study
of these particular sciences. They hold the same relation to the Adepts as the Adepts hold to the Masters.
There are different grades of Masters because they who finished their evolution upon their system of worlds earlier in the great Cosmic Day are stronger than they who finished later. And so there
20
find that are grades of Adepts and of Students. In there are everywhere grades of intelligence.
We
other words, that which Huxley speaks of as a scientific necessity is true, and there are intelligences
in this
Universe as superior to man as man is supeTake, for instance, a Patagonian or an Australian bushman, and contrast him with an Emerson. What a vast gulf separates these two intelligences Yet both are proceeding upward
rior to a black beetle.
!
in their
evolutionary career; the one, of course, be-
ing in
advance of the other.

it
And
does not require
much
scientific
imagina-
tion to conceive that there is an infinite gradation of intelligence because we see such a diversity
everywhere.
Then
it is
only logical to suppose that
what
is
true
rience
is
upon the lower plane of our daily expealso true throughout nature.
are the custodians of the Occult Sciences, which are perfected sciences it is claimed, because they cover all departments of nature, both physical and metaphysical, the objective
The Masters and Adepts
and the subjective.
Now,
must be
all
verified
the facts and principles of these sciences by each person as he progresses
along his evolutionary path. I may tell you something that may seem absurd to you ; or you may say "that sounds reasonable," and therefore you believe
it.
may
tell
is
you something
else,
and you say "I

it."
believe that
true because both the intuitive and
rational portions of
my nature endorse
it is
But you
first
do not know whether
true or not.
In the
21
case you have a disbelief, in the next two cases a belief; but before you have a knowledge, you must
verify the truth of my assertion. And so it is that every student of Occultism must verify each statement of his teacher in order that he may make it a
part of his own being that he may know that it is true; otherwise it would be only a belief, and beliefs do not amount to much, because there are
almost as
In
this
many
beliefs
and theories as there are

Occultism
individuals.
Cosmic
Day
commenced
when
the Masters
came upon
mankind.
present
period.
into a certain
The evolution on number of periods, and we are at the time in what the Occultists know as the fifth
In the
first
this planet to teach this planet is divided
and second periods very

at
it
little
was accomplished by man. He was,
were, in a
new world with new sensations and new and his life was entirely objective, and
mal.
experiences,
largely ani-
His theater of activity was that continent
known to tradition as "The Land of the Gods," "Mount Muni," The Imperishable Isles," or what
we would
prosaically call the "Continent of the
North Pole."
During the third period of evolution, man lived upon the continent known as Lemuria. A continent
lying in the
Pacific
and Indian Ocean.
Its
Ocean, Arabian Sea Northern portion was much

;
in the present location of Australia, the Philippines,
constitute
and the Islands of the Southern Pacific all of which the remnants of that continent now
22
of Mind.
sunken beneath the Seas. That periods occur in which there is a sinking of certain continents, and
a rising of others, is as well as to Occultists. In Lemuria
known to Physicists man passed from his lowest state of animal existence into what we may His developcall a more rational or human state.
ment during this time is substantially shown in the history of primitive man. Some of the egos, outstripping the others, succeeded in reaching adeptship along certain lines, but the great mass of the people lived sensuous and sensual lives. There was very little spirituality manifested by the race during this period, and the perversion of natural laws
and forces became marked toward its close. The most notable event which occurred on that continent, immediately prior to the cataclysm which
swept
it
beneath the waters, was the establishment
of colonies in India.
The
colonists consisted of
Mas-
It was ters, the Adepts and the cream of the race. these colonists who built the rock temples of
Elephanta and the other great temples of India those temples in which mysticism seems to have
had
its earlier home; and where, upon their walls, are painted the strange old symbols, in colors, that indicate the history and the growth of man. Those were the souls who gave to India its riches
and philosophy, and established the mighty empires which even tradition has forgotten. But it was the degenerate descendants of these colonists who spread Northward and Westward, and populated first Asia, and later, Europe.
in literature
23
After the continent of Lemuria had passed away, then came the fourth period, with man's field of activity in Atlantis. Atlantis extended from the West Indies to the coast of Central and Northern Africa, as we know from the investigations of the British
Government, which spent many years, and large of money, in determining the extent of the sunken continent; and it was here that civilization proceeded with tremendous strides. All the accumulated knowledge of the other periods was stored in the minds of those who had been the Lemurians, and were then incarnating as Atlanteans. As they acquired greater and greater knowledge,
sums
they not only reached a point in mechanical development far beyond anything that we have reached at the present day, but they also took up the study of Occultism, which became common among the
people. By that time the great Masters had retired from
physical contact with men, and the , Adepts had taken their places as direct teachers of the people.
the kings and in fact, they and inventors rulers, the law-givers were the inspirers of the race up to the time it reached its highest point of development in that
;
They moved among men, and were
period.
Then
the continent
became divided
into five great
kingdoms, and in each of these there were lodges of Adepts. At the height of Atlantis' glory, once more the people turned to sensual abandonment, and the Adepts withdrew into Retreats with their
24
to them, or pupils, for the people refused to listen to be aided by them any longer. In the course of
time, materialism swept over that continent, as
it
has swept over Europe and America; and Occultism was forgotten by the masses, and remembered
only by the few; and then, gradually, that which was pure Occultism became perverted, and men began to use their powers criminally. Those who remembered or practiced Occultism, put into operation mental and certain other forces which enslaved
all
forces, or
as
who had forgotten how to use their own who were not developed to the same point themselves. And thus Atlantis became a contithose
nent where a few immensely wealthy, powerful and strong egos ruled the majority of the people, and
made them
re-action, as
their slaves.
of Occult forces brought its always does, and, as Plato tells us, Atlantis suddenly became submerged. You remember that when he went to Egypt he was informed that the last remnants of Atlantis had disappeared about five thousand years prior to his visit and also that the priests had records of the old continent, as well as of their own country, which extended back thousands of years. These records were kept by the Occultists who were priests in the time of Plato, and are still kept in triplicate one copy has been placed in each of the three great repositories situated on separate continents.
it
; ;
But the misuse
Before Atlantis went

tants
down
those of the inhabi-
who had
preserved their purity and
who were
25
trying to lead upright lives, were taken by the Adepts out of the country. Those living in the
Western Empires were colonized in Central and South America. In Central America that rare civilization which preceded our own was founded, and was the duplicate in every respect of the one formerly established in India. The degenerate descendants from the Central American civilization
emigrated to North and South America and populated them. The degeneracy of these aboriginal Americans was due to the fact that at this time in that Fourth Period the undeveloped souls of the Atlanteans were incarnating in those bodies for it was with the Atlanteans as it had been with the Le;
murians, the strongest souls came first and became the pioneers. They bore the heaviest burdens and thus prepared the way for the less developed souls
not the strength to do the work that their elder brothers had done. And it should not be forgotten that the history of the Lemurians and the
who had
Atlanteans
is but the history of ourselves. Our strongest and bravest souls came forward to start the Fifth Period onward in its evolution, as even a
cursory reading of general history will disclose, and they have reappeared from time to time to manifest their energies in the several lines of human achievement, in order to teach, help and direct the course of
events.
From the Eastern Empires of Atlantis the advanced souls went into Africa and laid the foundation of
what
is
known now
as the Egyptian Empire.
26
of Mind.
And
this brings us to the Fifth Period, in
which
Occultism was again taught popularly and openly among the people. A study of Egyptian history reveals that during its entire period there were Occultists Magicians they were called who could produce great phenomena. They were teachers of the
people and were the priests and law-givers; they were the friends of kings and were consulted whenever there was sickness or national calamity. These teachers were the Adepts who came in contact with
the people. In the Fifth Period, which is the present one, the descendants of the colony which remained in India,
having reached the height of its prosperity and development, passed Westward and founded the Assyrian and Babylonian Empires. There again the Adepts moved among men. In both sacred and profane history of those times we find that the Magi were able to cure all manner of diseases and to manipulate the laws of nature. Passing upward from Babylon and Syria to the Mediterranean on the one side and through Egypt to the Mediterranean on the other, we find that the great remnants of the Third and Fourth Periods were merged and blended in the Fifth Period in the Phoenician, the Grecian, the Carthaginian and the Roman peoples. This is not a statement of occult history in full; but is merely the barest outline in order to show you how Occultism has been presented in the past, and how it has been preserved for us. At the beginning of this Fifth Period we had a
27
new
all
burst of occult knowledge and force, because
the knowledge acquired in the preceding periods the by egos had been brought over in these later incarnations, and in the early history of each of the Nations mentioned Occultism was taught to the peo-
The Adepts were friends of the peoand were ple freely consulted by them. But graduadvanced and sensuality became materialism as ally the dominant trait of each of these peoples, the Adepts withdrew again from personal contact with the world as the great Masters had withdrawn in
ple once more.
previous periods of time. In Greece materialism in
its
most
artistic
form
began
to
stamp
itself
upon the minds of the people,
who
the
turned from spiritual teachings and caused
withdraw entirely from the came to pass that all magic or Occultism, for they were identical in those days, was confined to what is known now as temple magic and was practiced by the priests who were students In various Grecian temples meof the Adepts. chanical or ceremonial magic was taught that is, a knowledge of mental forces united with a knowledge of chemistry and alchemy, by the blending of which great phenomena were produced. Some record of this great knowledge is preserved even in the histories which you have.
Adepts
to
world.
And
it
Before Occultism in Greece passed away one final attempt was made to counteract materialism, and the Elusinian Mysteries were founded. In these
mysteries the development and evolution of the
28
human
soul were taught in symbolic form and the of that age thought it a privilege to be wisest
men
initiated into these Mysteries. But even this proved unavailing to stem the tide of materialism and there-
fore the priests ceased to publicly proclaim or exert their occult powers. Occasionally some enthusiastic student came forward and exhibited his knowl-
edge of the Occult by the performance of a few miracles and marvelous phenomena but the people as a class were too materialistic to be taught anything better or higher than their own gross beliefs and soon such students had to retire from public work.
;
Then
received
Christianity arose, and its doctrines were by a great many who, after a brief period
of genuine revival of spirituality, used them for political purposes. The different orders of the priest-
hood became the Occult Bodies within the Christian Church, and up to the middle ages the priests in the Church possessed all the knowledge of Occultism that the world had. And the Catholic Church is now the only one that has preserved a trace of this ancient truth. It was during the Middle Ages that the Occultists as a class withdrew from the Church of Rome and formed secret bodies or societies such
as the Rosicrucians in various parts of the world.
At the present day almost all occult knowledge is possessed and preserved by secret societies; and the members of these societies or bodies only teach such individuals as have reached a point in their
evolution which has
made them capable
of receiving
Occultism, Its Past, Present cmd Future.
29
secret
In this way portions of this the higher truths. knowledge are given to the world from time to
time as the world becomes able to receive them. The culmination of what is known as the Dark
Age, in this period of evolution, came in the nineteenth century, for at that time the world reached its lowest point in materialism, and from now the tendency will continue to be upward toward Spirituality.
few Occultists believe that the time has

there
is
passed when
a necessity for guarding these
secrets with such jealous care, and believe that the world is ready to receive more of these truths than
formerly. Then, too, many persons are making discoveries along these lines and are ignorantly misusing the forces they are learning to use. So it has
been decided to teach the people something about how they can and should be used, in the hope of averting, if possible, the fate of the
these forces and
Lemurians and Atlanteans. Almost every day you may see in the newspapers advertisements in which the offer is made to instruct people concerning personal magnetism and how to use it how to be successful, how to become popular and how to dominate other minds until they become enslaved. The people are awakening and are beginning to feel a great desire to know about these Occult forces; and if they do not use them rightly they will surely use them wrongly.
;
the present time various efforts are being to give the occult teachings to such persons as are fitted to receive them, but they cannot
At made
30
of Mind.
yet be taught in full to the great mass of people; but should only be given to those who desire to the truth and who wish to ally their forces with that of Nature for the good of others and for
know
benefit to themselves.
Now
you are not going
to be taught all there
is
about Occultism
versal
but only that particular portion which teaches what the great Uniin these lectures,
and after that what you are, what and objective minds are and what your subjective occult forces each of these minds reaches and con-
Mind
is;
trols.
Then you
shall
be taught
how
to use these
forces for your own upbuilding and for the hastenshall confine ourselves ing of your evolution.
We
to mental lines, taking fragments of occult history and bringing them together into a small mosaic
which
versal
will
show you your relationship to the UniMind and how all humanity is but a maniMind.
festation of that great
We
shall learn
how
up along spiritual, mental and material lines, because this knowledge can be used successfully along all three. We all want to succeed in life materially, and most of us want to grow in knowledge and power; and it is through the use of these forces that we accomplish our heart's desire. The time is fast approaching when man must learn to use his mental forces or fail in
to build ourselves
the great evolutionary struggle fail for this entire period not to take the battle up again until some
other Cosmic
time
all
Day shall come. In the course of men who survive will become Occultists.
LECTURE TWO.
DIVINE MIND, ITS NATURE AND MANIFESTATION.
The God idea seems to be universal, although we are told that in the interior of Australia a tribe of men was discovered who had no conception of
God.
tion I
investigations that is the only have ever seen of a body of people who
all
In
my
menwere
genthe
entirely without
erally
any idea
of
God
or of
what
It
is
meant by the word God.
This idea concern-
ing Deity changes as late Colonel Ingersoll
man developes. who had a very
was
clever and
profound way of stating this thought. He said, "An honest God is the noblest work of man." This is profound because man's concept of Deity corresponds with his power of idealization he cannot create a God that is above his own ideal. And while it is true that God created man in His own
;
image, according to the Scripture, it is also true that undeveloped man is forever returning the compliment by creating God in his own image. Therefore when primitive man began to realize the "I am I,"
to say, that he was something distinct and from apart everything else, he came to the point where he began to manifest the principle of self-consciousness he began to think, to analyze and to worship. The first thing he saw which awakened a feeling
that
is
31
32
of Mind.
of fear or reverence in
him was what we call Nature and natural forces; and perceiving that they were stronger than himself he commenced to worship them as his Deity. Next he passed on to the making of an image of the thing he worshiped, such as the totem ; and later he worshiped the sun and moon and stars. When he had learned by experience that
fire could destroy both his body and his possessions he began to worship that too, and thus he continued to live for ages alternately worshiping and propitiating everything which he did not understand and could not control. The idea of Deity is first found in individual worship. Each man has his own particular God which is a true one for him, because each person has his own conception of Deity. But as he becomes stronger he is not satisfied to worship alone and then he desires to impress his ideas upon those with whom he comes in contact and we find him in the second stage of his worship, which is tribal. When a certain tribe of men becomes stronger numerically than another and begins to dominate that
other
it
immediately enforces
its
own God
idea
upon
the conquered people as was most excellently illustrated in the primitive Grecian States. There every
had its own particular God, but as the became merged a national God idea gradually took form, by the weaker states accepting the God of the stronger. But sometimes the tribal or national God of the conquered people appealed to the wants or needs of the conquerors and was adopted
little
state
states
Divine Mind, Its Nature and Manifestation.
33
Isis became Diana of Ephesus. has given us another example of this Christianity nation's God by accepting of another adoption God Judea's Jah-hovah and renaming him Jehovah. Jah-hovah was nothing more than the Male-female creative principle united. It was a Planetary Spirit or one of the Elohim. Christianity adopted Him from Judaism and improved upon the conception of
its
by them as when
votaries
by making
of
Him
a Universo-personal
God.
Much
of his supposed
wrath and vengeance
was modified or ameliorated by attributing to Him enough of the element of love to enable Him to show a leniency toward such of His creatures as He
had elected or foreordained to be saved. But now we have passed into a transition state and man's conception of Deity is broadening from
the anthropomorphic to a real Universal God without modifications or limitations. The anthropomorphic idea means God made in the image of man or ascribing human attributes to God. In olden times the attributes of human weaknesses and human
traits
were ascribed to the Jehovic God. But we have
now
is
arrived at the point where anthropomorphism no longer characteristic of the most progressive
thinkers.
We
are
now
able to conceive of a Uni-
versal Deity; one without human weakness, one without human limitation and if there is one thing
;
others that this great mental and metaphysical movement stands for it is the sweeping away of the old anthropomorphic idea and the giving
above
all
in its place a
Universal Deity.
34
"Divine Mind" has been selected for the term

to be applied to this new conception of God in order to emphasize this idea of Universal Deity; in order
to bring out clearly first the Deific idea and secondly the fact that it is consciousness for mind and con-
the
sciousness are really synonymous terms. I prefer term "Universal Consciousness," but since
"Divine Mind" seems to be a favorite term with the

Christian Scientists, the Mental Scientists, the
"New
Thought Movement" and

sciousness.
others,
we
shall use that
as representing the universality of Divine Con-
This consciousness being universal necessarily

manifests everywhere. Looking at it on the objective side and in the mineral kingdom we speak of
the cohesion of minerals.
Now
minerals cannot be
cohesive unless there

sciousness to hold
into
is
a certain
amount
of con-
what we
If we examine together. call the transition states, or if we go
them
back of the mineral kingdom to the gases which chemicalized to produce the minerals, we find something we call chemical affinity, which is a certain form of consciousness. Let us take a concrete example. A drop of water is, as you know, formed by the combination of two gases, hydrogen and oxygen in parts of two to one, 2 O. Why should those atoms form in this combination rather than in
any other? The amount of power required to disrupt the forces locked up in that drop of water is something tremendous. Yet you may take a drop of
water and put
it
on a piece of iron and you can watch

the divorce as
it
35
takes place between the two ele-
ments. If there was no consciousness in what is called chemical affinity this could not occur. The tremendous force locked into that combination of gases becomes dissipated as soon as the atoms are brought
sciousness there
This shows that there is conit otherwise no change would have taken place. In the case of boiling water: if fire and water were but inert matter acting upon inert matter and no consciousness were there how could those vibrations be raised and the water be
into
new
conditions.
;
were
made
to boil? But it is the conscious side of the atoms composing the fire, acting upon the conscious side of the atoms composing the water, which raises those slower vibrations of the water and makes it
boil.
Passing up a step higher we come to examine the vegetable kingdom. Why do pine, hemlock and trees side spruce grow by side taking from the earth such as each needs to sustain its inonly particles dividual life ? Is there not here a conscious selection of elements made by each tree? In the animal kingdom this consciousness becomes
so distinctly individualized that to distinguish its higher form from the lower or vegetable kingdom
we
call it
something more than consciousness

In
we
higher form of consciousness than in that of the animal,
call it intelligence.
man we
;
find a
still
which we designate as Mind

velopment
is
and
this state of de-
the highest with which we are familiar. Therefore when we use the term Universal Con-
36
sciousness or Divine Mind, we mean that which comprehends, that which embodies and includes all
that
wise.
we
call
consciousness individualized or otherAll that can be seen, touched, handled that can be apprehended all is God.
consists of
We mean all that is visible or invisible known

;
or unknown. or sensed
all
The Universal Mind
two portions
the manifested and the unmanifested.
The mani-
fested portion can be apprehended by the human mind, but that which is unmanifested cannot be ap-
prehended. There is a plus element which is always above and beyond that which is manifested. The manifestation takes place within the unmanifested and there is always something from within which brings forth the manifested. This plus element we shall not attempt to explain because I am informed that none of the Occultists not even the greatest has ever been able to fathom much of Its nature. From man's point of view the manifested portion
;
of the Universal
visible
Mind
consists of
two
parts, the
is
and the
invisible;
and yet each of these
but a condition, a part or a diversity of the complete unity of the Universal Consciousness. Upon the visible plane of manifestation Divine Mind or Consciousness expresses Itself in the two great forms which are popularly known as force and matter: looking at matter from the standpoint of a materialist (because matter is what we are supposed to be most familiar with) we will study the manifestation of the Universal Consciousness in that form. are supposed to be familiar with matter and
We
Divine Mind, Its Nature and Manifestation. yet

tists
it is
37
Holman
J.
Clerk Maxwell and almost
all
scien-
are willing to confess that their conception of but a hypothetical idea. Huxley, in his "Sensa-
tion
and Sensiferous Organs," says: "All that we
is that it is the hypothetical substance of physical phenomena." Physically we can know very little of either force or matter because this objective world is on the plane of effects. The Occultists divide matter into two great porThe partions, the particled and the unparticled.
know about matter
ticled portion
If
precipitation of
comes forth from the unparticled as a Let me try to make this clear to it.
of water outside your win-
you.
you place a pan
dow when
is
the temperature of the atmosphere is below freezing point, you will find that gradually there
which compose the water

line
a lowering of the rate of vibration of the atoms until there comes a crystal-
the pan
formation within the pan. Most of the water in is still fluidic but there are also these cryst-
alline formations, and we have both the particled and the unparticled portions in the pan. In a like manner throughout Nature these two forms of matter are forever seen during a period of manifestation or evolution, and it is the particled portion
of matter that science has agreed to call atoms. Though I believe that recently certain scientists are
trying to sub-divide even the atom which they admit they have never yet seen. There are several scientific
which we
cient to
theories concerning the nature of the atom will not discuss at this time. It is suffi-
know
that the physicists agree in saying
38
that logically and necessarily there must be an ultimate element, and this produces the phenomena which we call physical life. It has often seemed to me that if all Mental Scientists had the faith of the profane scientists they would soon become Occultists and would accomplish anything they undertook, for the profane scientist if the term "profane" will be excused says:
"Such a law must of necessity exist," and often stakes his life upon his faith. Then, too, he always lives up to and acts upon his scientific faith. For before was discovered science instance, Neptune said: "At such a point in space there should be a planet," and thenceforth all astronomical calculations were based upon this logical theory; but it was not until a long time after the scientists had
made known
their theory that the planet was actudiscovered. And so it is with this question that ally we are considering the existence of the unseen
atom.
The
scientist
knows
that there
is
a unit of
substance; he knows there must be one because visible physical forms are the product of something and he says they must have an individual basis and therefore there is an atom.
The
Occultist asserts that the
atom which the
exist, does exist, and is visible the upon subjective side of life. It is the smallest portion of particled substance, and atoms are the bricks with which the world is builded. So the
scientist says
must
is seen and known by the Occultist and is recognized as a logical necessity by the physicist. Then comes the question, how is it created?
atom
39
Occultist says it is created by the will of Deity. Deity desires to manifest, to raise Itself to a higher form of existence, and this desire going forth
The
within Itself causes the Universe to grow into obThis desire manifests first in the unparjectivity. ticled portion and is a force which being sent
into unparticled matter causes a precipitate within itself which is called atoms. And all worlds, all
atoms are made of the same substance. Everywhere throughout space there is but one basis for the physical universe and this basis we agree to
bodies, all
Most people, however, give to matter that it does not possess and therefore give qualities it a power over themselves. If you understand the
call
matter.
nature of matter and look at

point you will
to
it
qualities
from the right standbe able to control it; but if you give that do not belong to it then it will
it
control or limit you. The other great power which
is
recognized as a
factor in building the physical world is force and we find a limited amount of knowledge con-
cerning
steam,
force
it.
True
it
is
that scientists have classi-
fied forces as electric force, force of heat, force of

etc.,
but after everything has been stated and

it is
analyzed
is
we
that
find all that the physicist the immediate cause of a
knows
change
of
in
the velocity or direction of the motion of a body. In other words, it is the proximate cause of the
phenomena of form. When we view the material world as the manifestation of Deity we know that behind this motion which we call force, and behind .this form which we call matter there is a cause
40

;
which produces them
and we want to know some-
thing about this cause.
The
This
said before, that all
Occultist starts with the premise, as we is Deity or Divine Essence.
Essence manifesting as motion is by both the Occultist and the physicist. The Occultist also calls it thought because all force in its ultimate is either thought or the result of thought. With the Occultist force and are identical and force is the product of thought mind. The Divine Essence manifesting as matter is what both the physicists and Occultists call substance substance being the collective name for the atoms; and we call it substance because it is that which stands under, that which lies behind the visible Universe. The physical Universe is, therefore, but atoms in motion or vibration and back of matter and back of motion is Divine Essence. The mistake that the physicists of the ultra school make is in believing that matter is all; that everything is a by-product of matter and that Mind and Consciousness are but this thing which we call matter in motion. And the great mistake of the ultra Mental and Christian Scientists is in believing that all is mind and that there is no matter. Each view is extreme, and fails to distinguish both manifestations of Divine Essence. The Divine Essence does manifest in those two forms and we should study its manifestations in both therefore, to say there is no matter and thus sweep away in thought the
Divine
called force
;
physical world,
is,
in
my
opinion, not altogether

scientific.
41
But the true scientific attitude is to say Supreme Universal Divine Essence Consciousness God does manifest in the dual way of
that the
motion and matter. This gives us the trinity of Consciousness, Force and Substance. The Occultist does not forget this trinity and the part each portion plays in life. The atom as viewed by the Occultist is dual, and has its consciousness aspect and its substance aspect. Its positive aspect
is
consciousness,
its
negative aspect
is
substance
and these two are inseparable.
The physicist does not recognize the conscious side of the atom and the Christian Scientist does not
recognize the physical side, but the Occultist maintains that the physical side of the atom is the vehicle for consciousness
is
is
and this duality of the atom ; the keynote to Occultism. The knowledge of this essential to the conscious production of phenomUnderstanding
this,
is
ena.
you may
realize
how
the visible Universe

controlled,
produced,
are
how
forces are
how
cures
performed by mental
therapeutics.
It all resolves itself into the action of
lesser and other forms of Matter is subject to mind when mind controls form through the consciousness side of substance, by making and modifying vibrations
mind upon mind or upon
consciousness.
the cause of form.
but atoms vibrating at cerVibrations which appeal to us as sound have no inherent sound, but are due to
of
is
The world
form
tain established rates.
rates of vibration that impinge
upon the nerves
of
42
of
Mind.
brain and thence to the mind.
the ear and are transmitted as vibrations to the Those vibrations
which appeal to the eye as color have no light per se, but are rates of vibration that, impinge upon the optic nerves and are transmitted to the brain as
vibrations.
All
is
vibration
vibration modified by
Consciousness behind it or by individual consciousness within it. All sensation is but the effect of vibration upon the mind. For example: I am looking at a glass bulb that contains an electric light. It gives me the impression of something
we
call light.
The
ether
is
made
to vibrate at a certain rate
and these vibrations imand reach the objective nerves the optic pinge upon mind within the brain, and I have the sensation of something we have agreed to call light. Thus we see that it all comes back to a mental basis for a
material world; since all kinds of physical phenomena are produced by the same substance vibrating at
different rates.
For example, hold a poker in the fire. After a it becomes so brilliant that we call it white. Then take it out of the fire and watch it. After a little time it will change from white to yellow, then to red, and finally back to black. It was the same group of atoms vibrating at different rates which produced the separate and distinct colors of the
while
poker.
The impinging of the vibrations upon our minds caused our conceptions of the changing colors and the same law which produced the colors for us produces the physical Universe or the ex;

ternal manifested world.
43
Therefore it is the relationship of our individual consciousness to the external world of vibrations which makes the world
for us.
Mind in its subjective portion of the unparticled part of that Consciousness is, in the scientific phraseology of the physicists, the ether. The two
let
Now
us consider Divine
manifestations.
The lower
Ether, like the atom, is something that the scientific world says must exist; it is a logical necessity, but no scientist has ever seen the
are identical.
ether; he only knows that it produces certain phenomena. This ether is a subtle, universal, magnetic, fluidic medium in which all manifested things are
embedded
this is
about the consensus of the opinion
of the scientific world.
We will
now
from a mental standpoint, because

particularly designed to teach powers of mind.
First of all the ether
all
consider these qualities of the ether this course is
you the nature and
is subtle. It interpenetrates other forms of existence, all other forms of physical life. do you see me? do you see the light? Because of this subtle essence that is
Why
I
Why
between
us.
am
is
Universal
Mind and you must remember

Consciousness or Mind.
talking about an aspect of the that this
subtle essence
You
are
it, the atoms of your body are held in together groups by it this subtle consciousness is in every portion of your being. You are swimming,
permeated with
living, existing in a sea of
it.
44
Secondly, we must understand that the ether is universal ; it cannot be excluded from any plane or
place.
This Universal Consciousness

It is
is,
as
implies, everywhere. this universality because in thought transference or in treating mentally a person at a distance you must
realize that there is no separateness in mind. Upon the plane of mind the thought passes immediately from one to another so you do not have to make a
;
important to
its name remember
great effort to reach another mind. it instantly and easily through the
You
can reach
of this
medium
Mind because
it is
universal.
is
Thirdly, the ether
magnetic.
It attracts all its
parts, and every part and particle of itself being interdependent none are independent. Every particled
part of this sea of magnetism, every individualized part, whether it be an atom, a man or a sun, is a magnetic center ; and because the whole is magnetic
each part must be magnetic. Evolution can only be carried on by reason of these centers and it was
purpose that they were brought into existEvery center in the Universal Consciousness should be preserved. Therefore your first duty to God and to yourself is to preserve your own magnetic center. Occultism teaches no sacrifice of self because evolution would be retarded instead of aided by such teaching. By this I do not wish to be misunderstood as saying there should be no self-denial, or that there should be no giving up of personal or selfish comforts or superfluities but I do mean that the indifor this
ence.
45
vidual center should not be destroyed or depleted

it becomes an imperfect medium for Deity to work through. Occultism says no one should sacri-
until
fice his
life
for another because every life
is
imto
of
portant to Deity, and for be sacrificed may be the

the
aught we know
the
life
more important center
I am not at that juncture of history. I am of but stating a law. speaking sentimentality, to give continue and no one should Again, give
two
of his
he
own spiritual, mental or physical force until a bankrupt. depleted center is of no use to in the Deity evolutionary struggle. Look over the
is
of those persons who are practicing mental therapeutics, or think of your altruistic friends who
list
are bearing other people's burdens and see how the law has acted in their cases. Are not many of them
mentally, physically or financially depleted and of comparative little utility because of this conscious
or unconscious violation of the law?
am
not
eulogizing heroics, sounding the glory of martyrdom nor criticising the victims of vanity but I am stating an immutable law.
;
by the Nazarene
have been taught and admitting that after three or four generations had passed away, he was
I
know
that altruism
is
said to
Occultist,
correctly reported in this respect
in the records
which you now have then his teachings could only have been intended to neutralize the intense and almost universal selfishness which prevailed at that time. Both altruism and selfishness are extreme
views, while intelligent individualism
is
the mid-
46
die

ground and
is
in
accordance with the law
that I have stated.
It is fortunate,
however, that
condemned and that altruism is more preached than practiced or humanity would not be able to press on in compliance with the law as it is doing at present. So your duty to yourself and to Deity is to become a positive center and the higher your rate of vibration the more powerful
selfishness is so earnestly
;
do you become. No one ever succeeded in life who was continually in a negative condition. To be successful you must be positive. "Unstable as water,
thou shalt not succeed," says the Scripture. You must be strong and positive, and then whatever you undertake will end successfully. Did you ever stand on the bank of a river and watch the water as it whirled round a center or vortex in the middle of the stream? Did you observe how that vortex drew to itself everything that came floating down upon the current? That was an
active, positive center distinct
from any other center
or vortex in that stream, and because of its individualized strength it had the power of attraction and
everything was drawn into
it.
vortices in this great magnetic sea of consciousness and according as

it
So
is
that
men become
they became positive and strong do they draw to themselves whatsoever they desire. But we cannot
help others until we become strong ourselves. We must have force before we can impart it to others. We must know before we can teach.
Fourth, the ether
is fluidic.
This unparticled sea
Divine Mind,
Its
Nature and Manifestation.
47
of Divine Consciousness flows according to the impetus given to it both by Deity Itself and by man ;
and it moves in the direction in which it is sent. This is another important fact to remember, because
you
will learn that there are currents within this
fluidic sea
and
later
on you
will be taught
how
to
attach yourself to those currents and forces and to draw such as you desire into yourself. There are also currents of love and you shall be taught how to
attach yourself to draw love to you. There are destructive currents and you shall be taught how to avoid attaching yourself to them. Suppose you were a thousand miles from home
and you desired to help some member of your With your power of thought you could family. make this fluidic force, this Consciousness and life So it flow into the person that you desire to help.
is very important that you should realize something about the nature of this fluidic Universal Consciousness. It is a wonderful storehouse in which every-
thing that
is
conceivable to the mind of
man
it
is
stored; and his thoughts going forth into bring back to him just what he desires.
Fifth,
this
in
can
the
Consciousness
the
ether
is
which all things are embedded and all things are connected with each which through other. Because it is a medium there is no friction between any parts of it per se; it yields to you and
yet connects you with any or all of its parts. It does not impair or retard the force you sent out into it, and it brings back to you precisely what you
medium
48
If you think love to a friend, your love him precisely as you think it, and with no greater nor less intensity than you feel it. If there were any friction in this Universal Ether or Divine
send forth.
will
go to
should not be able to receive the The worlds would some time light in no world would be able their orbits because stop to revolve for more than a limited time, if there were
Consciousness
we
from the
stars.
the least resistance to
its progress through space. direct Consciously your thought into the Ether and it is sure to reach the person, place or thing to
which you send it. If you want to give me a mental treatment, you think kindly, positively of me, and this thought going from you into the Ether makes a little pathway for itself until it reaches me. For the time being there is a magnetic cord established between us and over that magnetic cord you send your No wave of thoughts of health and strength. Modern vibration can ever be thought impaired. scientists agree that at the same place and at the same time there may be an infinite variety of etheric waves of different lengths, with none of them interfering with each other. We can see waves, which we call light, as they are sent to us from the stars and could we but translate the messages those waves of
;
light or vibrations are bringing to us, we should be wiser and better than we are. But we know that the color of a star indicates its state of development, and in this way we are able to determine which of the heavenly bodies are below or above us in their
evolution.
49
Few persons know scarcely anything about the magnetic power which is daily given to all living creatures by our sun. We know that the sunshine often dispels the fears which have come upon us at
We know that difficulties which seem insurmountable as viewed by moonlight, melt before us like mist when the beautiful, golden rays of the sun are turned upon them. We may be courageous, the sun shines, but when and while positive strong has it disappeared below the horizon and the shadows of night have settled down upon us our courage dwindles, and we often become weak and negative. More souls pass out of their bodies at night than while the sun is shining; and people who are ill grow worse as the sun commences to decline. All these conditions are governed by the law of vibration. The light waves or vibrations from the sun are the strongest, the most powerful and the most magnetic that come to us from any source. They vibrate at the rate of a golden yellow, and therefore are a continuous flow of force currents to this world and to all other planets
night.
near enough to receive their vibrations. When a person or any other individualized consciousness
concentrates its thoughts upon the sun it receives a mental and a magnetic treatment from that great center, since the concentration of thought opens a direct channel for the great force to flow through to the one concentrating upon it; and the vibrations both mental and physical of that person or creature are
50
raised in proportion to the intensity of its concentration.
powers
of
Divine Mind plate and each
is
precisely analogous to a sensitive
human thought makes a picture on that plate. By thought you make the exposure, and the thing pictured will in time become your own, for
and time develops hold the image you have you made long enough you will get a perfect picture if you think idly, then you have made what the photographers would call an under exposure and the picture is not full, clear and perfect, and many of the
you are attached
to your creations
If
the picture for you.
details are left out
but by holding the picture firmly and strongly, you make it a permanency and then it is yours, for thoughts become things. Mental pictures are first mental things, but after
;
a time they become physical things or draw physical things to them, for the great Consciousness gives
back to us precisely what we send into it. It gives to us whatever we ask of it, and our ignorance in making demands will be no protection to us. The only way that evolution can go on is by Divine
Mind granting every request that we persistently make it is in this way we gain wisdom through ex;
perience.
This automatic action, as it were, of Divine Conwas fully taught by Jesus, but is as little understood or believed in by his present so-called followers as it was by those whom he originally tried to teach. You remember he said "J u dge not that be not for with what ye judged judgment ye judge
sciousness
:
;
51
ye shall be judged and with what measure ye meet And again he it shall be measured to you again." said: "Ask, and it shall be given unto you; seek, and ye shall find knock, and it shall be opened unto you." And when he said these things he was stating what he knew was a law which could be put into operation then or at any time afterwards.
;
;
LECTURE THREE.
DUAL MIND AND
ITS ORIGIN.
If we let a ray of light pass through a series of colored glasses we find that the color of the last glass it passes through is the tint that the light will
take; and the tint of the light will be accentuated because the colored glass modifies certain other colors not consonant with its own nature, while it permits the rays of a similar vibration to its own to pass through. The same conditions hold good with consciousness. Consciousness is limited in its manifestation by the medium or media through which it manifests. For an illustration, take the consciousness of a flower, an animal, and a man. There is a limitation of the expression in each of these, by reason of the form in which it manifests. And consciousness also accentuates the peculiar nature through which it manifests. It accentuates that particular portion of the Universe, or planet, or man,
in
which
it
manifests.
Concentrate your consciousness your mind on your right foot, and hold it there for awhile, and you will draw the blood from other parts of the body into the foot, until it will become swollen and red. You
are thinking of the foot to the exclusion of all the rest of the body. That portion of your consciousness which is functioning in the foot is accentuated
52
Dual Mind and
Its Origin.
53
in the rest
above the consciousness which remains

of
Carry this a step further, and body. we find that the law operates precisely in the same manner with the entire man. Consciousness accentuates that portion of the man in which its greatest expression is. For that reason, since the early Christian centuries the body has been mistaken for the
the
man, because
it
his consciousness or
that portion of the consciousness.
medium through which mind expressed itself it was the man which was accentuated by
was
the last
of the real nature of
Very
little
was known
man
and third centuries of the Christian era, except that he was a body which was generally regarded as the man. The theologians knew there
after the second
was a body, and, consequently, in their theology the body was put forth primarily as man. They thought
he had a soul, and taught certain doctrines concerning that indefinite something which they designated as his soul. This term "soul" is still somewhat indefinite at the present day. Any of the leading dictionaries will give you a large variety of meanings
attached to the word. The theologians could not define or picture the soul, but they accepted the Jewish conception of the
Adamic man, and believed

;
that
Adam was
life
;
created out of the dust of the ground and that afterward God breathed into him the breath of
and they regarded that breath as
his soul.
We find in the Hebrew Scriptures

ment
(a
life
the Old Testa-
the expression, a "nephesh for a nephesh" for a life), and "He that taketh the nephesh
54
of Mind.
of his neighbor's ox," etc., showing that the exoteric Jews had no conception of a soul as distinct from the
Universal life principle and they have very little conception of it to-day. So when the Christians rendered in theological language the Jewish thought, they called the life principle of man his soul. Later
in the centuries the
"moral philosophers" appeared

indefinite in their
on the scene, and were almost as
teachings concerning his true nature as were the theologians. These moral philosophers whom we
now call metaphysicians also taught something about a soul or mind but there was a confusion of words, due, of course, to a confusion of thought, and
;
instead of teaching what soul or mind was, they described the phenomena of mind.
in the writings of Sir William Hamone of the representative thinkers of ilton, who was his time, which was not far from our own age, we read the discussions concerning mind, and we find the question: how many articles or subjects can the human mind be conscious of at one time? Also
For instance,
discussions of the peculiar phases of sleep-walking, unconscious memory, etc ; in other words, the study
of the
phenomena of mind. All the Occidental ancient moral philosophy concerning the inner mind, soul or spirit, as they were indefinitely designated,
was
really
what we now
call physiological
psychol-
ogy, and pertained entirely to the action of mind upon or through the body.
external
Since the consciousness manifested chiefly in the man in those days, and since the body, plus
Dual Mind and

a
little
Its Origin.
55
indefinite
it
something more, was regarded as
the man,
natural that the theologians should have taught the doctrine of a physical resurrection. Many of them did not know how to account for immortality unless there was to be a physical
was only
resurrection
at least this
was
true after the
Council of Nice.
Christian and the
in the
We
find at that time that the
Jew were the only two religworld who feared a dissolution of the physical body; and naturally there arose the barbaric practice of burying dead bodies for the purpose of preserving them. The Egyptians preserved their dead only for the supposed purpose of having their old atoms to use again on their return
ionists
to earth.
The majority of people of the present day have not progressed much further than the theologians and the metaphysicians of the early centuries. Ask
ten
a
men whom you may meet in every-day life, what man is, and nine of them will describe the physical body. You will be surprised to learn how little is known of anything besides the physiological man. I have been told by persons who were considered intelligent, that the soul is a
body something
like the
physical, only more beautiful, because it has wings like a bird and I believe that was the common con;
ception of the people of the middle ages. Many of the old paintings represent the soul as a body, floating through space with a pair of wings. The body,
plus wings, chic or real
was the
artistic
conception of the psy-
man
in ancient times.
56

few days ago
I
of Mind.
A
like.
woman
in the city, After considerable thought upon the subject she replied that she did not know, but supposed it was something white that fluttered like a sheet in the wind. I asked another the same question, and
asked a well known Church what she thought a soul looked
she said she was not certain, but thought it was something like an alarm clock attached to the body,
which kept ringing when one did something one ought not to do. With nine-tenths of the people there is no distinction between themselves and their
bodies, for
man knows
;
very
little
of himself at the
and it would be well for each of you to stop now and see what definition you can formupresent time
late
concerning yourself. In the middle of the nineteenth century, the more adventurous minds commenced to investigate the nature of man and the fact of whether or not
immortality
what
is
was demonstrable, and there arose known as the Spiritualistic movement, or
In this country, and in France, the maintain that there is a persistency of investigators consciousness after the dissolution of the physical
Spiritualism.
body, and that certain phenomena are produced by it. This was the first general deliberate attempt in Christian times to discover the soul of man, and
the
first effort
to collect a sufficient
amount
of sci-
entific
data on which to base a philosophy concernthe ing psychic man. They have given us no phil-
osophy
yet,
although
in
menced sometime
their investigations comthe middle of last century.
Dual Mind and
Its Origin.
57
The
principal tenet of their belief is that beyond this earth life there is somewhere an eternal progression for the human soul, which certainly is an improve-
ment on the old orthodox Christian belief in stagnation by reason of the wearing of crowns, waving of palms, and singing hallelujahs forever and forever.
The next movement along this line commenced was known as the Theosophical movewas started for the purpose of studying, among other things, man, and particularly his This movement gave a latent psychic faculties.
in 1875, and in ent.~ This
more exhaustive and complete theory concerning the nature of man than was then to be had in the Occident. Vague it was at times, and the several
sections of the
themselves.
movement differed in belief among Some made man a combination of
seven, and others of fourteen, different personalities or principles ; but, nevertheless, it was an attempt to
reach something besides the physical. In 1886 there was another movement along the
line of investigation of
psychic phenomena.
This
was called the Society for Psychical Research, and worked along the same general lines that the Spiritualists were investigating. The object to be attained was to establish scientific demonstrations of the
persistency of man's consciousness after death, and
many
scholarly
men and women became
investi-
gators with this object in view. If anything more than what the Spiritualists had learned before them has been gained along this line it has not been re-
58
ported to the world, though I have no doubt that any real genuine enlightenment from this society would be thankfully received by many.
of investigators whose Hypnotism, and which is mesmerism, revamped and renamed. Hypnotism has done a little good for the world, and it will do considerable harm before it becomes generally condemned. We want to see the good in everything, so I shall call your attention to a few facts that Hypnotism has brought forth. It has proved to the minds of many, and it has certainly given evidence to the minds of all who have investigated it, that the body of man is not the man. For when a person is put
Finally
came that body

called
practice
is
into the state of hypnosis, the body is unable to think, to feel, or to function in any way. If the body
were the man, sleep could not extinguish entirely his consciousness there would be enough left to regis;
ter sensation.
man
and
stick a pin into the flesh of a ordinary sleep you will get a quick response, unless you are very active you may regret makIf
you
in
ing the investigation. the flesh of a man who
But
is in
if you stick a pin into a state of complete hyp-
nosis, you will find there is no response from your victim. This shows that in one case there is con-
sciousness, and in the other there is none. This evidence is sufficient to prove to the unprejudiced in-
vestigator that the body is not the man, but there is within the body a recording something that is capable of sensing things external to the body. The
phenomena
of
Hypnotism
also
show
that the
mind
is
Dual Mind and
Its Origin.
59
not the product of the molecular vibration of the and while the brain is quiescent, the mind continues to be active. These experiments are further verified by the use of anaesthetics. When a person is etherized, the efbrain, because during hypnosis,
same as if he were hypnotized; because both cases the mind, or the real man, is forced out of his physical body, which is then incapable of functioning, and remains inert until the
fect is the
in
reasoning principle returns to its habitation. Many times, a subject has been put into hypnosis and the consciousness sent out of the body to a distant place,
that
whence it has brought a correct report of things were occurring there at that time. Hypnotism, therefore, has done two very good things. It has
scientifically
proved that man is mind, the thinker, and that mind can persist separate and apart from its vehicle, the body and if that condition can exist for one moment, then there is no logical reason why
;
should not exist throughout eternity. Hence we have here some scientific data for immortality. Investigations upon these subjects were first made in recent times in Paris, and in Nancy, France; afterward in the United States and in Sweden, and Investigators found finally throughout the world.
it
was a mind capable of experiencing senwhich ordinarily functioned in the human body, but which could be separated from it as I have just described. But they also found that there is a secondary mind in man, and that after the first mind is well under the control of the hypnotist, there is
that there
sations
60
still
a secondary mind or intelligence which may act This secondary conindependently of the first. sciousness they named the subliminal self. So they have found that man is not only a mind, but he is two minds. In the course of time the first consciousness that was reached became known as the objective mind,
If
and the second consciousness as the subis
jective mind.
something and Hypnotism has shown then mind must have a form and a color. cannot conceive of anything in the Universe that is without form and color. Individualization, separateness requires form and color, or those conditions could not exist. A great mass of evidence has been collected from various sources upon this subject. Spiritualistic Societies, the Society for Psythat
it is
mind
We
chical Research, and clairvoyants, seers tives all over the world agree upon the
mind has form. They differ the question of whether or not it has color, but that is a logical necessity. They say that mind has form,
that
and sensione point somewhat upon
and that its form is the same as that of the body which it inhabits, and that the real man is an etherialized prototype of his physical self. In other words, the physical self is but a materialized picture of the inner man or mind. All evidence agrees on
that point, and

thing,
it
if
human testimony
is
worth any-
certainly conclusive in this case, because there is a unanimity of evidence from four
is
great sources which do not harmonize on other points.
many
Dual Mind and
Its Origin.
61
About
color there
is
a great difference of opinion,
due to a difference in the respective development of the observers. Let me illustrate. A woman is walking along the street, and observes another woman "What a beautiful dress," approaching. She says and is asked what is its color, and answers "blue." She is asked how it is made, but can only say that its general effect is beautiful, and its color is blue. Another woman who saw the dress would tell you its color and how it was made. Still another would agree with both the others, and would add,
:
"And
the
woman who wore
the dress
last
was more
beautiful than her dress."
The
observer was
able to see not only the dress, the design, and the figure, but also the character of the woman within.
It is the same with the four classes of observers or investigators that have been mentioned; some are persons who ordinarily function solely upon the
life, but who, under exceptional sometimes see the outlines or figure of conditions, the psychic or real man. Other more careful observers having advanced to the point where they can command the higher natural forces, and can func-
objective plane of
tion
upon the subjective
side of
life,
may
see not
only the outlines of these mind or soul forms, but see them as plainly as they see physical forms around them in the ordinary affairs of life. Then
there are others
who have advanced
so far in their
evolution that they can look beneath the form of the man and see the character. These persons are
the Seers, or higher Clairvoyants.
The
last
two
62
of Mind.
classes agree with the Occultist in
making the
as-
sertion that the character of
mind
is
always known
its color and this must be scientifically true, because there could be no differentiation of form except through the vibration which manifests as color.
by
a logical necessity, as well as a matter of testimony, that every human mind or psychic man
it is
So
has form and color.
There is one thing in the world that cannot lie, and that thing is vibration. The vibrations of a man determine his form and his color. And his thought
or character
is
see later, in another lecture. we have learned that man
the cause of his vibrations, as we shall As far as we have gone

is
identical with mind,

;
mind has form and color also that man has two consciousnesses which are called the The normal objective and the subjective minds. color of the subjective mind of man known in the
and that
this
theological parlance as spirit
is
blue.
It is of the
same nature as the Ether or Divine Consciousness whence it came. The color of the objective mind
of
man
;
called
by the theologians the
soul
is
green and man's predominating color is always determined by the mind which dominates. Having arrived at this point, we will now examine the origin of these respective aspects of man, the objective and
the subjective.
Evolution
its parts.
is
We find
not carried on equally throughout

this is true
all
carried
gate the operations of this on by the creation of centers within the
wherever we investilaw. But Evolution is
Dual Mind and
Its Origin.
63
Great Consciousness, and by enlarging and preserving these centers. As actual reform is carried on in a great city by the reformation first of individuals, and not with trying to reform the whole public at once, so it is with the great law which works
through centers or individuals. The Occultist differs from the physicist in his views of the law which governs natural selection. The physicist illustrates the working of this law in
a
who
like this: little Hottentot, represents the highest degree of development in his particular locality, wanders into the forest,
manner something
little Hottentot who is the highexponent of the development of another tribe. These two, being male and female, meet by chance, and by natural impulse or selection marry, and raise a family of little Hottentots to a higher degree of development than themselves. This is the law of natural selection, and chance determines the entire
and meets another

est
evolutionary career of the race, according to the

physicist.
But the Occultist has a maxim that "nature, unaided, fails," and believes that there could be no evolution except by working through conscious centers.
For instance, our sun is a center purposely formed, and through that center great life force is consciously sent out to smaller, weaker centers, imbuing them with life, and promoting other forms of life and
growth upon them as it does upon this planet of It is the same with species and types; it is not a natural selection, in the sense of nature workours.
64
artificial
ing blindly, that causes evolution, but it is rather an selection, or the raising up of individual
parts.
Take man,
such advanced
men and women
for instance; the as he
Adept knows
selects
are ca-
pable of evolving more rapidly than others, and by putting his own force and strength upon them he aids in their development, and in this way these
selected individuals are assisted
come the highest expressions
of
upward till they bemanhood and wom-
anhood. In the animal and vegetable kingdoms man takes the highest expression of this or that form or type, and through artificial, conscious selection, unites them with other forms, and thus produces a higher type of expression, as in the breeding of animals and
sists that
the grafting of trees and flowers. The Occultist inthe purposiveness of Deity, as Nature, is
present in all Its individual parts, but becomes fully manifested only through the conscious co-operation of the more evolved centers of Itself.
Understanding this, we are now prepared to examine the origin and development of the subjective and objective minds of man. In passing, it should
be stated that while
we
will use the
terms objective
and subjective mind as being one of the accepted expressions of the modern psychologists, we do not fully endorse their views as to the nature and power
of those respective minds. First, then, as to the origin of the subjective mind. The Occultists teach that the subjective mind of man came direct from the substance of Deity, much
Dual Mind and
Its Origin.
65
as Minerva sprang from the head of Zeus. the co-operation of the Elohim those great
With Ones
said "Let us make man in our own image," the Supreme Consciousness coalesced within Itself quantities of Its particled portion until mind forms were created. The atoms were drawn together by the power of attraction, and it was thus that the subjective minds of men were born. Let us illustrate: Imagine the atmosphere to be the Supreme Consciousness. Look forth into it on a cloudless day. The atmosphere itself is heterogeneous matter and
who
is
ordinarily invisible.
After a while you
may
see a
gradual condensation of some portion of the atmosphere, a center is being formed, a cloud appears
which
of the same nature as a part of the atmosphere, and sufficiently condensed to become visible to you. It is in this manner that individual minds
is
are born out of the Ether.

tration
something we have
; freezing water. At first then there is a lowering of the rates of vibration of the atoms that compose it, and gradually some tiny
as an illusused before a pan of the water is homogeneous
Take again
These crystalline forms are attracted, and small pieces of ice appear in the pan. This ice is of the same nature as the water, yet it is separate and distinct from it. It is in the
crystalline forms appear.
same manner that the substance of Deity is condensed and the individual subjective minds of men are born. Those of you who have read my wife's Occult novel, "Mata, the Magician," will remember
66
this
same thought
is
there, poetically
and beautifully
expressed, as follows:
"It thinks,
It wills,
It loves,
and Suns spring into shape and Worlds disintegrate; and Souls are born."
It is not my purpose to enter into the details of the working of the law of evolution, but to help
you understand your own nature
I shall
give briefly
an outline of the evolutionary steps that are taken
by the subjective mind in its process of individualization. As you have seen, an immediate condensation of consciousness within the Great Consciousis caused by the desire of Deity to manifest or express Itself in individualized forms, and this expression is brought into actuality through the instrumentality of the Planetary Spirits, or Elohim.
ness
their thoughts to a designated point in the Ether, form a center, and through the vibrations of their united thought-forces cause an assembling of atoms whose conscious sides re-
These great Beings send
spond to these vibrations.
The physicists tell us that with the grouping of atoms into molecular life a new individuality is always created, which is something more than the sum
total of its constituent parts.
this
is
The Occultist says true because the union of the conscious

atoms causes the character or individu-
side of the
ality to
appear in the group. So, when the many atomic consciousnesses are compressed into an oval
Dual Mind and
Its Origin.
67
form by the Elohim, there comes into being an organized consciousness or mind, which controls its atomic parts. These Ether-born minds thenceforth take up their evolution and gather and store their experiences as they progress, and by such methods
become more and more
individualized.
The
evo-
lution of these subjective minds begins upon the subjective side of life, and for ages they continue
upon planets that are composed of such tenuous matter that they are invisible to the present sight of men. After these subjective minds have become thoroughly individualized, they or
to progress
rather we, for these subjective minds are ourselves become ready to incarnate in animal forms on
world of ours. There are two classes of subjective minds which always incarnate at the same time on a physical world. Those who have been brought into existence in the Cosmic Day, and those who have attempted their evolutionary career one or more times before in some other Cosmic Day, but who failed, and are now making another attempt to go on in their evolution. For a center of consciousness may
this physical
not be successful in the particular period of evolution in
which
is
it is first
brought into existence; and
salvation
alone.
not a mere matter of faith or belief
It depends entirely upon one's self whether one reaches Godhood from manhood in the evolutionary period in which one sets out.
Until the half-way point was reached in the evolutionary career of man and this planet, the Uni-
68
of Mind.
versal Consciousness pushed men forward. After the half-way point was passed, and men had reached
their mental majority,
and should have become
in-
dividualized, the old order of things
Men must use their use of the knowledge they have of Nature's laws, if they expect to go on in their evolution. It is to remain unor fail and return into space, progress, til another period of evolution shall commence, when
souls shall again attempt to perpetuate their individuality. Ultimately, man's destiny is to evolve to
was changed. own minds now, and must make
something higher than manhood he is to some time reach Godhood. Your attention will now be called to one or two characteristics of the divine portion of man. The subjective mind is the divine nature, because it comes direct from the Great Universal Consciousness; it is the Logos, or the Word made flesh. It is the highest because it is the first expression of the Universal Consciousness it is close to the heart
;
of God, is the first born, and carries the first impress of Deity. Because its evolution was entirely
it
subjective before it reached this planet, and because now functions normally on the plane of causes
the mental plane it is the intuitive portion of man. It is that portion which knows without reasoning,
which apprehends immediately upon the presentation of a subject; that which sees causes. The objective mind evolves entirely upon this planet. It is an offspring of this particular period of evolution, and its nature is the result of its ob-
Dual Mind and

jective
its
Its Origin.
69
Briefly,
growth and physical experiences.

is
Deity settles down as a or of consciousness cloud upon a planet, great mass

evolution
as follows
:
and form to it, and gives to the mineral kingdom its form of consciousness by ensouling it. I do not mean you to understand that this lower kingdom becomes wholly individualized. For instance, in the vast fields of coal and iron the and
vitalizes
it,
gives
life
Great Consciousness has not individualized because that form of expression restricts individualization; but when we examine the higher portion of this kingdom the precious stones we find that here, in a measure, individualization has begun. A part of the mass, a few of the purest and best atoms,
those which are capable of taking a more rapid rate of vibration, have become separated from the
others,
tion.
and have made an attempt
at individualiza-
Then
a part of the Great Consciousness passes
on to the vegetable kingdom, where we have first the lichens and grasses; each of these is a separate and distinct form, and consciousness is there
but the individualization is not perbecause of the frailty and lack of persistpetual ence of the forms. Thence the consciousness passes into the bush, and afterward it reaches perfect indiindividualized
;
vidualization in the tree, the highest form of the vegetable world.
life in
Then a portion of the Great Consciousness sweeps on into the animal kingdom and ensouls the lowest animal forms, and gradually, as evolution prepares better vehicles, these souls of animals, or indi-
70
of Mind.
vidualized intelligences, re-embody themselves in higher physical forms of animals, until we have the
elephant, the horse and the dog. Here individualization becomes not only consciousness, but it becomes mind, and persists as animal mind. It re-
one form after another, and the comes back many times to this material plane a dog, and gains more strength and knowledge by its experiences. Finally these individualized animal minds pass into the ape forms, and thence into physical human bodies, and though these bodies disintegrate and pass away, the animal minds persist and reincarnate and ultimately become the objective minds of men. When these quasi-human forms have reached the
embodies
itself in
dog, for instance,
point of development where they are capable of becoming vehicles for the Divine Subjective minds,
then the union of the subjective and objective minds takes place. The subjective minds come to earth for the purpose of getting experience upon this material plane, that
they may become wiser, and more also that they may raise individualized; strongly the animal minds or objective consciousnesses, which they ensoul, to a higher and a better condition of development; for with the interblending of the Divine Subjective mind with the objective or animal mind comes a permanent union, and those
hath joined together" cannot be separated without a tremendous loss to each, as will be shown in the lecture on "Lesser Occult or Psychic
"whom God
Forces and their Dangers."
Dual Mind and
Its Origin.
71
After the union of the subjective and objective minds has taken place, this united entity continues to incarnate and re-incarnate as its physical bodies wear out. Understanding this, you will be better able
to appreciate the
meaning
where
it
says:
"And
it
came
of Chapter Six of Genesis, to pass, when (ani-
mal) men began to multiply on the face of the earth, and daughters were born to them (that is when sufficient forms were created), that the sons of God
(the subjective minds) saw the daughters of men (the objective minds) that they were fair; and they took them wives (blended with them) of all which
they chose." Genesis is the disarranged, mutilated remnant of a Chaldean Occult record, and even in its present form, with the interpolations it has received, it contains great truths. Some day an Occultist may re-arrange the original parts of the Bible, and interpret it for the enlightenment of the world, but as it is, it contains much for those who are able to
read and understand.
The objective mind, or animal intelligence, is the reasoning or intellectual faculty of man; it is that faculty which becomes educated through external
which
means, and learns from books; it is that faculty is taught to reason and it is also the seat of sensation. If it were not for the objective mind we could not feel, as was shown heretofore when we cited Hypnotism. The objective mind is also sometimes designated as the brain intelligence. Because it gains its knowledge entirely from externals, it is
;
72
oftener
It
wrong than right in relation to true causes. only takes into account effects or phenomena, and then, not having all the facts, in most cases it is incapable alone of deducing a right conclusion. When the subjective mind has incarnated into the objective mind we have the real psychic man, the dual man. This interbl^nding of these two consciousness makes one form, and in that form it perpetuates itself. Why is not a man as wide as he is long? It is because of the form of the inner man which is the model for the physical body. The inner man is the magnetic matrix into which the
physical particles are built.
Thus
it is
that
all
form
has its mental basis. Before a form can exist on the physical plane it must be created on the mental
plane.
Since both these minds
are
condensations of
the Universal Mind, they both have naturally the characteristics of that Mind. The Universal Consciousness brought them into existence through Its creative capacity, so both these minds have the
however, is animal exThis is perience, has acquired the animal fear. the chief characteristic of the animal mind and is its mainspring of action; hence most of the crea-
of creating. The great trouble, this: the objective mind, through its
power
tions of the objective
mind are the product
of fear
or are colored by fear.

before
For example, our mothers stamp fear upon us we are born, and continue to do it after we are born,, and until we have grown old enough to
Dual Mind and

fear for ourselves.
Its Origin.
73
They
create diseases for us
through their fears of disease until we get old enough to create our own diseases. And that
wretched fear follows us from the cradle to the grave. We are afraid we shall not succeed in business, and we create our own failures. We fear we shall not have money enough to pay our bills for the current month, and we generally lack something because we have created that lack. We fear bad luck, disasters, and death, and it is indeed a wonder
that man has not swept himself off this planet through his fearful creations. The offsprings of fear are the creatures and creations of this objective mind; and the subjective mind which is within the
objective mind accepts the unfortunate creations, believes the misrepresentations, and unites its own
forces with those of the objective mind in bringing the pictured calamities into real external existence.
For example,
once knew a
little girl
who was
named
after her aunt, to the child: "I hope
and her mother often said you will not have a cancer,
After a time a
and die with
it,
as your aunt did."
small bunch appeared on the child's cheek follow"That looks ing an abrasure and her mother said
:
as
might become a cancer." After awhile, when the child's attention was called to the tiny bunch on her face, she would gravely declare that it was her cancer. Her mother had suggested the thought, and the little one had accepted it. When she grew
if it
to
womanhood
the cancer developed, as the mother
74

it
of Mind.
it
and child had feared moved.

I
would, and
had to be
re-
ness and
knew a man who was very fortunate in busiwas successful in everything he undertook.
a friend said to him:
One day
"Your luck
can't
always go one way." Very soon he began to think about that remark, and after awhile he accepted it as a prophecy, and then began looking for his good luck to change to bad. Soon little things began to go wrong, and every time some misfortune came to him he remembered what his friend had said. Then he commenced looking for mishaps everywhere, and within five years from the time he accepted the unfortunate suggestion he was ruined financially and physically. Here are three rules which it might be well for
you
to
First.
remember in this connection The dominant consciousness always con:
trols the creations.
Second.
Third.
one.
If
The environment shows which

Ignorance of the laws of
life
conscious-
ness controls.
excuses no
you continue to create ignorantly you will sufsame as though you knew the law, because an unwise use of the law brings unfortunate results the same as the wise use of the law brings good results. God always gives you in time precisely what you create, and if you allow your objective mind to do the creating you must accept its creations your
fer the
;
ignorance will not excuse you.
If
you should
kill
Dual Mind and

a
Its Origin.
75
it
because you were angry, whether you knew was against the law of the State, or not, you would be punished. It is the same with the moral law.
man
Both your minds can create good, but the objective mind usually does not do so until it has been properly trained. The subjective mind of man must control the objective mind and its fears before he can make pictures that will bring him pleasant environ-
Every time an unpleasant thought or fear comes to your mind, banish it. Every time a thought of disease comes, blot it out. You can do it, because you have the divine power, and can control your objective mind which is your instrument and vehicle. If a mental picture of disease comes into your mind and you let it remain, it will become a
ment.
if you destroy it the moment nothing can come from it. In the place of a picture that you do not like, make one that
physical reality; but

it,
you see you do
in time, will fulfill
you
picture, and God, desires thus your expressed. But never will be successful, you never will reach
like.
Make your thought
the highest of your possibilities until you control your own objective mind and its forces. How to do that we will take up in the next lecture, which we will call "The Art of Self-Control."
One more word

is
mind.
in regard to the dual man, which This dual nature of mind or man will ex-
plain
many
of the contradictions of
human
nature.
It will
is
give a full explanation of original sin, which nothing more nor less than the uncontrolled ani-
76
of Mind.
mal nature of the objective mind, which expresses itself whenever and wherever the opportunity is given, until it has been disciplined. If you want a colt to become a racehorse you will take great care to have it thoroughly broken and trained before you enter it for a race; and still you permit the animal objective mind of your own nature to remain untrained, and to dominate you while you are trying
to use
If
it
in the race of
life.
you remember the distinction of this dual nature of mind you will understand what has paralyzed the force of the Christian Scientists and has filled them with great terror. They describe a something outside of Deity that creates, but can only create
;
is
evil.
not divine, but which They do not know
where it comes from they merely know it is in man. That cult calls it malicious animal magnetism, and makes of it a personal devil; but it is nothing but the objective mind of man, uncontrolled. It is a part of the Universal Consciousness, and therefore not devoid of good. It is more ignorant than bad, and makes mistaken creations in its undeveloped
state.
Understanding the lower nature of man, you understand the nature of evil. Evil is but the creations through ignorance of this objective mind. It is a misdirection of the creative forces; it is the permitting of the unenlightened animal mind to
make
tions
creations.
Many
of the old theological ques-
and the Christian and Mental Science ques-
Dual Mind and

tions of
Its Origin.
77
modern times are understood, and are explainable, when one understands the dual mind of
man.
LECTURE FOUR.
THE ART OF SELF-CONTROL.

One of the reputed wisest men that ever lived said "He that is slow to anger is better than the mighty
and he that ruleth
city."
:
Of
his spirit than he that taketh a course I refer to Solomon.
This lecture on "The Art of Self-Control" might be said to be an amplification of that utterance of Solomon. I am free to admit that it is much easier to talk about self-control than it is to practice it,
we
but, nevertheless, there are certain ways can, in a measure, exercise self-control.
whereby
The
fact
that
Solomon made the remark quoted does not ap-
peal to one particularly, unless one can see the reason for so acting. There are persons who, if they read in the Scriptures that certain things should be done, will do them because the Scriptures command them to be done. And there are persons who will do things because their parents or someone whom they love or honor says such a thing should be done. In such cases the effort is but a perfunctory one, unless a reason for so acting be given, and very little good comes of the obedience to the command under either of those circumstances. Let us see if there is a reason for Solomon's aphorism. It goes without saying that no one can be truly great who has not the power of self-control. It does
78
The Art
of Self-Control.
79
not matter how many virtues a man may have, if he allows himself to give way to paroxysms of anger and loses his self-control at critical moments, his greatness becomes largely diminished; neither can he become really successful in any chosen field
first developed selfhe could keep his anger Napoleon below his chin he could control men. In other words, when his emotions became dominant then self-control was lost and when he lost control of himself he had no power to control others. Grant's
or line of
control.
work unless he has

said
if
great strength lay in his

critical
power
of self-control at
moments.
George Dewey
destroyed the
Spanish Fleet quickly and completely because he controlled himself first and afterward his men. His
command
to his Captain
fire."
Gridley, you may statesman who has not developed this art of
was "When you are ready, Imagine, if you can, a

:
self-
control and you will find that at the moment he needs self-mastery most it utterly deserts him. Imagine one of the great financiers of this country not having sufficient control over his tongue to keep his plans secret, and how long would he be a factor in the world of finance? In the case of physical health, unless there is an
approximate control of the emotions, there will never be permanent good health, because there cannot be perfect health without perfect self-control. The reactions which naturally follow outbursts of emotions bring about physical disorder; if not immediately, then in the course of time.
And above
8o
all,

there can be no progress
made in Occultism unand that which really determines the growth of a student is his power to control himself. Without this power, intuition cannot be fully awakened, clairvoyance and clairaudience cannot manifest and his development is otherwise greatly retarded. A student cannot make use of the higher forces of nature unless he becomes self-controlled first. A mental healer cannot assist or relieve a patient so long as he is in a perturbed condition of mind himself. A student cannot dominate his own body unless his mind is poised and undisturbed. He cannot concentrate on a person at a distance and get his thoughts, unless he has the
less there
be self-control
'
power to make while the power
his
own objective mind quiescent of concentration is put into action.
Some of the reasons I have given why we should master the art of self-control may not interest or appeal to many of you from an intellectual standpoint, but here is one that may. Every time you lose your self-control, your aura or photosphere becomes so actively inharmonious that all the creations you wish to draw to you are repelled. You cannot be a successful creator upon the spiritual, mental or physical planes unless you are able to
control your emotions sufficiently to enable that which you have created to come to you. Another
reason for exercising self-control is this: One can never escape from pain until self-control is acquired. One can never reach the place of peace until the conquest of self is made.
The Art
of Self-Contral
81
As understood by the Occultist, self-control is the control of the objective mind by the subjective mind. Another way of expressing the same thing
is
to say that self-control
is
the control of the emo-
by the higher mind. This latter statement may seem more tangible to you. Sensations and emotions are the manifestations of the objective mind
tions
of
man as we have heretofore seen. One complete conquest of the objective mind by
subjective
the
mind
is
sufficient
to
establish
self-mastery.
In other words,
we do
not have a
objective mind to conquer in each natural incarnation. To illustrate this let us take hydrogen
to represent the objective
new
mind and oxygen
to rep-
come and the oxygen blends with the hydrogen making a drop of water. The union of the two in the drop of water corresponds to the union which makes the real inner
man.
This drop of water
resent the subjective mind. union of the two minds has
Now
the time for the
may be
at
one time in
a clay jar, at another time in an iron vessel, and another day in a crockery bowl, and then in a Dresden cup; it is the same drop of water no matter
its environment may be. And so it is during your different incarnations; there is but one entity, the psychic man, who is composed of these two minds incarnating together in different physical bodies and if you once conquer your objective mind you will be its ruler throughout eternity. Looked at in this light, it does not seem such a hard thing to do when you consider that you have
what
all
82
of Mind.
only one conquest to make. But while there may be but one conquest there will be many battles to
during these battles that victory is constantly shifting, sometimes being on one side and sometimes on the other; but finally the conquest must be made by the subjective mind. In the early part of our evolution the pleasures of physical and animal life seem to be greater than
fight
it is
and
the pain and consequently the subjective mind, in order that it might receive the pleasures of sensation, permits the objective mind to have absolute dominion. But any force grows with use and the
it manifests itself more and more, becomes so strong that finally the reactions that follow pleasure bring more pain than pleasure, and the subjective mind awakens to the situation and begins to demand a way out of pain. We have been
objective mind, as
indulging in these sensual pleasures during all the ages past; life after life we have given way to the objective mind, and have allowed it absolute
sway and dominion, because we thought there was more pleasure to be had out of life in that way. But reactions came and pain taught us that there
is
a better
way
to live.
Pain
is
the evidence that
the objective mind has not been fully conquered. In the last lecture you were shown some of the characteristics of both minds, but there are a few
I will mention which may possito bly help you identify yourselves with the subor jective mind, your real self. The subjective mind is the "I am I" of man it is the self-conscious-
other facts which
The Art
of Self-Control.
83
ness, or that part of him which studies the states of It is the his consciousness and modes of mind.
center of consciousness in him and until
it
has been
Emotions will not control themselves, and, as the term implies, there must be a Self which can control them. There are two aspects of both these minds, the positive and the negative. In the subjective mind the negative side is the intellectual and the positive side is the will. But at this period in our history the intellectual side of our natures is awakened and the will is not. The objective mind also has two asthe pects, negative or reasoning side, and the positive side or desire. These two aspects in the obmind are blended to a large extent and bejective cause they are thus united that mind is strong. Our first great object should be to awaken the
awakened there can be no
self-control.
in
will portion or force aspect of the subjective mind, order that the will and the intellect, united, may
control the objective mind. There is force enough in the positive side of this subjective mind to accomplish anything it desires and therefore it is to
our interest to awaken this latent but tremendous force in ourselves. Let us see how it works. I say I wish to do something. That is the desire or the
my objective mind expressing itself. But another aspect of my mind replies: "No, you must not do that because it is not right." Here are certain aspects of my two minds in activity, the desire or positive portion of my objective mind and
positive side of
the intellectual or negative portion of
my
subjective
84
;
mind and if jective mind
my
is
not awakened,
will or positive portion of subit will be more than
my
likely that the positive side of objective mind will win the battle. But if the positive side of objective mind says I want to do something, and
my
my
:
my subjective says to do anything of the kind and you shall not'' then there is put into action a greater force than desire and the desire is overcome by the
"You do not want
higher or positive side of
will.
my
will or the positive side of
my
subjective
mind
the
The emotions are natural forces on their proper plane; and because they are natural many persons think it unnecessary to control them and many who
;
would
like to control
them do not know how be-
cause they do not understand their own natures. Because a thing is natural is no reason why it should not be controlled. Electricity is a natural force.
Used properly for illuminating purposes, it is a very good thing. But it is a natural force and can be
used to destroy
erty also, so there
human bodies and valuable propmay be a perversion of natural
by not conthem. To understand our emotions we must trolling since seem to make the them, analyze they up greater portion of ourselves, and their name is legion. In
appearance they are many, and yet, on close analysis, we find only four basic ones and the battle will not seem so hard if we can realize this. The first great emotion, the one that causes us the most needless suffering, is Fear. The second
forces through the misuse of them, or
The Art of Self -Control.

cardinal emotion
is
85
Sensuousness. The third basic emotion is Sex Desire; and the fourth, and most subtle of all, is Vanity. These are the basic elements of the emotional nature. You cannot conceive of any emotion that has not its origin in one
or more of these four.
Let us briefly examine the nature of each of these emotions, since the larger part of the actions of mankind are directly attributable to one or more of them.
Fear is the cause of most anger, most jealousy, most murder, failure, theft, doubt, discouragement, despondency and many other lesser inharmonious conditions. Analyze any one of these states of mind, and you will find that fear is the father of it. Eliminate fear and you have destroyed the root or basis for many of the emotions which lead men
upon fear not and a tremendous amount of many force will be saved; for it must be conquered before very much will be accomplished in life. You remember you were taught in another lecture that the mind is magnetic, and draws to itself whatever
astray.
Begin your
phases of
fight directly
the
it
frequently thinks about. When you are constantly fearing something, you are drawing toward you the
it
thing you fear, and the reason humanity has not
been swept from this planet long ago is because it has shifted its fears from one object to another so often that it has never held to one thing long
enough to destroy
itself.
accomplish rapidly the destruction of this great enemy it is well to begin by controlling some
To
'
86
of Mind.
of its grosser forms, such as physical cowardice. Great numbers of men and women are inwardly
the most wretched cowards and yet suppress the external expression of their fears because ashamed
Here is where the fear of public opinion is greater than the fear of something else, and the emotion is not conquered but shifted. Try to conof them.
quer your cowardice, because it is an enemy to you is retarding your development. Then there are very few persons who do not fear someone. You may not be conscious of the fact, but if you stop to think, you will see that it is true. You dread to meet Mr. Blank because you do not know what he will think of you, or because he is
and
wealthy and you are not, and you are afraid you cannot make so great a display as he can. Or perhaps you have heard that Mr. Blank is a great statesman, and you are in awe of statesmen so you stammer and grow red and wish you were a thousand
;
miles
first
away when you
are introduced to him.
The
thing to do toward overcoming this fear of persons is to declare, "I am not afraid of Mr.
Then calling to Blank, nor of anyone else." mind the image of Mr. Blank, say to it as if he were there in person, "Mr. Blank, you have not the
power to make me uncomfortable, and I am not afraid of you," and continue to repeat this assertion till your perturbation has subsided and you feel that you could face him without a tremor of fear or
embarrassment.
Many women
are afraid of mice.
have seen a
87
room
flight,
full of
women
screaming
like lunatics
put to the most ignominious because a tiny mouse
floor. To cowards of that class I would suggest that you put a mouse into a cage and keep it where you can look at it. Examine its little body through a magnifying glass and make
ran across the
friends with
it,
looking at
there
is
it
declaring constantly while you are that you are not afraid of mice; that
nothing about them for you to fear; that they are small centers in consciousness and you are a larger center in the same consciousness that the
;
same
principle that sustains them sustains you ; and after you have come to a realizing sense of your relative positions your fears will fade away, never
life
to return.
have eliminated the grosser forms of then attack the finer forms, such as fear of the unseen or the unknown. Many persons' lives are made utterly wretched because of their fear of the future. They are continually expecting things that never happen. Others are afraid of the criticism of the world, and a common question on their lips is: "What will people think?" You should remember that the world always criticises and condemns everything and everybody that it does not understand. You must declare, therefore, that you are not afraid of the criticism of any individual nor of the public at large; that you are not dependent upon anyone for your health, wealth or happiness; and that the approval and disapproval of other perfear,
When you
sons,
whether collective or individual, are
alike to
88
you.
will
If
of Mind.
you declare this earnestly and often, you overcome all fear of criticism. Fear being eliminated, we next turn our attention to Sensuousness, which is the result of a perversion
of natural forces.
in order that
The animal
indulges his senses
man indulges his senses not only that he may live, but also to get pleasure from his indulgences; and it is the overindulgence that constitutes the perversion of this
he
may
live;
but
Reaction seldom follows the natural indulgence of the senses for the purpose of living. If a creature eats because he is hungry and stops when the hunger is appeased, there will be no reaction; but when the senses are indulged more for pleasure than from necessity, and there has been an
natural force.
over-stimulation, a reaction always follows the indulgence. Asceticism is one of the moral reactions
from sensuousness. In many places in the Orient, especially in India, asceticism is taught as the proper method of living. Many schools of philosophy in
America have adopted

is is
this Eastern teaching. This the other extreme, and, like most extreme views, not productive of the best results; hence the
Western school
of Occultists does not agree with the Eastern school on this point, which, after all, is but a question of the method of development. Sup-
pression of the senses is not the best plan, and Western Occultists have found that better results are
gained from regulation of the senses. By regulation is meant a moderate indulgence in all that pertains to the normal use of the senses but never yield to
;
The Art
over-indulgence. the pleasures of
of Self-Control.
89
In this manner you may have all without the reactions. Sackcloth and ashes do not indicate that the wearer of them has become spiritual. To deny the body its natural functions, or to whip or torture it, does not make a person wise nor good and there is no more reason in trying to gain spirituality through asceticism than there is through over-indulgence. Use your senses properly and enjoy all the harmless things of life, and let the mind not the desire determine the extent of the use of the senses. This
life
;
is
regulation, the teaching of Western Occultism. The third great basic emotion that mankind has
to learn to control
ral force,
is sex desire. This, too, is a natua part of the force of life and love ; it is a part of the force of magnetic attraction, manifested in the Absolute, and manifestating in every
and
is
part of It according to the nature of its vehicle. In the minerals it is chemical affinity in the animals it
;
manifests as the desire for procreation. In man this force, like sensuousness, should be regulated. Here
again Western Occultism differs from the Eastern In man this schools, where asceticism is taught. emotion should be so well regulated that it should become a creative force instead of an animal desire
for procreation.
I do not mean that this force should be transmuted into mental power, but that it only should be used to consciously create bodies, unmarred by passion, for the use of egos who desire to reincarnate. Use this natural force, but do not abuse it; regulate it, but do not eradicate it. The
90
normal condition of man requires that no part of his body should become atrophied or useless, but that every part of him, whether spiritual, mental, or physical, shall be in a perfect condition. The fourth great emotion that must be conquered
before perfect self-control is acquired, is vanity. This emotion is so subtle that at times it almost baffles
us. The peculiarity of this fault is that the victim does not recognize his defect of character. You can seldom convince a vain person that he is vain and because of its subtlety, it is the hardest and the very last emotion we have to conquer. The first aspect
;
is the grosser or physical vanity which pertains to admiration for its own particular attractiveness of feature, form or face. It is the feeling
of this fault
which prompts you to wear a particular

dress, not because the dress is beautiful,
style of
and be-
cause you love the beautiful, but because you believe others will admire you in it. It is the same feeling which would cause a person to mutilate his horse's tail in order to attract the attention of the public to his horse and then to himself as the owner of This grosser form of vanity we can the horse.
if we wish to, because occasionally it is revealed to us by our friends or enemies, and when But this is only it is discovered it can be eradicated. the beginning of the battle, because next beyond
conquer
and still more subtle, is another phase of vanity which is mental, and this is still harder to recognize
in ourselves.
Mental vanity expresses
itself in all
mental forms.
The Art
If
of Self-Control.
is in
91
man
discovers that he
perior to his fellow
men he
feels it
a small degree suand often looks
with contempt upon his weaker brothers. He tries to dominate those whom he believes are his inferiors in intellect, forgetting the fact that he himself is but a Cosmic infant as compared with the souls who have passed in evolution beyond him. And it sometimes requires many incarnations and many sad experiences to eradicate this defect of character, which really limits his evolution.
Then comes spiritual vanity, and this is the force which actuates all reformers. It is this vanity which makes men say: "All is wrong with the world."
It is
another
is
way
in
of saying the
Its
ness
wrong
Supreme Consciousmanagement of terrestrial
things and / must go forth into the world and right it. God has made mistakes, and / shall correct them. / shall lift all humanity up to my plane and
help
all
mankind
to
my
level.
world to
my
views, and the
conception of God, my and men shall be proselyted to my truth. Spiritual vanity comes in such a subtle guise that one does not recognize the motive that lies behind one's efforts; and yet the time comes in the evolution of
my
/ will convert the people shall accept politics, or my religion
that particular individual when his spiritual vanity must pass away, as it usually does, in martyrdom.
There comes a time in that soul's career when this spiritual vanity is burned out of his nature, and he becomes a perfected, self-conscious center in the
Universal Consciousness, impersonally working for
92
the raising up of the whole of mankind according to the Divine plan. Here is the true At-One-Ment,
where your saviours pass away from the adulation and worship of men and become the unseen and
generally
lent
unknown workers
for
Brotherhood
who
teach, inspire,
humanity the Siand raise hu-
manity as fast as it can receive, with never a word of praise, never a word of recognition, never a word of thanks or of appreciation from the world for their sacrifices and their efforts. Spiritual Vanity
must pass away before perfection
is
reached.
At present we may
of vanity
in
battle with the first
and leave
this last aspect to
two forms be conquered
some other incarnation. Thus we have these four great basic emotions which must be controlled. To do this we must learn to exercise our wills. There are two very good rules by which, if persistently followed, self-control can be attained. The first is, never speak until you
have thought with your subjective mind. It will be impossible for you to speak before you have thought at all, because you cannot have a material manifestation of speech until there has been some mental action. But do not let the emotions of the
mind become expressed in words before you have thought with the subjective mind. In other words, let your thought be divorced from emoobjective
tion before
speech.
room,
you attempt to express your thoughts in For example: You walk out of a warm suddenly the cold air strikes you, and
immediately you exclaim, "I
am
catching cold!"
The Art
This remark
is is
of Self-Control.
93
the offspring of the emotion fear and
not the result of your becoming conscious of a

fresh
air.
little
The
it
manifest fear and

tion of sickness.
objective mind commences to speaks into existence a creaif
Now
you
will stop
and think
with your subjective mind before you exclaim into existence that cold, and claim it for your own, you
which would be the father of and no cold could be created for you. The second rule is, never act until after you have thought with your subjective mind. Acting upon emotion usually leads to regret and is always followed by a reaction. A thousand cases could be cited to prove the truth of this statement and I have no doubt that you have thought of many examples. These two rules, if put into practice even occasionwill destroy the fear
it,
but if you practice them conbe stantly you surprised to see how soon you will begin to dominate the four cardinal emotions; and after they are destroyed, all the others must disappear, because they are but branches from these
ally, will
help you
will
four principal emotions. There are certain aids which will assist you to carry out these rules. First, you should realize that
all
or undevelopment
uncontrolled emotions are the result of ignorance and this knowledge will rob
;
power over you. You will know that are at the emotional point in your evolution, you which is an indication of ignorance of your own
them
of their
power of
self-control.
Then you
will
soon begin
94

development and
set
to see the need of
about cor-
recting the fault. child fears the dark because he does not
know
its
nature or
its
cause.
is
room, and the light

sipated.
he is carried into a dark turned on, when he sees nothIf
ing there to injure him, his fear
is immediately disHis fear was banished when his ignorance
was destroyed. If you can show a person that there is no "bad luck" except that which he has created,
and that the "evil" he fears he builds for himself, immediately you destroy the power he has given to these conceptions. If a man is vain of his knowledge and he can be made to see that the field of knowledge is unlimited, and that his vanity over the small amount that he possesses is but an indication
of his great ignorance, immediately his vanity disappears. So it is by enlightenment that any or all
our emotions are controlled or eliminated from us. The second great aid is this: If we understand what habit is and know the law which underlies it, and if we know that much of our yielding to our lower natures and our lack of self-control is a matter of habit, we shall be able to destroy habits much sooner than if we do not understand them. cannot enter very fully into this subject at this time, but will give you a good working basis to begin with. There are two elements that enter into the formation of a habit. The first is what we may call the law of periodicity, or periodical return, and the second is the initial impulse. The law of periodicity causes a thought or an act to be repeated within
I

a determinate time.
95
The
intensity with
which the
thought was projected, or the act performed, determines the time in which the tendency to repeat itself
will manifest.
Let
me
electric
try to make this plain to you. Look at an light for a moment then shut your eyes
effects.
and note the
Immediately there
is
a mental
vibration or picture of a bright light that passes away after a short time; now it reappears, to
pass
away
it
again.
Again
it
appears and disapuntil
pears,
growing dimmer with each appearance,
fades out altogether. This is an example finally of the action of the law of periodicity, and every
thought, every feeling and every tendency will repeat itself at given periods of time according to the intensity of the initial impulse that gave it birth.
Recognizing this law, if you will remember the exact time your habits repeat themselves, you will be prepared to overcome them with greater success.
What
is
called the association of ideas
is
another
illustration of the
For example, if where we can be alone, and send out an intense thought at nine o'clock in the morning, or at any special hour, we will find on the following day at the same hour that we will be inclined to repeat
at the
working of the law of periodicity. we go to our room, or to any place
the thought. If we yield to our inclination each day, end of a week the habit will be formed and it
will require
some
effort to resist the
temptation to
repeat the practice we have begun. This is the way habits are formed through the cyclic law bringing
96
of Mind.
back to us the thoughts and things we ourselves have created. Someone may say to me, "You are going to lose something," and my heart will almost
stop beating as the picture is presented to my mind. The next time I see the person who made the sug-
mind because
gestion
gestion of loss that same picture will rise up in my I associate that person with the sug-
made
it
to me.
When
pass the place where
we were when
member
the suggestion
was made
and
I will re-
and tremble with
fear,
after awhile
the habit of thought will become so firmly established with me that I will think of the loss predicted until the picture materializes, and becomes a reality
on the objective plane. But the same law which helped you form the habit will help you overcome it if you but reverse
the rule in this
curs, destroy
it
way
When
the mental picture re-
it can materialize. by been have you holding a picture of cannot declare that lose loss, you anything that beto and when you your picture of loss comes longs
denying that
For example
If
up, refuse to look at it and put into its place a picture of something that you want. If you have a
habit of thinking of yourself as an invalid, destroy that habit of thought by picturing yourself in the possession of perfect health. If you have created
the habit of picturing death for yourself, or for a friend, reverse the picture and see him and yourself well and happy; and the law of periodicity will
bring your new pictures along with the old ones, since they are associated together. Each time both
97
pictures appear, look at the new and refuse to see the old and soon the old picture will fade out and
disappear and a
lished.
new order
of things will be estab-
The third great aid in conquering the emotions is through the power of suggestion. Heretofore the objective mind has been making most of the suggestions which the subjective mind has passively
For example: You feel a draft of cold and immediately your objective mind suggests to your subjective mind, which is really you, that you are taking cold you accept the suggestion, and
received.
air,
;
reply, "Yes, that

this draft;"
is
true
I shall
take cold
if
I sit in
and immediately you commence to see the picture of yourself with a cold. You have accepted the suggestion and claimed the creation of the objective mind for your own, and there is nothing that will prevent the picture from materializing for you. But if you will use the same amount of
force in refusing to accept the suggestion of your objective mind that you do fighting the cold after it has materialized you will not let it materialize at all.
you desire to conquer the emotion sensuousness, and your objective mind insists upon gratifying its appetite for the pleasure of eating, you should take the position that you do not want any more food and should suggest to your objective mind that it does not want any more. Speak to it as if it were another person or a child. If you have the habit of drinking, or smoking, and you wish to overcome these habits, suggest to your objective mind that
If
98
it
does not want to drink or smoke; that there is real pleasure to be derived from the gratification of these tastes or appetites, and you will soon see, if you persist in this use of suggestion, that
no
your desires will change, and you will conquer sensuousness without a great deal of inconvenience
or annoyance.
There are certain declarations and suggestions most persons who work along this line find extremely beneficial and I will give you a few of them. "I am your masSuggest to your objective mind and are ter, you my servant, my instrument, and must me." If you persist in making this you obey
that
:
you will soon begin to feel that you are and master, your objective mind must accept it as the truth; and as soon as both minds recognize the truth of that declaration from that moment selfcontrol and self-mastery is assured. Another way to take from the objective mind its power over the subjective mind is to declare "You
declaration
cannot control me," or "You cannot disturb or
make me uncomfortable."
;
The word
"cannot" ex-
presses limitation always ; used in the proper place, it destroys wrong creations used improperly, it limIt is useless to argue with the objective mind, because it is a waste of force; one might as well argue with an animal and expect to convince it of the error of its ways. The only way to be successful in conquering it is to command and compel it to obey, and when it attempts to argue with you command it to be silent.
its
one's
power
to progress.
The Art
of Self-Control.
let
99
Say "Peace, be
all its
still,"
and
protests and arguments
that be your answer to and the greater the

;
vehemence with which you speak these words, the sooner will the objective mind obey you. Separate yourself from your objective mind in thought, and for convenience while learning to master
Realize that you it, identify it with your body. are separate from, and superior to, it ; treat it as if it were a child entrusted to your care by Deity to
While you are putting into these practice suggestions, demand daily from the Power the highest wisdom that you are Supreme
educate and enlighten.
capable of receiving, and "all things whatsoever ye shall ask in prayer, believing, ye shall receive."
LECTURE
FIVE.
THE LAW OF RE-EMBODIMENT.

Herbert Spencer, in his "First Principles," discusses force and matter, and after a long dissertation he accepts as a fact the indestructibility of
matter and the persistency of force. The idea that he develops is that it makes no difference how often matter and force may change form, nevertheless they are persistent; therefore he argues that there is only a certain amount of force and matter in the Universe. He concludes his discussion with the that in his judgment the whole Universe opinion is an unfoldment from the homogeneous to the heterogeneous and back to the homogeneous again and these respective periods he designates as "alter;
nate eras of evolution and dissolution." In his statement that the whole Universe
solution,
is
manifestation of alternate eras of evolution and dis-
Mr. Spencer has touched upon an Occult
For the truth, a fragment of Occult knowledge. Occultist teaches that there is no such thing as eternity, as understood by the Western mind; that
nothing can go on working forever and forever without rest. His idea being that everything moves according to given law, within certain periods, and that there are actions and reactions throughout all
nature.
Those
of
you who are familiar with the
The Law of Re-embodiment.
IQI
Eastern philosophy, will remember that this same thought is brought out there, and is described as "the days and nights of Brahma." Occultism says that the Great Consciousness manifests Itself periodically as the Universe, and after each manifestation there
for
comes a period
of rest, a period of night

Itself
even Divine Consciousness
must
rest.
the Night of Brahma is coming on, graduthe ally living Universe finds its life pulsations slower and slower, and fainter and fainter growing and one by one the planets fade from sight; one
When
by one the
stars cease to give forth their light, and the suns themselves grow dim. The Earth is rolled
up as a parchment, and men and gods and worlds and suns all sink into sleep there are no thoughts in the Great Mind. All is silence, rest, darkness.
Reaction has followed action the day's work has been done throughout all parts of the Supreme, and the Cosmic night has come. This night of rest lasts Eons embracing thousands and untold thousands of years; then comes creation's dawn. There is a slight pulsation within the Great Consciousness and there begins to be the rudiments of the Universe. It is as though one were standing in a great dark auditorium in the center of which burns a flickering flame of light. It is the only point of light to be seen in all that great
;
place; then away in the distance another flame appears, then another and another, till the heavy atmosphere begins to pulsate and soon every portion
of the
room
is
illuminated, and that which
was dark-
102
ness becomes light, and the non-existent exists and becomes motion. You who have stood upon an
tling
city as darkness was setsaw, as the night advanced, one tiny point of light after another appear, now here, now
eminence and watched a
upon
it
was a great blaze of light throughand where it had been obscuration and gloom it became a brilliant illumination. So it is with the Great Consciousness. From Its
there, until there
out the whole
city,
innermost heart goes forth the pulsating

Solar Deities, in
life,
and the
whom
power and wisdom ened to take up their part of the work in the new day, and there a sun springs into existence, then another, and another, until the whole Universe is again brought into activity. These Deities radiate the life force which thrills into activity the Planetary Spirits, who also take up their work, and worlds come forth into space again. These Spirits radiate the life force that awakens the minds of men who have slept through the long night of Brahma, and they resume again their evolutionary journey. And so the morning of a Cosmic Day has come. Deity has awakened, and has planned the day. The Cosmic Days are more or less alike, as are all
the days of men's years alike, except that each Cosmic Day is better than the one preceding it, since
are embodied the greatest that man can conceive, are awak-
each new period of evolution is an advance beyond the one that passed before. Divine Mind images within Itself, or pictures the new day, and thus creates the outline of the plan
by which
all
things shall
The
Law
of Re-embodiment.
103
evolve during that period. Then the greatest centers of consciousness take the plan as imaged by
Deity and carry into execution the idea of the Great
God thinks and the creative agencies bring into existence the physical worlds according to God's idea which they see. God wills and divides into two parts which we have described in a
Architect.
previous lecture as the particled and the unparticled portions, and there is the force and matter ensouled
by consciousness.
Then by
their will
power the
great centers of consciousness direct this force and this matter into the different matrices that Deity has planned, and the suns are formed to give forth light,
and the worlds are made

evolve upon.
for
men and
animals to
The plans made by Deity in the dawn of each Cosmic Day are what men call "Natural Laws/' They are the ways in which Deity selects to manifest during that particular Cosmic Day. These from the center of the plans emanating Supreme radiate throughout every part and portion of It; and the law which governs the visible side of life is the same law that governs the invisible side and if you find a law operating in the realm of physics,
;
you may know that

metaphysics.
it
also operates in the realm of
And now we have seen how Divine Thought has manifested Itself in physical re-embodiment and how the law of periodicity has once again caused
thought to be embodied in form, and how thereafter the law of periodicity makes itself felt everywhere
104
of Mind.
throughout the Cosmic Day. Take, for example, the greatest conception of time that the human mind is capable of actually grasping, the cyclic motion
of our sun.
We
find that
it
travels
point in space through its orbit, in about twenty-five thousand

years. orb to
from a given and returns again and nine hundred
The law
forth
of periodicity has caused that great
and return and a cycle has been go made. The moon also has its particular orbit as has our Earth and all the planets that swing in space; all are governed by the law of Then periodicity. there is man and again history repeating itself,
forming his habits by a repetition of thought. And as it is with the law of periodicity, so it is with all the other impulses which are sent into the Universe by Deity; they continue to manifest over and over again from the moment they are sent forth
until the last throb of the great Deific heart shall
be given and the Cosmic night shall come. The impulses which form a Universe, persist throughout the Universe, and manifest as the Laws of the Universe.
When we find that the Supreme Consciousness re-embodies Itself for a new Cosmic Day we know
that the law of re-embodiment must apply to every part and portion of the Universe; that reembodiment is a Cosmic Law, a law of nature. For
evidence of this truth
let
us study the planets.
Worlds are brought into existence by Planetary Spirits or Elohim who see the Divine thought or
picture of worlds and use the images for matrices.
The
Law
of Re-embodiment.
105
They then
ters,
project their thoughts into these centhereby creating vortices, which, through the
intensity of their vibrations
and the tremendous ve-
locity with which they revolve, draw from boundless space the tiny particles we call atoms, and these seething masses of matter become huge balls of
flaming gases.
After ages and ages have passed
these burning balls cool sufficiently to sustain vegeAnd table and animal life upon their surfaces.
worlds, like the bodies of men, have their birth, their childhood, maturity and finally death and disintegration.
When
principle
in
commences
death comes to a world the life to flow out of it through variIt is
ous channels into space.
seeking
new
centers
which to re-embody itself; and with the passing of the life force from a world we find disintegration taking place. The atoms which composed the compact mass of the external world become demagnetized and fall away from each other, and finally drift away into space to be attracted by other newer and stronger magnetic centers, where they become reembodied in other worlds in which consciousness
may
manifest.
Re-embodiment is a fact in nature, whether you look at it from an Occult standpoint, or from that
of Herbert
Spencer, with his indestructibility of matter and force re-embodying themselves for the purpose of evolution. This law of re-embodiment manifests in all planes, upon all worlds or planets. That we may comprehend it better, let us look at
the action of this law in the several kingdoms on
io6
this

world of ours.
of Mind.
Starting with the mineral king-
find there the lowest expression of embodied consciousness on this planet, and as typical of that kingdom we will consider the action of this
dom, we
Take some of this coal and burn it. The hard black mass becomes ash into and changed gas. The ash returns to the earth whence it came and again forms earth; and the gas which was liberated by the burning comes
law
in coal.
is
What
the result?
atmosphere under its new conand becomes separated into its four component parts which we call oxygen, hydrogen, nitrogen and carbon. The oxygen and hydrogen unite and descend again to earth as water. The nitrogen and carbon unite and form the tissues of a plant and again you find the original elements united, with consciousness embodied in the new form, which is
into contact with the
dition
now
the
a plant.
Passing on to the vegetable kingdom we see here same law manifesting, but in a more pronounced
for as consciousness
manner;
becomes more
indi-
vidualized
God's plans must be manifested through it. As Winter approaches, the life force, which is the animating principle of vegetaThe leaves fall tion, passes down into the roots. the consciousness which manito the ground and
more
of
fested throughout the plant withdraws itself from the external to the internal and lies dormant and
resting, waiting for the impulse which comes with Spring to awaken and arouse it again into action
to bring
it
into the external
that man's heart
may
The Law
of Re-embodiment.
107
be gladdened by the beauty of its expression. As the life force rises slowly from root to branch in the bush or tree, we see the law at work bringing forth new forms of life in the shape of leaf and bud and we know that re-embodiment is taking place among the shrubs and grasses and trees. In the bulb family this same law works. The life force sinks into the tiny bulb at the beginning of
Autumn and
warms and
its
there
it lies
within that tiny sphere,

raises its
and in darkness, the soft breath of Spring vibrations and arouses within
in silence
till
center a desire to again express itself, to appear once more in a newer and a more beautiful form
than that of the bulb. And so it begins to re-clothe itself; it draws from earth and air such chemicals as it needs to give material expression to its beautiful soul or self, and "behold the lilies of the field;
they
its
toil not,
neither do they spin, yet
Solomon
in
all his
glory was not arrayed like one of these," in re-embodiment. Passing on to the animal kingdom we find the
tadpole and caterpillar. Both of these little creatures are good examples of the working of this law.
They
are individual consciousnesses; and before your eyes the tadpole gradually changes its form until it has a distinctly different body from the one it had at first. Yet the new frog body that can leap and swim and croak is animated by the same consciousness that animated the wriggling little form of the tadpole. The caterpillar, having a limited and loathsome form, desires a fuller and a bet-
io8
and passes into a stupor or old atoms give place to new, sleep. which build a better form, until at last the same
ter expression of itself
Then slowly
its
consciousness which crawled and crept upon the earth has re-clothed or re-embodied itself and with wings of a golden hue it soars from earth to air.
the re-embodiment of the butterfly from the caterpillar is not only an illustration of the working
of the law of re-embodiment, but it is typical of the evolution of the soul or mind of man which rises
And
from the lowest depths of ignorance or so-called sin, to manhood and to godhood. This same law is operative in the higher forms of animal life and in the life of man for a law that is a law of nature must persist throughout the Universe. The fact that we do not see the operation of a law is no proof that the law has ceased to act. Nor is the fact that this law manifests differently in different kingdoms and forms evidence of the limitation or non-existence of the law. Every law manifests in each class or forms alike, but differs in its manifestation in different classes of forms because the consciousness within the form restricts but does not prevent the manifestation. For example, the law of gravity manifests the same in all iron, but manifests differently in different kingdoms and sub;
stances.
itself
Individualized consciousness not only re-embodies constantly during earth life, but it re-embodies
itself after it
it
drops
its
entire body.
In other words,
reincarnates.
During the space of every seven
The
Law
of Re-embodiment.
109
some schools of medicine, man a complete undergoes change of body. Is he not therefore in the process of re-embodying himself by this constant renewal of his atoms? According to
years, according to
his rates of vibration or as his
thoughts are elevated

into himself.
or debased does he draw
new atoms
And
dropped one physical body that he has drawn to himself is it surprising that he should have the power to draw to himself another? Is the fact that most men do not remember their past lives
after he has
a proof that they did not formerly exist? If so the majority of men did not exist between the first and
third years of their present lives nor in a pre-natal condition. The Occultists say that man does re-
member
his past lives
when
his subjective
mind con-
trols his objective mind and can function through for in the subjective is stored the memories of it
past experiences.
What we
call
but this
memory
of past experiences
"Conscience" is warning us not
to repeat former follies
and mistakes. Since we have spoken of the re-embodiment of man by the term popularly known as reincarnation, it may be well before we take up other aspects of it to answer a question which is now in the minds of a number of you, and that is: what becomes of man between the times of his embodiments or incarnations?
As
and
in
there are different states of matter in this obsolids, so there are different states of
;
jective physical
world of ours, such as gases, liquids matter the subjective world and these different grades
no
of Mind.
do not lie separate and distinct from each other. For example, on the physical plane there are conditions
where substances interblend, as it were, as they do in a syphon bottle of aerated water, or in a watersoaked sponge, where each substance occupies the
same space while lying within the
other.
Again,
we have
the solid earth with certain waters within

earth.
and on the
Outside the earth
we have water
or vapor in clouds and yet within both the earth and the clouds is air or gases which extend still further
out into space. On the subjective side of life there are finer forms of matter which interpenetrate our earth, water and gas. Around our earth there are belts or zones composed of finer matter very much like the rings around Saturn, and the densest of these rings interpenetrates our earth, while each of the other rings extend further and further into space according to
rarity and size. These rings are material, but each is of a different tenuity of matter caused by
its its
different rates of vibration.
We
might crudely
wooden ball floating would correspond to the first subjective plane and would not only surround the ball, but it would be through the ball as well. Outside the water and surrounding it would
picture our world as a porous in a tub of water. The water
be a
atmosphere representing the second subjective plane and outside of that would be a belt of ether representing the third subjective plane. It is to these several belts that man goes between
belt of
his incarnations
and
it is
to the first belt, that one
The Law of Re-embodiment.
in
which interpenetrates the earth, that the souls or minds of the animals go. According to a man's
rate of vibration or specific gravity is he drawn into one or another of those inner belts or spheres which corresponds to, or is harmonious with, his own vi-
brations.
many
man,
The subjective belts or spheres are not, as think, for the growth and development of but are places of rest where he reviews the
experiences and assimilates the knowledge gained For it is impossible for man to pass bethe yond photosphere of this earth and incarnate
on earth.
upon other planets

claim he does
his specific gravity,
like,
as
until his vibrations,
some modern metaphysicians which control have become so high, so god-
that the law of gravity operating here can no longer confine him to the earth or to the subjective
planes surrounding
it.
man's thoughts are the cause of his vibrations, hence a man who is material, sensuous and sensual, is by harmonious vibration drawn to the first subHe canjective plane and becomes earthbound. not rise higher than any other animal, and so he remains in the first belt which surrounds and interpenetrates the material world until he is ready to reincarnate. But as a man's mentality overcomes his emotions, in his course of evolution, and
as his subjective mind learns to control his objective mind, he becomes more spiritual; his rates of vibration become higher, and then when the time
comes
to rest
between incarnations he
is
is
drawn
to
the belt which
of a higher rate of vibration, and
U2
of Mind.
goes further away from this earth. So, according to the theologians, there is a Heaven and according to Occultism there are several Heavens.
And now comes a very important point in the mental aspect of this law of re-embodiment, which is the practical side of it. Man is not only a center of consciousness, but he is a center of self-consciousness. He has free will within certain great latitudes, and he has freedom of choice, and that fact
holds him to a great responsibility. Man, by his choice, or thinking, determines not only his Heaven,
He directs both the time of re-embodiment and the environment of his re-embodiment. The less developed an ego, the more rest does it require between earth lives. This is a general truth and applies to every For example, you would not expect living thing. a child to work as hard or as continuously as a man you would not expect so much of an undeveloped
but also his earth
life.
his incarnation or
man along any line as you would of a developed man and so it is that the thought or development of a man determines the length of time which must
;
tired,
Weak, elapse between re-embodiments for him. disappointed souls, they who are ignorant of
life,
the laws of
nations.
It is said
require a long time between incarby those who know, that the
average period between incarnations at this time in our evolution is five hundred years for the great mass of men who are not developed. According to the strength of an ego and its desire to evolve, and therefore its desire to have a vehicle through which
The
Law
of Re-embodiment.
113
to evolve, does the period of time between incarnations lessen or lengthen; and I am informed that
among
progressive egos the time between incar-
nations averages now about one hundred years. You can readily see that the shorter the time between
more experience must be gained and the more knowledge carried over from one embodiment to another, the more rapid is our progress on our evolutionary journey. Occultists
re-embodiments, the
;
believe
it
to be advantageous for a soul to keep his
for a very long time; or, in other words, to prolong each of his incarnations to as great a length
body
as
it is
aside a
possible to do. It is a great mistake to cast body before it has become so old and worn
it is no longer of any use as a vehicle. Every moment of our lives we are changing our bodies and are making them better or worse by our
that
thoughts.
We
are also creating our environment,
liberating or enslaving ourselves, according to the create quality of our thoughts and emotions.
We
between ourselves and other souls through hating as much as through loving because whatever our minds dwell upon, that we draw to us. For exties
ample:
If I
think of you, immediately there
is
vibration in the ether between you and me. If I continue to think of you, this vibration becomes
intensified until a blue
magnetic cord becomes
es-
tablished between us
you choose and by which yours come to me.

tion
is
a mental telegraph wire, if over which my thoughts pass to you,
visible to the clairvoyant,
This connecbut not to the
H4
The History <md Power of Mind.
physical eye, and can only be destroyed by disuse for a greater or shorter lapse of time according to
its size and strength. As a spider spins his web from one point to another, so do men constantly
spin thought webs connecting themselves for good or ill with persons or things. If you hate a person, you are continually sending hateful thoughts to
that person and by so doing you keep a constant vibration of the ether between you. After a time
this vibration becomes a real pathway for your thoughts to travel upon and it binds you to the object of your hatred with a bond invisible yet stronger, and harder to break, than a bond of steel. This is the reason groups of egos come back to earth and incarnate in families and communities. Those who love each other are drawn again and again into the closer relationships of life, not because "blood is thicker than water," but because of the ties formed in past lives.
Then there is the great law of equilibrium, the law of Justice that we are constantly putting into action by our thoughts. This law modifies our evolution, and limits our scope of free will under certain conditions. There is a law of absolute justice and it is man's unjust thoughts which lead him
to believe otherwise.
Perfect love
is
synonymous
with absolute justice and God is love. If equilibrium were not maintained on all planes, then chaos would reign supreme; it could not be otherwise.
the physical plane we see the manifestation of equilibrium if we look for it. For example, throw
On
The
Law
of Re-embodiment.
115
a stone into a pool of water, and watch how the disturbance caused by displacing the water at a certain point is adjusted by the movement on the surface of the water from that point to the extreme edge of the pool, and back again to the point of disturbance below the surface. saw the tiny waves that were created by throwing the stone into the water, but we did not understand that it was the great law of equilibrium working to adjust the water of the pool to the new condition we had created in it. It is through equilibrium that the great law of justice brings back to man precisely what he has sent forth, and this is why he often finds in his every-day life that he must re-adjust himself. "Be not deceived; God (the law) is not mocked; for whatsoever a man soweth that shall he also reap." In the city of Chicago there is a unique court, called the Infants' Court. It is the only court of
We
the kind in the world and

are tried.
is where infants or minors Sometimes there are fifty cases tried there in one day, and never less than one hundred in each week. There are cases where parents have abandoned children, or where children have left
their parents. Investigation is made into the character and condition of all the children who are
brought under
to place
its jurisdiction,
and an
effort is
made
them in the particular walk of life where they may become the best citizens. To a careless observer it would seem that when the Infants' Court
had disposed of the child deserted by its parents that would end the matter, but it does not. The
n6
Divine
of Mind.
Law
of Equilibrium caused the child to in-
carnate through those parents because of associations in a past life. Those parents owed to that child the care and attention it should receive until
it
and
should reach an age when it could care for itself; in order that a perfect equilibrium should be established between those three individuals this
was brought to them to receive that which belonged to it by right. Perhaps the parents did
child
not wish to pay their debt to the child and abandoned it, thinking they were rid of the responsiEquilibrium, jusbility; but they were mistaken. tice must and will prevail, and if it be not established in this life then it must be in another. That
invisible cord created
life
by their thinking in a past has not been broken by this attempt to shift their paternal responsibilities. Again it will bring these three souls or minds together, perhaps in the relationship of master and slaves, or of mistress and maids, "For verily I say unto you, till heaven and earth pass, one jot or one tittle shall in no wise pass from the law till all be fulfilled." The same law holds good in the betrayal of trust, whether of affections, or of a fiduciary nature. If
a person wrongs another, the thought of the wronged one goes forth to that other and binds the two souls or minds together with a bond that can-
not be broken until full justice has been done between them. The general character of a man's thoughts determine his general environment, such as the class
The
into
Law
of Re-embodiment.
117
which he will be born and his special thoughts determine the family in that class which will give him his body. For example, here is a man who
;
cultivates only that which pertains to the so-called evil side of life; this is the side of life that he prefers.
He
will reincarnate into
an environment
for himself.
suit-
able to the character he has

will
made
He
be born into criminal circles. There is no use wasting tears about him or his depravity; God is
just,
governed by law. When slum life he has put himself into that condition his own thoughts have carried him just where he belongs. It is quite com-
and
this universe is
man comes back
into
;
mon for a soul or mind to incarnate in a respectable circle of society in one life, yet by dissipation, neglect of opportunities, and cultivating the animal
side of its nature, to
its its
become a
social outcast in
next earth life where it will be able to indulge unfortunate propensities unrestrained by respectis
able friends or relations.
born and reared under favorable is because the character of his He him into that environment. thoughts brought was attached by the Great Law to the parents who were able and willing to give him the advantages he received. We could save ourselves much misdirected or wasted force and sympathy if we would
person circumstances,
If a
it
recognize the fact that nothing ever happens in this world, but that everything is governed by law. I
do not say leave unfortunate souls where you find them, but I say do not attempt to quarrel
n8
of Mind.
with the law which is giving to them precisely what they have desired some time in their career. If you see a soul who wants help, then help it but do not weep over those who are enjoying the fruits of their own thought labors, and do not be dissatisfied, or criticise God because some souls have placed themselves in certain unpleasant walks of life, or have brought upon themselves unhappy conditions. Man not only determines his birth and the quality of his body at birth, but he modifies his body
;
every moment of his life. Take the dissipated, sensuous and sensual criminal, thinking only of that which pertains to the external side of life; he excarnates, and after a time is brought back to earth into an environment where he is pre-natally marked with the very characteristics that his own mind indicates. He takes that kind of a body which is the best expression for him. It is quite unusual for such a soul to succeed in getting out of that environment in one life, because its body and brain
express so strongly those particular characteristics.
It is possible, however, for it to do one of two things ; indulge in the vicious propensities till the depths
of degradation
the price
is
have been reached, and it learns that entirely too great to pay for such pleas-
ures and decides to reform; or it may commence to fight for self-control from the beginning and
gradually
change
its
its
body and invironment by
changing
is
thought. In the sense of making his own character, man his own maker. He has the free will to think,
The and
Law
of Re-embodiment.
119
tendency in a given didoes not make a character, but one thought is a tendency toward a character, since once the initial impulse is given, it has a tendency to repeat itself until a habit is formed, and habits make character. Therefore every thought a man thinks has its effect upon his destiny, not only
his every thought is a
rection.
One thought
shaping his present life, but also his future inPerhaps you were never made aware of how intense a man's thought may be and how immediate is its action upon his physical body. If you are suddenly startled, the effect is instantaneous upon your body, and the entire system may be dein
carnation.
ranged by the
fright.
The majority
and
their
of
men make
their physical bodies
environment unconsciously, but I have known men who have consciously made their bodies over so completely and entirely that their friends I have seen did not recognize them afterward.
their figures
women change
their thoughts and desired them to be.
make them
Persons
through the power of precisely what they

the marks
who showed
of age have brought back the flush of youth, and I have known men and women to prolong their lives
far
beyond the three score years and ten that the
individuals of our race are supposed to have allotted to them.
LECTURE
SIX.
COLORS OF THOUGHT VIBRATION.

In lecture one we saw that in some of the temples of India there are colored figures and symbols. These played an important part in the occult history of that nation, and depict the forces of man and of nature but the world has no record left concerning these teachings, and it is only students of mysticism who can read in those colors occult In those Indian temples man is depicted truths. as radiating from himself various colors; but what does that mean to the average mind? Among the ancient Europeans little was known
;
concerning color.
history,
we
find that
Coming down to more modern among the Greeks there were
no teachings regarding colors. Greek development ran more particularly to sculpture, arts, architecture and to the use of pigments, rather than to what we call science, and hence they had no knowledge of the nature of vibrations. Passing on to the
Romans, we find that they, too, lacked in a large measure any knowledge concerning the nature of
color.
Seneca seems to be about the only Roman who wrote anything along this line, and he only went so far as to show that the primary colors of the rainbow were the same as the refraction of sunlight through broken glass, but he was not able to explain
Colors of Thought Vibration.
121
the cause of the identity of the phenomena. Then passing on to the Middle Ages, we find that those
who had commenced

of color
to
investigate this
i.
subject
from a
scientific standpoint,
e.,
from the
standpoint of light, accepted the theory that all light is the result of certain colors emitted from objects. But about 1665 Robert Hook, for the first time certainly in historic ages, formulated a theory of
wave
motions which
1690, acHuygens, the of the and elaborated and made basis cepted of and color. But vibratory or wave theory light of the great Newton threw his weight opinion with
Christian
in
the old emission theory; consequently the wave theory became heterodox and unpopular, and it was not heard of again for almost a century. Then once more the scientists began to talk about the
wave theory
of light
and of
color,
and
we
find
the old emission theory disappearing and the wave theory meeting with the acceptance of the scientific
world.
This
is
scientists at present;
the predominating theory of our but it seems not to have oc-
curred to
many
of
them that there
is
an element of
truth in both theories and that
by blending parts
of the cardinal ideas of both, an hypothesis might be formulated which would cover all facts and phe-
nomena.
We
among
find a diversity of opinion concerning color
those who study from the standpoint of pigments and those who study from the standpoint of light, as well as some difference of opinion on
this subject in
each of these several schools.
The
122
of Mind.
modern scientist bases his hypothesis upon the wave theory using for his basis the solar radiation,
or the visible so-called white light. And yet he tells you that in point of fact there is no white light,
meaning the sum total of all the solar tells you that the great emission of
trical vibration,
radiation.
He
whichever it may from the sun as a greenish-blue color, is refracted by our atmosphere and manifests itself to our eyes as prismatic colors. But he also says that as the sunlight comes into the world's atmosphere, large proportions of the blue and green rays are withheld by the atmosphere, which has a selective absorption
for those colors.
light or elecbe, that comes
Starting with what must admittedly be largely a hypothetical premise, modern science advances a theory concerning colors based entirely upon such of the solar radiations as reach this earth and are
not absorbed by atmospherical conditions, for it does not seem to have occurred to the modern scientist that there is a vibratory force in the earth itself which modifies the solar radiation.
The Occultist has great respect for the indefatigable energy of the modern scientist, and appreciates the painstaking care with which he collects
but he recognizes that the physicist is only working on the plane of effects and hence causes are but guesses with him. These guesses change from decade to decade as new facts are discovered by further research, and hence the Occultist does not feel bound to follow the orthodox
his facts;
123
theories of any particular decade relative to any branch of knowledge; because he has his own sciences, which have existed for ages, and have been verified by all who have studied along these lines. For this reason we shall not enter too far into the discussion of how near right the modern scientist may be. But the Occultist says this: he does not accept wholly the views of the modern scientist as to primary colors based upon visible solar light
The accepted
prism, you know, consists of the
colors red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and violet; and these are considered to be the primary
colors.
you call yellow not yellow, but is the higher rays of the orange, and that the human eye does not record the true primary yellow, because it is beyond the vision of the ordinary eye, even when asin point of fact is
The
Occultist says the color
The physicist tells sisted by mechanical devices. you that your eye cannot detect the ultra violet rays, and that on the other end of the spectrum
cannot follow the lowest vibrations of the red. Occultist accepts that statement, but adds that do not detect all the rays or shades of any one you of the colors contained even in your spectrum. Again, he differs from the modern physicist in reit
The
gard to the question of indigo and

cultist says that indigo
colors,
violet. The Ocand violet are not primary but are only some of the higher and lower
rays of the blue, which, in registering themselves upon the human vision, appear as separate colors. Nor does the Occultist agree with those who make a
124
The History cmd Power of Mind.
study of pigments artists and chemists who consider blue, yellow and red as the primary colors, and that all the other colors are but modifications
or blendings of these primary ones. The Occultist says that here also the yellow pigment is not the
yellow of the basic vibration, but
is
merely a modi-
fication of the vibration of the orange, and, moreover, that in limiting the primary colors to blue,
yellow and red, you leave out entirely the orange and green which are both primary colors. So much, therefore, to show you the lines of divergence between Occultism and the present scientific conception relative to color.
By primary
is
colors,
from the standpoint of Oc-
meant those basic vibrations that appear cultism, at the beginning of time, and manifest throughout
Before discussing these, it planes of nature. be to well may enlarge upon some of the points of agreement between modern science and Occultall
we touched upon in lecture three. First, remember that whatever is manifested you must have form and color; nothing could manifest if there were a lack of these two qualities, because manifestation means a rate of vibration which parism, which
will
cels or separates a portion of atoms from the mass of matter. Therefore, vibration is the parent of form and color, and manifestation means that there
Take, for qualities. their do have variwhy they ous forms? Why do they have their peculiar pigments? Is it not the rate of vibration which deexample, the flowers
;
must always
exist these
two
125
termines the
size, color
and form
of the flowers?
to school you were taught that form is the result of vibration, and the fact was illustrated by placing a quantity of fine feathery seed upon a drum head, and
You remember
that
when you went
then prolonging the notes of a violin over it. The seed gathered into various forms, according to the vibration or sound which was given, and this illustration proved the truth of the teaching. Then you remember the illustration given of the hot poker
which changed its color according to its change in vibration. These illustrations were given to show that the so-called inanimate things vibrate, and that their vibrations can be changed according to the will or desire of man. And now we will go a step further, and learn something about the vibrations which determine the form and color of man himself.
Man
being an individualized manifestation of na-
ture, must naturally have his form and color. When I speak of man, I refer to both the physical and mental man. Place the human body in an easy position, with feet together, and with arms at the sides; then draw a line around it, touching each
that
extreme outer point of the body, and you will find You remember the line forms an ovoid. when we discussed the subjective and the objective minds we found that the two interblended and ensouled the physical man. These two united minds
not only fill the interstices of the physical body, and hold together all the physical molecules, and keep
126

in place,
of Mind.
them
but
it
also extends
beyond and around
the body to the distance of several inches. If you should draw a line around this inner or mental man
you would find that it, too, is oval, or egg-shaped, which seems to be the best form for the highest and largest expression of individualized consciousas, witness man, world, or sun. Into each center of consciousness flows the magnetic force called the life principle, and by reason of that inflow into all forms there is a constant
ness
pushing out of old atoms and a replacement of them with new elements. And this is true whether the form be on the subjective or objective side of nature. This passing in and out of the atomic life makes a fluidic sphere around each man and force, around everything. In electricity we call this fluidic sphere the electric field; in the sun we call it the photosphere; around a magnet we call it the magnetic field or field of attraction. Baron Karl Von
Reichenbach, through sensitives, rediscovered in modern times this magnetic field around men and animals, and even around minerals. This magnetic field he called "od," or "odic" force. His discovery is confirmed now by clairvoyants, by seers, and in France by sensitives under hypnotic influence. Persons from each of these classes of investigators have seen around each person, tree and mineral this field of light or color. This is one reason for that law of physics which says that no two masses can approach each other without being mutually affected, because, being
brought into juxtaposition,

there
is
127
of the
is
an attraction and repulsion due to the flow forces, and the exchange of atoms which constantly taking place between them. There
life
is essentially nothing in inert matter to attract; but the inflowing of the life force and the throwing off of old particles make a change of atoms between masses that are near each other, and they attract or repel according to their similarity or
dissimilarity of vibration. It is the existence of the magnetic field of an animal or a man which enables a dog to follow the
As a physical, animal body passes over the ground it throws off from itself particles or atoms with each effort or emotion. A certain
scent of either.
quantity of these particles is left imprinted upon the earth ; and since every individualized conscious-
due to
tion
ness possesses its own distinct odor or perfume its condition of development or rate of vibrait
is
not at
all difficult
is
for the
dog
to keep
the scent of the creature he

left
following.
The atoms
of that person or thing which the distinguish from any other.

ness, as in
upon the earth are impregnated with the odor dog is able to
When we come to the higher centers of consciousman, we not only have the life force as an element which builds, but we also have a thought force which is constantly manifesting, and by its
is modifying, the life force. Each person radiates from himself not only the physical atoms which he has used, and which have lost his vibration, but also the finer forms of matter which
vibratory flow
128

his
of Mind.
go out with
is
thought force; and therefore there
a continuous stream flowing out from each individual to other centers, and these streams leave their impress upon everything the person thinks about or touches. sensitive coming in contact with a
part of the outflow from a man, can read his character as well as a scientist by taking up a piece of coal, can tell you its chemical constituency, or its
,
now
probable age and formation; and this faculty is called psychometry. In ancient times, the sphere surrounding man was called the aureola when it encircled his whole
only radiated from his head and called the nimbus. Later, this magnetic field in either aspect was called the aura by Western Occultists, while in the East it was called the sacred Auric Egg. The ancient masters of art always represented their saints with a nimit
body; when
shoulders
it
was
bus about their heads and were accustomed to paint their most divine characters as surrounded by an aureola. In the pictures of Christ there is a radiation from the entire body, while in those of his disciples there is usually but the nimbus to be
And these old painters were right in their seen. conceptions; they were sensitives and either had the intuitive knowledge of an occult fact, or they were clairvoyants and saw that according to the
development of the ego was the extent of
tions.
its
emana-
man
says that in the ordinary this radiation extends from two to six inches
Occultist
The
from the body; but as
man
develops in thought,
129
power and capacity

forces,
his
to
draw
into himself cosmic
radiations expand until they may extend from six inches to several feet outward.
This aura is one of the chief causes for the unaccountable likes and dislikes that we have for persons whom we meet; for, if one is at all sensitive, one can feel very distinctly the auras one comes in contact with. If we meet with a person whose vibrations are very much higher than our own, we
will
or dislike
We
be likely to either almost worship that person him for being so far in advance of us. will be greatly disturbed by the higher vibra-
tions proceeding
call forth all
from him, which will very
likely
ment
the good in us, or bring all the sediin our nature to the surface. Knowing this,
likes
and being sensitive to these sudden

likes for persons,
and
disdis-
you may
save yourself
much
comfort by keeping a good distance between your-
and those who disturb you. distance of three or four feet will be sufficient to prevent you from feeling so plainly the vibratory force of
selves
another.
This aura will also account for the great deplemany persons feel when they come in contact with other persons for it is very true that there are human sponges who, unconsciously perhaps, maintain their own lives by drawing all the magnetic force or life they can get from others. This is what the Occultist calls vampirization. You may have observed that invalids are most anxious to have young, strong people about them. They
tion that
;
130
will often take the
hand
of a healthy person
and
for hours, if they are permitted to. It is pleasant for the invalid, but quite trying sometimes
it
hold
for the visitor, because with the blending of the auras the magnetic force flows from the stronger
to the weaker.
dren, and often insist

is
Old people are very fond of chilupon sleeping with them. This
very dangerous for the child, because of the demagnetization which must always follow so doing. There are several ways by which you may save
yourselves from being demagnetized by others. The first is to spend much of your time alone. Another
is
by declaring positiveness
for yourself
and by
keeping your mind on your own magnetism, and thus retain it within your own body. Again, you may save yourself considerably by letting your feet touch each other lightly, and by clasping your hands together when you are sitting near other persons; this is a means of closing your circuit and preventing your magnetism from flowing out. In the last-mentioned practice it is not alone the physical act of closing your circuit, but the mental attitude you take at that time which protects you from
vampirization.
The size and color of the human aura changes according to the intensity and quality of the have seen that all vibration is either thought. the direct or indirect result of thought; and this is true from the first Divine impulse down to every thought of man. It can be demonstrated in a number of ways. Telepathy, which I believe scientists
We
131
now
accept as a fact, is the transmission of thought or vibratory force from the mind of one person to that of another without the use of material signs,
using as the
medium
of
communication the ether

If there is
or Universal Consciousness.
a vibration
or emanation that goes forth from you every time you think, and it passes to the point it is sent, then
reasonable to suppose that according to the intensity of the thought is the emanation projected.
it
is
If
quietly day dreaming, or thinking in an indefinite, incoherent manner, the emanation does
you
sit
definite
not proceed far from you; but if your thought is and intense, then its vibration must proceed
according to its own intensity. By intense thinking I do not mean that you should clench your fist, nor corrugate your brow while doing it; but I mean that your thought must be clearly held in mind and
distinctly sent forth.
I
understand that Dr. Baraduct, a French physi-
cian, has invented a disk so delicately sensitized that

it registers the vibrations of a human being brought in contact with it. If an angry man puts forth his
hand toward the

registers
dial,
the needle on
it
immediately
If the the intensity of his vibrations. opposite hand of the same man is extended, the dial immediately shows the difference in vibrations be-
tween the positive and negative sides of
his body.
When
than
a clear, distinct thinker tests the machine, there is a greater number registered upon the dial
when
a negative person tests
it,
and thus we
are fortunate in having a recently invented median-
132
of Mind.
ical instrument which proves the claims of Occultism concerning the vibratory emanations from the human body. The intensity of the thought determines the size of the aura, and the quality of the thought determines its color. For example, you may have an intense vibration of a low color, which would cause your emanation to project for three or more feet from you, or you might have an intense thought of a higher nature which would reach the same distance. Its size would depend upon its intensity, but its color would be determined by its quality or rate of vibration, or its moral and intelligent degree of
excellence.
According
to the
Occult system
in reference to
mind or man, the spectrum, as applied to this particular planet, would include what is generally known as the absence of color at one end and the synthesis of color at the other, or black and white. But because neither of these has a practical bearing upon this course of lectures
in
nor will
it
have
your lives at this point in your evolution I shall omit them from this course. Both colors indicate abnormal conditions of mind, and we do not desire to waste our time studying the abnormal. The Occultist says that red, orange, green, blue and yellow are the normal primary colors, and can be seen and
known upon each
inner plane of being according
The orto the development of the investigator. dinarily developed person cannot see the pure yellow ray with his physical eyes any more than the
133
ordinary American can see the many delicate colors in an Indian shawl that the specialized vision
of an expert can distinguish. The inner man, usually called the soul or ego, the real man, always has a color as distinctly his
own
as has the outside man.

color according
Each
individual has
his particular
to his
quality of
During his thought, character and development. first incarnation on the earth the normal color of
the subjective mind was blue, and the natural color of the objective mind was green; therefore, when
two first came together, and united as one mind, and incarnated in a human body, the combined colors became a green-blue. This very quickly changed to lower rates of vibration, because sensation immediately commenced to manifest in the place of reason, in the newly incarnated man. The green predominated over the blue because the blue
these
was the product of the subjective side of life, and the green was the product of the objective side which
was stronger upon its own plane of development. But even these green-blue color vibrations were lost
through the excitation of the emotional nature, which came quickly into the ascendency in man's nature. This was due to the great desire for the
physical enjoyments of
was
in his absolutely
for in those days normal, animal condition.

life,
man
He
had a new body, had not put into action causes which reacted upon it, and his power of thinking was limited, and therefore not likely to have much influence on his body during those first incarna-
134
tions. So there was nothing for man at that time but the mere physical enjoyment of existence. Before we take up the study of the emotional nature and its colors, it may be well to examine that
builds
built man's physical form, and which physical forms the force we call "life." This force manifests as orange vibration. If life is a force, if it is something, then it must have a rate
force
which
all
own to distinguish it from everything else in the universe. speak of the Gulf Stream. It is a current of water which vibrates at a higher rate than the body of water through which
of vibration of its
We
it
flows, and we call this current of water the Gulf Stream to distinguish it from the rest of the ocean. So in this great sea of consciousness there are cer tain definite and distinct currents of force which play very important parts in man's evolution, and that which we call "life" is one of them. I cannot
prove this statement to you because of the limitation of your vision, but you can prove it for yourself as you can prove every other statement I shall make in these lectures if you develop to that point where your inner senses permit you to function upon that plane of existence where forces are visible as forces, as causes, and not as effects or phenomena. On this physical plane you see life as form on the subjective or mental side you see life manifesting as
;
a separate and distinct thing which is building the form you see with your physical eyes. Seeing life on the subjective side, it is an orange color, or a force which vibrates as orange, sweeping into every-
135
thing and giving vitality to all forms. All physical bodies have this vital force manifesting in them
according to the capacity of each to express it. You do not see the orange force permeating the invalid to the same extent that it does an athlete, because
the invalid cannot express it so well. that you understand something about
And now
the force
which fashions and preserves the physical body, let us turn to man himself and study the other forces
expressed in him. The lowest force in psychic man is that which we designate as his distinct animal propensities, and these are red in their manifestation or vibration.
You remember we found

tions
the four cardinal emo-
upon which
all
the other
human emotions were
based, and the first three of these were red; therefore, when the animal nature is in the ascendency
in
man, when
it
his nature, the red vibrations
dominates the intellectual side of become the domin-
ating ones and permeate the entire man and his aura. If you strike a tuning fork upon the table,
the sound produced is the vibration which emanates from that tuning fork. If you put a weight upon the fork the sound ceases, because the low rate of vibration which you bring in contact with the tuning fork causes its vibrations to be lowered, and finally to cease thus the vibrations of the weight overcome those of the tuning fork. It is the same with thought; when the animal nature becomes intense
;
it
gives
its
man, and consequently the
lowering vibrations to every part of the intellectual nature ceases
136
of Mind.
its activity for the time being, of the dominating emotion.
and takes the color

the emotional
When
nature
the ascendency, man's color is red, and to the intensity of his emotions is the according color intensified; but if he struggles to control his
is in
emotions there will be a change of colors in his aura. In the course of time man's lower intellectual nature began to be more prominent, and when his emotions were not over-stimulated it began to be something of a factor in his life and as time went
;
on what was originally the red in the psychic man, and the orange of his body, became tinged with the green of his objective mentality, and then he had the three colors blended, which gave him a
brown
vibration.
This color, unfortunately,
indi-
cates the condition of the
mass
of
men
at the pres-
ent day, because they have not developed beyond that point. The intellectual side of man is very
weak
as yet; even the objective mind is not well individualized, and as for the subjective mind, it is not active in one person in a thousand. After many centuries some men, for one reason
or another, began to control their emotions somewhat. This may have been brought about by laws being enacted which said: If a person gives sway
and kills another, or becomes too his fellow man, he shall be and robs avaricious, it Or may have been because social life punished.
to his emotions,
As man began
required the suppression of the emotions at times. to control more and more his emo-
tional nature, the green vibrations
became more
137
prominent.
First in
its
deeper shades
cate intense selfishness
which indiand subsequently in its
lighter shades, indicating individualization. Green is the color of the objective mind of
man
when he
begins to individualize as a permanent center of consciousness in Deity. It is the

first
color of the manifested, lower, intellectual nature which is sometimes called the brain consciousness.
Self-consciousness in the growing

sarily
;
man was
neces-
an evolutionary step and when man, for his own purposes and his own interests, began to use his intellect even on a low plane, he began to control his emotional nature. This in itself helped to strengthen his intellectual nature and made his emotions more or less subservient to it. Green vibrations are desirable because no soul can mount
very high in
its
evolution unless
individualized.
Then
will
it becomes properly come the time when our
subjective minds, or the diviner portion of our natures will fight for the ascendency as the lower intellectual is now fighting the emotional nature.
At that time the mind will begin

vibrations will
original color of the subjective to manifest itself and the blue
At
first
commence to tinge the inner man. there will be but occasional flashes of the
;
blue in his aura
later, it will
become suffused with
the blue vibration.
Raising the vibrations of the developing man is a slow process. Where his higher intellect and intuition begin to manifest, and where reason com-
mences
to
overpower
desire, there
is
the battle
138
of Mind.
ground for the objective and subjective minds. This is where most of the progressive men and women are to-day; and if you were clairvoyant, you could see the auras changing from green to blue, with often a flash of red, and then back again to green,
or perhaps to purple, a combination of the blue and red. I know of no better comparison than to
to
liken the progressive inner man, in his appearance, an electric fountain. One moment you may see
all blue, at another green and blue then mingling; perhaps it will change to purple, with now and again a flash of red, or with red suffusing the whole. So man, according to his thought, is always radiating these beautiful colors which are in each human soul or mind. In the course of time, when his spiritual nature
the fountain
becomes awakened and
his intuition
becomes
act-
ive, the yellow vibrations begin to interblend with the blue. You will see the well-developed man pos-
sessed of
trolled.
all
The lower
the colors properly regulated and convibrations, the red, will then
appear as a beautiful rose pink, and will be seen more particularly about that portion of the body
where the generative organs are located. The orange vibration will suffuse the entire body. The green will be the individualizing band outlining the body, and the blue and yellow will blend and extend
beyond the green forming the outer border

aura.
of the
There are two
classes of these colors
be designated as positive and negative.
which may There is
139
dominant. A man may be negatively good, and be neither wise nor strong. He may seem to control his objective mind and you may believe him to be
a well-developed
the positive yellow and the negative yellow, the positive green and the negative green. And when you see man's aura composed of negative colors you may know that the negative side of his nature is
man, when
really his objective
but a poor vehicle for his subjective mind. Or you may find persons with the negative blue and yellow vibrations, those whose intuitional natures are only partially awakened, but who have not the force aspect; neither has the higher intelligence become active in them. A person may be negatively good because he has not been tempted in this life to be otherwise his environment may have been such as to guard him against temptation, and his nature being negative, he had not the desire to overcome. Some time in some life he must be tempted and learn to be positively good before he beis
;
mind
comes a perfected ego. There is a practical

has been to
all
side to this lecture, as there
the other lectures of this course.
Ac-
cording to your knowledge of these forces or vibrathe intensity of your tions, and according to thought, will you have the power to use the Occult forces of nature, and become conscious upon other than the material plane, and to put yourself in touch with certain cosmic currents or forces. For illustration: A man with an emotional nature goes to the theater. There is a cry of "Fire!" and a wave
140
of fear
of Mind.
sweeps over the audience.
Every mind
in
the house has
become attached
to the red cosmic
current of fear.
waves
of fear
Having tapped this great current, come into every center of conscious-
his reason
ness in that house, and the emotional man loses and rushes like a maddened brute to save
himself, regardless of everyone else.
He
tramples
children, and fights like a wild animal to liberate his body from the struggling mass
upon women and
of
human
not be a
fire,
beings around him. There may or may but this man has connected his ob-
jective mind, through thought, with this current of fear, does not control the emotion as it sweeps over
him, and you see the result. These cosmic currents which surround our earth
correspond in color and rate of vibration to each of the colors in the aura of men and animals and all living creatures use these currents, either consciously or unconsciously. When man learns to vibrate harmoniously with the color or cosmic current he desires to use, then his development will be much more rapid than when he uses the currents, as the animals do, unconsciously and without a knowledge It is according to the color of what he is doing. of a man's vibrations that he connects himself with these cosmic forces; and some of the lower forces bring disaster to him when he uses them. Take
;
the current of fear for example. If a man is constantly fearing something, or someone, he thus con-
nects himself with the current of fear, and it constantly plays upon him. He never can gain success

in
141
anything he undertakes until he raises his vibraabove this current, and in this way disconnects himself from it. It is indeed of the most importance that man should learn to control his
tions
thoughts and his vibrations. There are also different planes of consciousness, and it is according to the rate of man's vibration that he can function upon them. As a man may be able to see no color but red, because his optic nerves are at so low a rate of vibration that they cannot record any color of a higher rate, so some men have a much broader apprehension of the laws of life than other men, because their vibrations are
high enough to permit vibrations coming from other and higher planes to impinge upon their consciousness. A genius is a man whose consciousness has become expanded through his evolution until he can contact more planes of cosmic consciousness than other men. You remember the lines,
"A
primrose by a river's brim

it
A yellow primrose was to him,

And
One man
was nothing more."
sees in a primrose nothing more nor less than a vegetable growth another thinks what a pretty yellow flower still another sees in that same primrose the secrets of the Universe he sees in that flower the vibratory effect of the Divine Idea that
;
;
God has geometrized,

were accustomed to
as the scholars of Pythagoras

say.
142
of Mind.
There are forty-nine states of consciousness, but the minds of average men only function upon ten or twelve. There are a great many doors to knowledge, which we may open if we will but if we continue to think in the lower states of consciousness, and never rise above them in aspiration, these other
;
doors will remain forever shut to us. If we always live in the cellar of our house we will never see God's sunlight streaming into our upper rooms. The sun shines, but not for us because we will not go where it can reach us. All the world's great teachers have substantially taught the same rules for conduct and morality. Ethics is not founded on police regulations nor sentiments of moralists, but is established on the immutable laws of nature. "Love your enemies" was one of the precepts taught by Jesus, and it has puzzled many of his followers to find the reason for the teaching. Many persons think, if they do not say: What sense is there in loving one's enemies? This precept has a purely scientific basis. Love is not an indefinite sentiment, it is something real; it
the highest and greatest dynamic force on this planet, and is one that manifests on all planes. Since
is
of effects
something we can feel on this plane and see on the mental plane, if we are able to function on that plane. When pure love is sent forth from the subjective mind, it manifests as a
it is
a force,
it is
constructive force, having its own particular high yellow rate of vibration. Anger being an emotion, and proceeding from the objective mind of man, vi-
143
brates at a lower rate, which is red. person who hates you an enemy sends a red current of
thought toward you but if you send loving thoughts in return, you are projecting a yellow rate of vibration which is infinitely higher and more forceful than the red, and the yellow vibration deflects the lower vibration so that it never reaches you.
;
The higher
ciples,
from harm, and

tained.
rates of vibration will protect you if you live according to ethical prin-
a high quality of thought or vibration is atWhen we come to consider Spiritual Forces,

of our thoughts,
we shall see how, by the control we can use the cosmic forces.
LECTURE SEVEN.
MEDITATION, CREATION AND CONCENTRATION.
All religions invent modes whereby the mind of is directed to Deity. In the Eastern philosophy these modes are called Yoga, and are supposed
man
to be methods of yoking the individual mind to the Universal Consciousness. There are two principal kinds of yoga, which may be described as mental
and as physical. The first is a process of meditation, by which the individual mind is brought into closer
relationship with the Universal Consciousness the second or physical yoga, is of various kinds, and
;
includes methods of artificial breathings and unusual and unnatural postures of the body. These
postures and breathings are for the purpose of drawing into the physical body certain forces which
develop psychic powers.
It is believed
by those
who
by
practice them that a step nearer Deity is gained so doing but in point of fact only certain psychic
;
centers in the physical body are awakened, which enable these persons to function upon the first plane
beyond the material. The ecstatic conditions into which the Yogi are often thrown by indulging in
these practices are not spiritual states of consciousness, as many persons believe, but are entirely due
to
paroxysms of emotion to which they
yield,
and
144
Meditation, Creation and Concentration.
145
which are disastrous to those who indulge in them. Another system devised for the purpose of relating the individual consciousness to the Universal Consciousness is ritualism, and we find this method
almost, if not quite, perfected in the East. In the elaborate ceremonials of Brahminism and Buddhism
there
tic
is
as complete a ritual as exists.
In Buddhis-
ritualism there are various steps, from the worship of the Supreme in meditation, to the attempt
to reach
and propitiate the intermediate
forces,
gods
or devas.
In Judaism we find again a great system of ritualism, which is second only to that of Buddhism but the ritualism of Judaism was established for a
material people,
rying out
where
in
it
used material processes for carand never reached the point operated upon mental lines. For example,
it
its
ritual
Judaism we find the cutting of the throats of animals and the flowing of blood. This was a sacrificial rite and was supposed to attract the attention of the Deity, through His love for the shedding of blood, to propitiate Him, and induce Him to give
to
whoever made this sacrifice something of much more value than were the animals slaughtered. It was not for the sake of spirituality that these rites were performed, but for material gain only. And then came Christianity, represented in the West by the two great sects of Catholicism, on the one hand, and Protestantism on the other. These
also use a process to relate the individual consciousness to the Universal, which is called prayer or peti-
'
146
tion.
of Mind.
**'
The
ritual in Catholicism is
on the same gen-
eral lines as in
Buddhism, because many of its rites were obtained from Buddhism. For example, there are three forms of prayer in Catholicism the Latria,
:
or prayer direct to Deity Hyperdulia, or prayer to Deity through the intercession of the saints or the
;
Virgin Mary, and the Doulia, or prayer to a special patron saint; in Protestantism the prayer is made directly to Jehovah. Whether we consider the old religions of the world, or the most modern, each has invented a process for relating the mind back to the Universal Consciousness, and all these rites are for one purpose personal gain. Some of you may be shocked by this declaration, but upon close analysis you will find it true. In
Buddhism the object of relating the individual mind to the Universal Consciousness is the hope for libpurely a question of beneIn Judaism a bargain between the individual and the Universal was made. In re;
eration from rebirth

to the individual.
it is
fit
turn for prayers and praise and sacrifices,
God was
supposed to give
things which they wanted. In Catholicism, in exchange for prayers and chanting, God gave men mental or spiritual qualities and per-
men
sonal salvation; but they, too, can obtain material things by doing a Novena. This last process of prayer is not made to God direct, but to Saint An-
thony, and
are
if
all fulfilled,
the conditions required by this Saint the prayer is answered. In Protest-
antism the prayer
may be
a person going to sea, or for the
for personal health, for kingdom of heaven,
147
or for something else

of personal benefit. The Christian and
all
comes back
to a matter
V
Mental Scientists have adopted
from the Orient a process of meditation called "going into the silence." This attitude of mind is for
the purpose of harmonizing the individual mind with the Universal, in order that the individual may
receive thoughts and things that it desires, and is a form of prayer along more rational and scientific lines. Occultism, too, has its processes for the pur-
pose of relating the individual mind to the Universal Consciousness, in order that it may draw such spiritual, mental and material things as the individual needs or wants.
The question arises, how can this relation be brought about, because we all need something spiritual, mental or material, and in our hearts we wish to know how to use our minds in order to obtain
the qualities or things desired. The three working tools or methods of mind that the Occultist takes
for the
purpose of connecting his consciousness with

/
^ja
!.
the Universal, are the processes known as Meditation, Creation and Concentration.
have spoken repeatedly of mind, and now something about thought. Thought is the product of mind; it is a rate of vibration sent forth from mind, and therefore is force. This thought force is continually being used or misused, because to live is to think, either rightly or wrongly, with
We
we
will say
the objective or subjective mind. Thought, per se, is neither good nor bad, but, like any other force,
148
of
Mind.
the use of it determines its character. Electricity is a force, and can be used constructively to dissipate disease and to prolong life, or it can be used to de-
stroy
life,
as the State of
New York
destroys the
lives of criminals at
Sing Sing.
Thought has one chief characteristic, I might almost say but one characteristic, and that is vibration.
From
this standpoint
we may
divide thought
into
two general
negative. tion sent forth from the mind, and negative thought is a low rate of vibration.
classes, that of the positive and Positive thought is a high rate of vibra-
You remember that ttie will is the positive side of the subjective mind, and corresponds to the desire or the positive side of the objective mind. The
will plays a
very important part
in
human
affairs,
becomes active in the subjective mind as will power, or whether it operates in the objective mind as desire. In connection with thought the will,
whether
it
has three functions: First. It determines the nature of the thought sent forth from the mind, whether it be constructive or
destructive.
thought, whether
Will determines the intensity of the it shall vibrate at a high rate and travel with great rapidity, or whether it shall proceed at a low rate, and reach but a short distance. In other words, the will determines whether the thought shall be positive or negative. Third. Will determines the direction of thought
Second.
that
is,
the person, place or thing to which
it
shall
Meditation, Creation and Concentration
149
be sent and
how
long
it
shall
remain
in each place.
Knowing
which
the functions of this tremendous force,
higher aspects is latent in most persee how essential it is that it should can sons, you be awakened for, like the muscles of the body, will grows stronger with use. It is left with each of us to determine whether we shall remain infirm of purpose and weak in will, or awaken, and arouse this force and use it for our upbuilding. Without the activity of will no one can hope to become an Occultist, because his mental force is to him what
in its
;
the engine
is
to the engineer.
mental mode to cultivate in order that the mind may draw to itself whatever it desires is Philosophical Meditation. (I use the word philosophical as qualifying this state of mind, because
first
The
there are various other

tion.)
modes
of so-called medita-
of mind,
Philosophical meditation is a receptive condition assumed for the purpose of receiving from
Deity knowledge concerning a selected subject. In order to understand more fully the elements
which compose
analyze them.
this
kind of meditation,
first
we
is
will
The
condition of
mind
a re-
In using the word "receptive" I do ceptive one. not mean negative. Never, under any circumstances, permit yourself to be in a negative condi-
because the moment you become negative you become subject to malevolent subjective entities and influences which may control or obsess you and perhaps dominate your mind throughout this life.
tion,
150

Occultist insists most vehemently that the
The
passive negative meditation taught by many schools in the Orient as well as in the Occident is most
harmful to the ego. Since immortality means the preservation of the individual consciousness, a perfect individualization can come only through the
continued effort to remain in a positive condition of mind. It therefore follows that to remain negative is detrimental to one's evolution. Negativeness also has its effects upon the physical body by its re-
producing sickness and often dissolution. one idea that will be emphasized more than another during this course of lectures it will be the necessity of being mentally positive. Stability is the result of positiveness and the Biblical assertion is true in Occultism as in everything else that "unstable as water thou shalt not succeed." A receptive condition of mind is the same mental
flex action
If there is
:
condition that you are now in. quiet, listening, expectant attitude; not intense but waiting, giving positive attention to what I am saying while your
bodies are in a relaxed but comfortable position. No one could control any mind in this room at this
moment because each one is positive and is in an active instead of a passive condition. Having placed yourself in this receptive condition
you desire to receive knowledge. Knowledge is the second element in our definition and is all that you can receive through meditation since qualities or things are brought through other modes of mind. Now direct your demand or prayer to the Uni;

versal Consciousness
151
not to an individual, for there

;
must be no intermediary prayer must be directed to Deity as in the highest form of Christianity. You
go into meditation for the purpose of receiving knowledge from the highest source of knowledge, and this is the third element in our definition. To demand scientifically and well from Deity is a very hard thing to do unless you have entirely outgrown the idea of an anthropomorphic God, because at first it seems difficult to address Universal Consciousness. It may seem that your demand or prayer has gone into space somewhere to diffuse
throughout the great Consciousness. It may be of help to you to consider the Universal Consciousness as another individual mind near you that you may speak to as you would to another person. Or better still, you may picture it as a golden sun or center of vibrating light within your own heart for the heart center is one of the chief points of contact between the individual and the Universal mind. I wish to impress upon your mind the thought of your nearness to this Universal Consciousness.
itself
Many persons feel so far away from God and when they think of Deity at all they think of It as a being
somewhere
far
away
in space.
God
is difficult
to
reach only because you
make
it
so with your
wrong
conceptions of your separateness from Him. You should take the great Consciousness into every thought and act of life; whisper to It in the darkness of the night and It will hear and answer you. See It in a mental picture of golden yellow light
152

It will
fill your body with Its uplifting vibraDepend upon It, instead of persons and to bring you what you need and your de-
and
tions.
things,
mands
will
never
fail
to be met.
There are two reasons why your demands should

be made of the Universal Consciousness. First because if you do not address your demands to the
Highest your objective mind will immediately assert itself and assume the responsibility of answering you. It will pretend to be God and give you back something purporting to be the particular knowledge you demanded. By making your demand direct to Deity it has a tendency to prevent the action of the lower objective mind. It is only a tendency, however, and nothing but perfect selfcontrol will ever fully prevent the attempted intervention by the objective mind.
to the
The second reason for addressing your demand Supreme Consciousness, as if it were an-
other mind, is that you thereby have a tendency to cut off communication with all other individual
minds who are thinking along the same general line with yourself; otherwise you may get into a current of thought and be as likely to get wrong
thoughts as right ones.
Many persons "go into the silence," or try to meditate by sitting and waiting for any thought to come to them. In this way they receive any immay sweep into their minds, believsuch impressions are Divine Inspiration. But ing all this is not Philosophical Meditation and cannot
pressions that
153
The 'proper possibly bring the good you desire. way to meditate is to get your subject before going into meditation and then ask for knowledge concerning it and wait patiently for your impression. It is absolutely necessary that you should have a concrete subject because concreteness is the secret
of success along mental as well as along all other lines. The subject for meditation may be anything
concerning which you desire knowledge. It may be knowledge pertaining to any plane of being, the Spiritual, Mental, or Physical; but it must be concrete.
The majority of persons do not think, they merely You often hear the remark, "A penny for your thoughts," and the reply usually comes, "Why, really I don't know what I was thinking about."
dream.
People think they think, but in point of fact they jump from subject to subject as a bird flits from one limb of a tree to another. There is no logical
sequence to their thought, there is no continuity. Many persons think of words, not of concepts or of concrete mental things and this is sometimes true even with persons who are called scientific. What concept do most persons have of Love, Force,
;
Mind, Thought? If these words mean anything then these are things. It is possible to have thoughts without words and this kind of thinking is mental picture making, or concrete thought which is the
real, creative
thought. Your careless thinking has very little or no results, while your concrete thoughts have absolute mathematical results.
154
of Mind.
Returning to the subject of meditation we should consider the best time for this practice, for in the beginning it is better to have a definite time set apart for it after awhile you will be able to meditate at any time or place. The early morning hours are the best for meditation because at that time
first
great forces of nature are sweeping through you and through that part of the world where the sun
beginning to shine. At that time all your own magnetic forces have been drawn back to you during the previous sleep and you have not as yet been drawn into the world's thought. If you can deis
vote some time to meditation before you rise you will get the best results; besides you will consciously bring yourself into a closer relationship with Deity and thus establish harmony for yourself, which will better enable you to undertake the duties
of the day.
When you demand knowledge from the Universal Consciousness there goes forth from you, according to the intensity of your thought, many little magnetic lines into the ether. These lines look like blue or rays of light and connect you with the person
thing which will be the best instrument to answer your demand. Sometimes this instrument is another ego who consciously through telepathy sends you an
answer to your question. Or perhaps Deity may use a material agency and connect you with a treatise on the subject you desire information; or you may have an invitation to attend a lecture which
155
would give you the knowledge you have demanded. There are various ways through which your demand may be met and Deity provides the best way for you according to your development and ability to receive at that time. It is true the answer does
not always come immediately after the demand is made, and you may continue to demand for a day, a week or a month before it comes. The
concreteness and intensity of your thought determine the promptness of the response. And if there should be a delay it will be through no fault of the Universal Consciousness or of the law of supply and demand, any more than an error in your calculations would prove wrong a rule in mathematics. The fault will be in yourself; because you do not
think clearly enough or hold your thought picture sufficiently long. If you will persistently follow the
always come
rules given in this lecture, your impressions will in time for you to use them.
Most beginners make their demand of Deity and then go and ask some person for advice and opinions along that particular line. As a consequence
several answers are received and none may be right because Deity did not make the connections. The impatient beginner did not wait for Deity to make his connections, but ran around and made them
himself,
and perhaps long
after
his erroneous information the correct
he has acted upon answer will
come from Deity.
156

rules
of Mind.
in
Here are some work:

First.
which may help you
your
Mistrust
all
immediate answers; because
reply comes at once, your objective mind is speaking to you. In the beginning of your Philosophical Meditations
the chances are that
when your
you have not had
sufficient practice to enable you always to determine the difference between the impressions from your own objective mind and those from Deity, and so it is well to repeat the question at each period of meditation for several days in
succession.
Second.
Examine the answer
closely
it
when
it
comes
in
in the
form of words, and consider

in a
well beitself
cause the objective mind invariably expresses
words and sometimes
long dissertation.
The
Universal Consciousness usually conveys the answer to your mind in an impression or conviction. Third. Test the answer by your reason until your
intuition has become fully awakened and can tell you where the answer came from. For example, suppose you ask if it is best for you to do a certain thing and the answer comes back "yes," and shocks
your sense of justice or of truth, of expediency or of probability. Sit in judgment upon it with your reason until your intuition is awakened and do not act
hastily.
Fourth. You will find that Deity will usually answer your question at an unexpected moment, when your objective mind is off guard. By receiving an
157
answer
objective
you get it uncolored by your mind or desire. If you will remember these four suggestions or tests and apply them to your work in Philosophical
at such a time
Meditation you will receive the knowledge you and if mistakes should be made in the beginning, your implicit trust in Deity will render such mistakes harmless and ultimately turn them to
desire;
good.
The second mode

creation
is
of
mind
is
Creation.
Thought
the imaging or putting into concrete form a selected subject. By concrete form is meant a mental picture of the selected subject invested with all the qualities of that subject in its natural state. Mental creation will bring you any quality
or any thing you want, except knowledge, which comes through meditation. Imagination is not it is the fancy; image-making faculty which is used
for the
purpose of making a concrete picture of the

desire.
thing
If
we
Do you want
love?
What
is
love?
you are going to create a thing you must have a concrete picture of it. Love is a force. Being a
rate of vibration, and having must have a color. Therefore when you picture love you must picture it according to your highest conception of what that force would be, and the color of the highest force upon
force
it
a.
must have
a rate of vibration
it
this planet is yellow.

If it is Divine love you want, see yourself standing in a flood of this golden vibrating force; see It bathing you in Its rays, penetrating every part and
158
of Mind.
particle of your being till your body and you vibrate in response to It, and until the atmosphere around
you pulsates and throbs with Its golden glow. If you desire to send love to another, picture the Universal Love flowing into yourself and then see it
passing from your heart's center as a golden stream flowing outward till it reaches the heart to which it
being will enter and whom you send that love force, and you will have the joy that comes through loving and being loved. If you wish to demonstrate love from another, see that golden current of force flowing from that other person to you. If you wish to work upon the mental plane, if you wish to demand a greater mentality, picture the blue Cosmic Force flowing into you. Picture yourself as suffused with this blue force until your whole being vibrates with it. Let it magnetize your brain and thrill you through and through with its uplifting force. After a demonstration of this kind you will feel capable of accomplishing any mental underis
sent.
Some
of your
own
warm
the heart of the one to
Do not deceive yourself into the belief taking. that one treatment with this blue Cosmic Force will
make of you a genius, because it will not. But constant treatments of this kind will gradually increase
your mental power, which you can direct into any channel you desire, and the picture you make creates the center or matrix into which the Universal Consciousness can bring that which you demand. On the material plane the same picture-making
159
faculty
practice
is
?
used.
Do you want
Then
picture your clients
numbers to your office, paying you liberally this
up a fine law coming in large engaging your services and

to build
last part of the picture is
an essential portion of the whole. Do you wish to develop a business? Then see crowds of people coming and waiting for you to serve them. But good, bad and indifferent business will come unless you limit your creation to a certain class then that kind or class of business which you have created will come. But while you are waiting for your creations to materialize, for your demands to be met, you should do cheerfully and faithfully such duties
;
as are presented to you to do. In this way you will co-operate with the Supreme because you will never know till a duty is done what good may come to you
from doing that duty well. Do you want money? Then make a concrete picture of the amount you want say a one-hundreddollar bill or if you do not want your money all of one denomination picture a sufficient number of bills, of the denomination you want, to make the amount you desire. But in any event make a picture of a definite amount and after making it, hold to it till it stands out as distinct as though it had materialized and you could see it before you. Then say to the Universal Consciousness, "Give me this creation," and repeat this demand day after day and many times a day if you want to. You can do this
;
street cars, etc.
instead of dreaming or reading the signs in the The concreteness of your picture
i6o
The History and Pozver
of Mind.
makes your creation a mental reality and the more tenaciously you hold to the mental creation the
sooner will the material reality come. Creative is in This is true from thought always pictures. a higher or a lower standpoint. For example: the Universe is the materialization of the Divine Idea; the Spiritual plane received the impress of the Divine Mind when creation commenced and the
Planetary Spirits seeing the picture, poured into it their own vibratory force and so worlds were brought into existence. Everything that is, existed first on the mental plane, even to the clothes you
wear and the chair you sit on. Let us further examine the working of the law, and will take for example the concrete picture of a bundle of money one hundred dollars. You have made a mental picture or image of this creation and now you are sending your force, which is simply thought vibrations, into that picture until it becomes clearly defined in the ether which surrounds your own aura. The clearness of your thought and the
intensity of your picture make a photograph, as it were, in the Universal Mind, and this is your matrix or plan. If the matrix of your thumb nail should be destroyed you could never have another thumb
nail in this life, but so long as the matrix is there, although the nail may be for the time being destroyed, another will grow. And so it is with your mental matrix, so long as it is not destroyed it will
sometime draw to you the material thing pictured. The constant or frequent vibration which your
161
thought causes, sets the Universal Consciousness surrounding you and your picture into action. Then out from you goes the small magnetic cord which the Universal Consciousness directs to the sum of money you have demanded. This money is some-
demand
rects
where upon the material plane when you make your for it, and the Universal Consciousness ditached, to this
tiny magnetic cord atmoney. It is no affair of yours where this one hundred dollars shall come from. The avenue through which it may come is
its
your demand, with
amount
of
for the Universal Consciousness to select, and, be-
ing Justice, It will bring it from the source whence it should come, and no one will be unjustly treated by the transference of it to your possession.
That the matrix

a mental thing,
is
a reality and
to
is testified
by
all
the image of Occultists, seers

is
and good psychics.

rated last
This testimony was corrobo-
week by the press dispatches, which stated that Doctor Baraduct, of Paris, has now perfected a photographic plate so sensitive as to catch
the image of thought pictures. The report of his invention went on to state that a noted French nat-
uralist
was requested to think of, or image something of his own selection while the plate was exAfter the negative was developed, there posed. was the picture of a rare specimen of eagle which
was the image he had held had been studying this unusual bird for some time previous, and was able to make his mental picture very clear in consequence.
the naturalist declared
in his
mind.
He
62
The History and Pozver of Mind.

report also stated that
The
many
imperfect pictures
were taken from the thoughts of other persons. From the general public Dr. Baraduct got the best results from women who were in love. He said they seemed to be able to hold in mind a very clear picture of those they loved. Whether these reports are true or not, I am not prepared to say but sooner
;
or later physical science will establish this claim of the Occultists.
In making your demands, you must
make them
of Deity and not of any person. You have no right to use coercive force upon another individual mind;
but since everything that exists belongs to Deity and Deity is the source of your supply you have
demand of It. At this point of create mental pictures of things already in existence and draw them to us according to the operation of the law I have just explained.
a perfect right to
our evolution
we
But the time will come in our development when we can image a thing and have the power to draw together the particles necessary to its composition, and create the thing itself. This power is called precipitation, and is really the highest form of creation.
Mental Concentration
It is
is
the third
mode
of mind.
nature creative, but it is the direction of force which hastens the materialization of creanot in
its
tions.
Concentration
is
holding the mind on one
subject to the exclusion of every other subject. Here, again, you must have a specific subject to
concentrate upon, and
it
may be any
quality, thought
163
This mode of mind is perhaps the most forceful of the three modes mentioned in this lecture. It is therefore always an active, positive condition of mind. The habit of concentration is not acquired in a short time, but is a matter of growth, a matter of practice. You will be surprised to know that the average person cannot or does not, perhaps I should say hold his mind for ten consecutive seconds on one subject.
or thing.
For example, take
this creation
we
last selected,
the bundle of money. Try to hold your mind on that one-hundred-dollar creation for a moment. Af-
few seconds you begin to wonder whether that is really coming, and then you bring your mind back to your subject, and look at that mental picture for another couple of seconds. Then you suddenly remember that there is a magnetic cord attached to each demand that goes forth from you, and you wonder if that magnetic cord is all right; then you try to see the cord and the first thing you know you have lost sight of the money, and are creating a magnetic cord attachment to your demand. Suddenly you become conscious that your mind is wandering and you wonder if you are concentrating right; and thus your thoughts skip from one thing to another and you learn by experience that concentration is gained only by patient and
ter a
creation
constant practice.
Knowing something about the law of periodicity, which makes and unmakes habits, you may take
advantage of
it
in
learning
how
to concentrate.
164
of Mind.
Some suggestions may be helpful to you in acquiring this art of concentration and making it a habit of thought. Select an hour in the morning, or take
a part of the same hour that you give to meditation give the first ten or twenty minutes to meditation and the remainder of the time to concentration. If
;
this practice is persisted in for several days in succession you will find your concentration becoming
because the law of periodicity will be operwith ating you and the impetus thus given to concentration soon makes the practice a habit of mind. Look at your mental creation quietly, but ineasier,
;
Think of the picture say the money tensely. Concentration means for about twenty minutes.
looking at your picture. It is not very hard work to sit and look at one hundred dollars; indeed, it can be made a very pleasant thing to do, if you Concentration should alrealize that it is yours.
ways be
tive condition of
a pleasant exercise of will, a quiet but posimind. Let the mind rest entirely
upon your mental picture and claim it by saying or thinking "that is mine, because I have created it."
persons make hard work of trying to concentrate. This is a mistaken waste of physical force. When you see a pretty flower and look at it admir-
Many
ingly,
you are thinking of that flower and are concentrating upon it, because for the moment you
are thinking of
else.
it
When
you
to the exclusion of everything go to the theater, and become ab-
sorbed by the acting, you are concentrating upon the acting. With most persons, in trying to con-

centrate, the tendency
165
placing themselves
of
in
is to imagine that they are a false or unnatural condition
mind; they feel that they are going to do something they have never done before, or something they are not accustomed to do. Perhaps they will shut their teeth together, and whisper tragically, "Now I am going to concentrate," and then, with clenched fists and corrugated brows, they knot their muscles till the perspiration starts, and the breath comes hard and fast. Dismiss the mistaken idea, for that is an artificial condition of mind. Concentration is not a fiery ordeal; it is a natural and a
pleasant recreation, or should be.
Put your body in an easy position, and whenever your attention is attracted to your body you may know it is getting tense; then relax and forget about it, because all your force is needed in looking
at
your mind may grow any particular form. For in instance, concentrating on that bundle of money, not be tired of the money, or of the conyou may but centration, you may become tired of that particular form of picture. If you have been looking
your picture.
But
after awhile
tired of looking at
at greenbacks, change your picture to gold or silver for awhile. It does not matter what kind of money
you have, so long as you get the amount you deIn this way you see your matrix is not desire. stroyed, but only the form of your picture is changed. Another very good aid to concentration is to form the habit of concentrating your thoughts upon everything you do in your daily life. If you
66
of Mind.
are tying your shoe, think of tying that shoe until

it
is tied; do not be tying your shoe and trying to read a newspaper at the same time. If it is dress-
ing for dinner, think of your dressing; do not be dressing and practicing a solo at the same time.
This regular practice of concentration will greatly quicken your power, and enable you to do thoroughThe ly and speedily every thing you undertake. successful men of the world are those who have practiced, and have acquired, the art of concentrating upon special lines.
of Mental Scientists and Christian Sciour time, and the Occultists throughout the Ages, have demonstrated the truths given in this lecture. You may believe these principles, but you will never know them until you demonstrate
entists of
Hundreds
them
for yourself. If you persist in practicing the rules given, you can draw to yourselves anything you care to picture. If you desire success, social
position,
it
any spiritual, mental or physical thing, can be gained by simply creating and holding the It makes no difference picture in your mind.
whether the thing you create is good for you to have, or whether you use or misuse it after you get it, you will get whatever you clearly picture. If you want a thousand dollars for the purpose of helping a poor family, or to hire a man to murder another, it makes no difference with the operation of the law. Your demand will be met if you make your picture But if you misuse your of the thousand dollars.
powers or direct your forces to the detriment of
167
another, you must take the consequences and these are very direful, because the law of Justice acts
quickly upon persons who consciously misuse mental forces than upon those who do wrong in a half conscious manner. It is always well to meditate before you create
a thing. So many persons are continually creating and demanding things they do not really want. Ask the Supreme Consciousness, God, Father, whatever you choose to call the Great Source, if there is any reason why you should not have the thing you desire; and when the impression comes, "there is no reason why you should not have it," then make your picture, claim it for your own, and then concentrate upon it until it comes. But suppose you think you would like to go to Europe, and, without
.
much more
meditating upon
to go,
it,
or asking
if it
is
best for you
of yourself on the steamer with your ticket for Europe. You will go to Europe, but you may be very ill after you get there,
you make a picture
or you
many
things
may be shipwrecked going or coming, or may happen to make you miserable on
your trip. If you had meditated upon the matter, and asked for the knowledge of what it was best to do, you would have received the impression that it was not best to go at that time. Then had you acted upon that impression, and stayed at home, all these calamities would have been avoided.
LECTURE EIGHT.
LESSER OCCULT OR PSYCHIC FORCES AND THEIR DANGERS.
the
At this period of our history most people make word Occultism synonymous with psychism. In
reality there is a vast difference between the two. The meaning of the former word you have hereto-
fore seen, and now it remains for us to examine one of its sub-divisions, which is psychism. It is very essential that we should know something about the
psychic realm,
if
for
no other reason than that we

it.
may
be able to avoid
It is rather
a dark side
seems desirable that you should know the truth, though it may offend and even frighten some of you. The necessity for
of nature; nevertheless,
it
this lecture is due, first, to the fact that people who take up this line of study are, for this very reason, in a position where they must contact very closely the psychic realm; and second, that humanity as a
whole, in its evolutionary career, is now beginning to approach the psychic plane. The psychically advanced members of the human race have contacted
it
already,
much
to the detriment of
some
of them,
and for these reasons it is the imperative duty of someone who knows the facts of nature to reveal
them, even though the revelation should excite the incredulity and scorn of the ignorant, and possibly
168
Lesser Occult or Psychic Forces and their Dangers.
69
the enmity of those who, in their researches, have contacted the psychic side, and have fallen under
its
deceptive influence.
of
Those
writings
you who are familiar with Bulwer's
that there is a vein of mysticism runthem. "The Coming Race," for exning through the sixth race that is now being born ample, depicts in America and his other mystic novels, such as "The
;
know
Strange Story/' "Haunted House," and that great Occult novel, "Zanoni," all reveal much to those who are interested in Occultism. The novel, "Zanoni," is really the story of one-half of a soul trying to find its other half, and it portrays the dangers of
different kinds that beset the student
on
his evo-
Zanoni finds the woman the lutionary journey. other half of his soul but she is engaged to marry
a person who is anxious to study Occultism. Zanoni seeks an old Occultist, who agrees to accept the young man as a student, providing he gives up his lady love to Zanoni. The youth has pursued his studies but a short time when he comes in contact with the "dwellers
upon the threshold," which
in the novel are depicted as being tremendous forces and entities that were turned loose upon the defence-
less boy.
We
read
how
out,
all
the sediment of his na-
ture
was brought
how he was
and
tempted, and
how he
yielded to temptation, moral destruction.
at last
went
to
all
These "dwellers on the threshold" are what we have to face when we contact the psychic realm, and not only do the students of Occultism have to
70
of Mind.
meet them, but the whole human race, as it demust come in contact with this realm. So let us see who and what these "dwellers on the threshold" are. Many of them are detached objective minds. We have seen in another lecture how the objective and subjective minds were united and became men. We also saw that a battle has to be waged between these two minds when the subjective awakens, and undertakes the control of its affairs. In the course of time the fight between these two minds of man becomes so tremendous that there sometimes comes a cleavage between the two, and
velops,
the subjective conquers it a tractable vehicle.

ive
mind
is
its lower mind, making of But sometimes the objectstronger than the subjective, and re-
fuses to be governed. Then it is that a separation comes, and the objective mind, strong in its victory,
becomes detached from
its
subjective.
The
subjective, being unwilling to remain under the dominion of its objective mind, leaves it to its ulti-
mate destruction, and goes back into the Infinite, to rest until another Cosmic Day shall come, when
it
can start forth with a new objective mind. This rebellious objective mind is so strong that
it may continue to occupy its physical body for several years after the separation, and goes through the remainder of that life the semblance of a human being, but devoid of moral character. When
it
excarnates and its body is destroyed, it may or may not be strong enough to reincarnate. If it does, then it will be of an intellectual animal nature,
Lesser Occult or Psychic Forces and their Dangers. 171
with no conception of morality or spirituality. In case it is not strong enough to reincarnate, it becomes a "dweller upon the threshold/' an individualized consciousness upon the subjective side of life, invisible to the physical eyes of men, but active
in its destructive desires and purposes. It becomes one of the many unpleasant forces or entities which we have to come in contact with when we reach
the psychic realm. In your study of
mankind you
will find
many
of
these objective minds without their subjective or higher principle, and this is especially true among
the older races and sub-races.

in
We
find
them here
country, but not in such large numbers as in China, Japan, and in Egypt. These are the persons whom we are pleased to designate as degenerates and perverts, also many of our most hardened criminals. Such entities seem to be ma-
our
own
and persistently destroy and pull associate. These are they who excarnate and go to the first plane of the subjective world and become the dwellers
liciously wicked,
down everyone with whom they
upon the threshold. But there are other denizens
of that plane. Every soul that excarnates, if it is not able to pass into the planes beyond, by reason of its undevelopment
and strong animal nature, must remain there, and become a dweller on the threshold also. Then there
is
the third class of dwellers

of consciousness
called
elementals.
These centers
and force have not

is
developed to the point where incarnation
possible
172
for them.
They
and undines.
These
are the fairies, goblins, brownies entities are not fanciful crea-
tions of the imagination, as many persons suppose, for they do exist in elemental forms; and when
they have been seen and described by persons whose psychic sense made them conscious of them, they were realities. Man cannot imagine that which does not exist, for no one can make a picture of the
non-existant.
Elementals are created by the thoughts of men.

thinks more and more forceand as he thinks, he creates little centers of consciousness within Divine Mind. These centers of consciousness assume different forms according to the quality of the thoughts which created them. The elemental grows very much in the same manner
fully;
As man develops he
that the embryo grows while living off its mother. These centers which man creates draw strength and vitality from him, and remain within the photosphere of their creator. But since whatever is
created upon the mental plane must, in course of

time, objectivize, or embody itself in a physical form, some time these elementals must take on ma-
bodies of some kind. There are the so-called good and bad elementals and when they become embodied in animal or insect form, that form will be assumed which corresponds to the nature of the consciousness seeking embodiment. If the elementerial
tal
be of a mischievous, destructive nature, then
it
was the
of
man,
result of mischievous, destructive thoughts and will take upon itself the form of an
animal or insect that will annoy man and destroy his property. Because it is a law that whatsoever man sends forth mentally must and will return to him. Then there is still another kind of thought creations of men which become embodied soon after they are born. These are the licentious, obscene thoughts of both sexes, that become the creeping, crawling bugs and vermin which infest untidy homes, second and third-class hotels and public
houses.
Then
there are the biting, stinging thoughts
which embody themselves as flies, wasps, bees and mosquitoes; and the poisonous thoughts which become spiders -and reptiles. These miserable creatures born of man's lower mind, cannot use the atoms of a higher rate of vibration for their bodies, but must use those atoms which they vibrate
They gather up the diseased the atoms, dirty atoms, those atoms which can no be used longer by men or beasts, and through forms
harmoniously with.
of these, express themselves upon the material plane. And thus man himself creates the de-
composed
structive things of earth which turn and wage against him for "God saw everything that He
;
war
had made, and behold it was very good." When an entity has attained a sufficient density within the subjective realm to be ready for embodiment, it has come to a point where it can have a direct influence upon human life, and it then reacts
upon
given
its
it.
creator according to the nature that was When these elementals separate from the
174
in which they were created, they often leave their creator, and impinge upon the auras of other persons. Sometimes they are utilized in
photosphere
nial magic, and students of them for the purpose of
magic, particularly in that form known as ceremoOccultism sometimes use
producing psychic phenomena. The transference of material substances from one room to another through closed doors and solid walls, or the disintegration and reintegration
of so-called solid things are performed through utilizing these elemental forces of nature.
Then
souls,
if
there are the minds of animals, or animal you choose to so designate those centers
which have been embodied, have excarnated and have passed on to the subjective side of nature to await another opportunity to become re-embodied. These subjective entities still possess all their animal propensities, but have no
of consciousness,
physical means of expressing them and they belong to the vast multitude of dwellers upon the threshold.
Where is this threshold? In Catholicism it is known as Purgatory; in Protestantism it is Hades. You remember the words of the Creed: "He descended into Hades." Hades is the place for departed
spirits.
;
It is the sidereal
it is
realm of the me-
the astral or psychic plane of the modern mystic and theosophist; it is the first plane of the spiritualist, the plane for earth-bound souls.
dieval mystic
It is
ours.
here interpenetrating this physical world of have seen in another lecture that this
We

earth is surrounded by five belts or zones which extend out into space, according to their color and This threshold is the first of the subvibration. jective planes, and is called the threshold because
the crossing over point from objective life into subjective life, and is the doorway through which
it is
egos re-enter earth life. All souls must pass through it, but the higher developed ones stay there but a very short time and never a moment after they This is are liberated from their physical bodies. one of the reasons why Occultists advocate cremation of the physical body, because by this process the man in a few moments is free to go to the plane
where he belongs instead of being chained to his body on the threshold for weeks, months, or years, as the case may be. Souls are magnetically bound to their bodies, and until "the silver cord is loosened" they cannot be free. Catholics say masses
for the souls of the
dead that these souls
may
be
released from the threshold, or purgatory. Years ago, when many of the priests were Occultists, a mass was written or chanted in the musical key
which corresponded to the color of the deceased. The sound of the chanted mass disrupted the "silver cord," as a prolonged sound upon the physical plane will disrupt a material mass, if its keynote be sounded long enough. As man's vibrations are raised he necessarily contacts with this first subjective realm and the influence of the four classes of entities, previously mentioned and popularly known as the psychic forces
;
176
of Mind.
of nature, are exerted upon him. The unconscious sensitive is always susceptible to influences which
produce moods that other persons do not have. At times he feels great depression, fears impending calamities and is influenced in various ways by the denizens of the next plane. And when an excarnated objective mind who has lost its higher mind finds a sensitive person whom it can control in mind and body, it immediately commences to manage his
affairs.
It enjoys by proxy, as it were, the intoxicating liquors that it forces its victim to drink. It
gratifies its lusts
by controlling
It
its
victim,
and com-
revenges itself, through its ignorant victim, upon persons whom it hates. Fearful crimes are many times committed by persons who are almost or quite unconscious of what they are doing, and who waken to consciousness inside
pelling
him
to sin.
prison walls to be told of their terrible deeds. In cases of emotional insanity, where a man temporarily loses self-control
and murders another, could the matter be investigated from the psychic side of life, it would be seen that the murderer was often
but an unconscious victim of a disembodied fiend, who desired to commit the murder, and used the
unfortunate sensitive as an instrument. The denizens of the next plane, and especially the excarnated minds of depraved men and women and the detached objective minds, utilize mankind for the purpose of vicarious enjoyment. A drunkard does not lose his love for liquor
his physical body.
when he
leaves
There
is
nothing
in the process

of the change called death which changes character. "In the place the tree falleth, there it shall be." It
is
what he considers the pleasure
natural that a drunkard should wish to enjoy of drinking, and so he
selects a subject that he can influence. This sensitive, whose will is not strong enough to resist this
strange influence which is thrown upon him, yields to the temptation, and is overpowered. He indulges
what
he believes to be his
own
appetite for
rum
and the more he drinks the more he wants. When he is overcome with the fumes of liquor he is crowded out of his body by the controlling entity, who takes possession of it, and enjoys a vicarious drunk
expense of his sensitive victim. A love for gambling, intense sex desire, civic wrongs and all kinds of crime are often traceable for their cause to what many persons call at this time "spirit control." When we read of a horrible murder or crime
at the
being committed by some man who declares "God spoke" and told him to do it, you may know the cause was just behind the scenes, and the crime was instigated by a dweller on the threshold. There are semi-conscious sensitives who are influenced by the denizens of the next plane. By semi-conscious sensitives I mean persons who have reached a point in their development where they are conscious of the existence of a psychic plane, but do not know the nature of it. They are conscious of psychic forces, but do not
of those forces.
this point in their
know
the nature
Most persons, when they reach

development, begin to investigate
178
of Mind.
psychic phenomena immediately. A student of Occultism who is a conscious sensitive, is required to
develop upon the mental plane before he is permitted to study the psychic realm. He must first attain the proper poise and development by learning to think clearly. Then he is taught how to use Cosmic Forces, and to surround himself with protecting currents, before he is taught how to function upon the psychic plane. After this has been accomplished he can look down upon the psychic realm and can penetrate into it without fear of attracting to himself unpleasant companions, or getting into unfortunate or compromising situations. It is impossible for ignorant or semi-ignorant
persons to investigate the psychic realm without being more or less influenced by it, and perhaps it will be well for us to examine the various classes
of investigators, and see something of the dangers to which they are subjected. I think we may safely
group the investigators of
spiritualistic
phenomena
or spiritualism in the first class, and this class should also include the members of the Society for Psychical
these are nothing
Research, and kindred organizations, because more nor less than investigators
of Spiritualism under the guise of science. Spiritualism is necromancy revamped, and is a practice that has been inveighed against by those who knew the dangers attending it, and by those who wrote
the sacred books, since

earth.
mankind came upon
this
Its six chief aspects are
automatic writing,
inspirational writing, inspirational speaking, trance
mediumship, independent slate writing, and mateIn all of these, passivity is rializing mediumship. the sine qua non of success, because mediumship is the end in view, and passivity is the means by which it is to be attained.
And
mean?
after
mediumship is attained, what does it Simply that this person has become an
instrument through whom these excarnated, unattached objective minds and other denizens of the psychic plane, may speak or write, or perform like clowns in a circus. And what good comes from it?
These entities, many of them, have become detached from their own higher principle, and must live on someone in order that their existence may be prolonged. Because without its subjective, the objective mind slowly deteriorates, and after a time fades out. These ignorant or malicious lower minds personate our departed friends, and glibly give us instructions about our domestic and business matters. They advise us when and where to buy and sell stocks; they give us long lectures on religion, and advise us about the training of our children. Think of such a creature as Jack the Ripper giving us a lecture on morality! Sometimes these "angel
guides"
pire to fame,
for so they insist upon being called asand pose as Lincoln, Shakespeare, or
Napoleon, forgetting that at that moment, at a dozen places in different cities of the world, alleged Lincolns, Shakespeares and Napoleons are doing
the
same
thing.
They urge us
to
become mediums
and organize developing
circles in order that they
180

teach us political reforms or
all
may
about the
eter-
nal progression of the soul. And all the time we are studying under them and are worshiping at
their seances, they are absorbing our magnetism and are ruining, mentally, morally, physically, and
who become their For mediumship soon becomes either possession or obsession, and both these conditions
often financially, those persons
mediums.
lead to insanity.
after, the
In discussing this question here-
term obsession will be used to designate all classes of cases where a human body is wholly or in part controlled by a disembodied entity. Most of the insanity of the present day is due to obsession; and insanity increases as humanity be-
comes more
ers
sensitive to the influence of these dwell-
upon the threshold.
There are cases of
hallu-
insane person believes he has exhis changed personality for that of another or who fancies he is a distinguished personage, and insists
cination
;
when an
is
upon being treated with great homage. Epilepsy nearly always attributable to obsession, and the
all
best treatment for
these cases
is
mental treat-
Making the patient positive will restore selfcontrol and health where medicine and confinement
will utterly fail.
ment.
investigator of the psychic plane, of the first either become a medium himself, or use class, a medium for the purpose of studying that plane. In
An
must
the cause of the
either case he is subjected to imposition relative to phenomena obtained. It is a well-
known
fact that a large percentage of the
communi-

cations received from so-called spirits are untrue, or would not expect from the inhab-
are of a nature one
itants of that plane.
Mediumship usually leads event-
ually to insanity or to the premature death of the medium. Even when there seems to be a controlling entity of a comparatively higher order than is usu-
found on that plane, there is necessarily a con stant diminution of the medium's forces. And as
ally
the vital forces of the
diminishes, he becomes has to resort to fraud unreliable, and frequently and pretence in order to continue his exhibitions. Everyone who knows anything about this subject
medium
cannot deny that there are sometimes genuine phenomena, but more often they are simulated. But one result can come from such fraudulent practices, and that is degeneracy of the moral character of the medium and of all who associate with him in his dishonorable business. Many mediums become habitual
drunkards as a consequence of having to take
intoxicating liquor to stimulate their failing strength after being vampirized into a weakened condition by
the entities that control

netism.
It is
them and absorb
their
mag-
admitted by unprejudiced investigators of
psychism that the majority of "Spirit Controls" are of a "low order." But this is explained by their statement that "like attracts like," and that mediums and investigators attract "spirits" of a nature kindred to themselves. It is also admitted by all
investigators that a positive, strong character is incapable of becoming a medium, and frequently
82
of Mind.
prevents phenomena from taking place at a seance when he is present. Taking these two statements into consideration, it is logical to conclude that there
are no positive, strong characters who attempt to control men, as the Occultists who have a knowl-
edge of the subjective planes of being have always

maintained.
all, what has been gained from all the from any one of the five sources menphenomena tioned? Has any new philosophy been presented, or any great discovery been made, through these
And
after
"By their fruits ye shall know of the investigations of the and the result them," for Society Psychical Research along these lines have merely verified the phenomena given by the Spiritualists since 1849, and not one of the investi"spirit guides?"
gators has as yet discovered the true cause of the phenomena, or formulated the law under which they
occur.
One
is
of the greatest tests given

this.
by these
mediums
through them were known only to the departed and to the invesBut. this is no proof that the controlling tigator. is the soul of the dear departed, because any entity disembodied entity can read the mind of the investigator, and can see the thought pictures that are
In this manner the past of any person be read, because it is written around him in may his photosphere, and goes with him wherever he
in his aura.
entity speaks or writes to someone concerning matters that
Some
goes.
local
preacher says he receives communica-

tions
from
his
known
to himself
dead son and and that son.
cites
facts
only
These communi-
cations he declares are proofs of the identity of his deceased son. He says his son revealed to him
where certain articles and papers were after he, the son, had passed from this life, and that he himself did not even know of the existence of them. This is no proof that the information came from the man's son, because any disembodied entity could have done the same and it is just as likely that the information was given by the objective mind of
;
Captain Kidd as
er's, son.
it is
that
it
came from the preach-
The second class of investigators may be known as passive clairvoyants, or those persons who cultivate passive mediumship for the purpose of funcSuch a clairtioning upon the subjective plane. voyant permits an entity to enfold or envelop his
body while it impresses a mental picture upon his mind and then the medium describes the picture
he sees.
This is not true clairvoyance, because the entity that impresses the medium is responsible for the picture, and it may be nothing but a fanciful
creation of
reality,
its own. The medium has not seen a but has looked at the mental creations of
another; and
when we
entities,
consider the character of
most controlling
liable.
possibly their pictures
we may
feel safe in
saying that not be altogether re-
The
third class of investigators
may
be called
of
artificial
clairvoyants and
is
composed largely
184
The History <md Power of Mind.
crystal gazers, magic-mirror gazers, etc., who, by these practices, throw themselves into a self-induced
semi-hypnosis.
In this state or condition they be-
susceptible to psychical influences, and mentally impressed pictures are the result. Vanity, or the desire for money-making, is usually the cause
for this kind of practice, rather than a desire for
come
growth or development, and the dangers from psychic influences are fully as great as in the classes
before mentioned.
a true clairvoyance or seership which two depends upon things a well-developed subjective mind that rules its objective mind, and a pecuis
But there
liar
physiological condition. Nearly in the center of the brain of every human being is situated a tiny orter
gan called the pineal gland, and this is the chief centhrough which the mind must function, in order that man may possess the X-ray vision that enables him to look beyond the material plane, upon the inner or subjective planes of consciousness. This gland can be attuned to finer vibrations than register in any of our other senses, and these vibrations relate us
worlds or planes. The student of Occultat a certain ism, point in his progress, is taught how to direct special cosmic currents of force into
to the inner
this gland to enlarge this
and
raise its vibrations.
When
has been accomplished, the student can function upon the subjective plane by an effort of his will as easily and well as he can see on the objective plane
by opening
his physical eyes.

is
With
this class of
clairvoyants there
no passivity or trance condi-
a conscious shifting of the consciousness from one plane to another; and it is according to the development of the man whether or not he is able to function upon many or few of the
tion,
but there
is
subjective planes of being. The unattached student of Occultism
is
one with-
out a Master or Teacher.

of Occult
He
is
one
who knows
powers and forces, and longs to possess them, and he courageously faces the dangers without assistance. This great desire for growth leads him to seek quick development, which is natural. The great majority of people, when they first hear of Occultism, and Occult teachers, immediately want a teacher, and their cry goes up "Give us a teacher." Then they begin to think they are developing
:
rapidly in Occultism and when certain subjective influences come about and they feel their peculiar vibrations, they immediately conclude that a Master
has come to teach and help them.

entities,
These subjective
of ambitious gain wishing them the with students, impress thought they love to entertain, and soon these students of Occultism are under the influence, and perhaps under the abto
control
solute control of the dwellers
upon the threshold.
Let me tell you now and let it always remain with you, that no teacher of Occultism will ever
try to control you in mind or body. You are divine because you are a part of Deity and therefore your body and your life is yours. A teacher has no more right to control your mind than he has to violate your body and no student, teacher, or Master of
86
of Mind.
Occultism will ever attempt it. So when you feel peculiar influences around you, or if you hear voices " We have come to help you, you are prosaying,
gressing rapidly," you may know it is the dwellers of the threshold who are talking to you. All students of Occultism, whether attached or unattached,
are helped by the Great Ones, but only
when
they
are earnestly trying to help themselves. They are never touched or coerced, or worked upon subjectively. If you are trying to
work out
a problem,
you may
suddenly receive an idea which will make everything plain to you. If you are ill, you may suddenly receive a suggestion to go somewhere, or do something which will help you to recover your health.
If
you are out of a position and need money, something or someone may be brought forward to help
er lines
studying along these deepwill be helped when he deserves help. The student who declares that he is going to work out his own salvation, that he is going to develop, and uses the knowledge he has gained to live according to his ideal, is a probationer, and if he persists in this course for a period of seven years he will draw to himself a teacher in physical form. That teacher may be a Master, an Adept, or an advanced student, but a teacher who is best
you.
is is
The student who
always watched and
suited to
him
in his
development
at that time.
And
during the seven years of probation, help will be given to him in various ways.
It
does not follow that everyone
who
thinks he

is ready for the higher Occult teachings is really prepared for them. For example, during the last century a number of persons heard of the Masters and Adepts, and seventy-two curious individuals started out to become students. An Adept whom I
know promised
tion
to give them one year of probaon the condition that those who successfully
all the tests given during that year should be accepted students. The first thing he did was to tell each aspirant after Occult teachings what kind of life he had lived, and was living at that time. He told them about their faults, and how those faults should be corrected. He took away their wines and all kinds of intoxicating liquors and also their pipes and tobacco; he forbade gambling and immoral associates and ordered certain hours set apart for meditation and concentration. In less than one
stood
of aspirants for Occult their backs on Occultism in inturned knowledge The others dignation. struggled on for awhile, but
week one-half the number
were so badly beset by
their old habits
and by the
subjective entities that were aroused by the new order of things and who immediately set about
trying to drag these students back into their old habits of living, that one after another fell out of line, till at the end of the year only one person out of the seventy-two had succeeded in living up to
his promises.
This
man was
given permission to
withdraw from the world and go into a lodge, where

he was taught Occultism. Let those who desire to push on
in their evolu-
188
of Mind.
tion take the attitude that they will not study psychic forces at all that they will not look for a Mas;
ter in that realm of being; that they will begin
work by building up character and by practicing what has been taught for I tell you truly, the psychic realm can offer you absolutely nothing of value
;
It is the higher and better knowledge can utilize, that you should desire; the you true Occultism which teaches the laws of being.
at this time.
that
LECTURE NINE.
HYPNOTISM, AND HOW TO GUARD AGAINST IT.
His
In 1734 an old student of Occultism re-incarnated. life was not dissimilar from the life of his as-
had the benefit of a better and an early education, opportunity to study medicine later on in his life. He attended a medical in Vienna and college graduated in 1766, and soon after that time resumed his study of Occultism under the same Master who had taught him in the
sociates except that he
previous life. It required but a very short time, after he began the practice of medicine, for him to learn something about the deficiencies in the sys-
tem of therapeutics, as
it
was then understood.
In 1778 he moved to Paris, which was then the scientific world, and began the practice of a system of magnetic treatments of the sick which startled the
scientists
and brought down upon him the condemnation of many of the medical men of that
time.
He
cured
many
cases that the physicians
had pronounced incurable and, of course, aroused the jealousy and hatred of many of the medical
profession.
I
am
speaking of Frederick Anton

so very re189
Mesmer.
The
cures this
all
man performed were
markable that
the wealth and intelligence of the
190
of Mind.
world went to Paris to be treated by this new system, and as a result, the medical profession began
to
wage war
against him as they did during this
century against the Christian and Mental Scientists and the Osteopaths. For human nature was then no better than now, and the green-eyed monster of jealousy cut a very conspicuous figure with the treatment of Mesmer, as it does with all other After Mespersons who innovate old methods. mer's fame became unbearable to the scientists, an investigating committee was appointed to look into
last
the
new
system.
It
reported adversely to Mesmer,

his clientele
of course,
and soon
began
falling
away
from him.
In 1783 he founded the Order of Universal Har-
mony, a secret order built upon the lines of Occultism, under the direction of his teacher, who was
also in Paris, giving
many
great demonstrations of
his Occult powers. I refer to Count Saint-Germain. This Order of Universal Harmony was the gateway
through which all persons could enter who were prepared at that time to take up Occult studies. But as time passed, many of the members dropped out and the Order gradually grew smaller and smaller until but a very few were left. To these faithful ones Mesmer taught the Occult system of therapeutics, Occultism, and the manipulation of that force which he designated as Mesmerism
naming
it modestly after himself. had deserted him, and most of
After the public

his students
had
turned their attention to other things than Occult-
Hypnotism, and
ism, he
How
to
Guard Against
It.
igi
removed
to
very Fatherland, where he died in 1815. After Mesmer's demise, for many years nothing was heard from his students or from his system; but in 1841 Doctor Braid, of Manchester, England,
little
success,
England where he met with and finally went back to the
commenced
to investigate along Mesmer's lines of and thought, inaugurated a system somewhat similar in principle, which he called Braidism, but which subsequently became known as hypnotism. Later, some scientific students in Paris and elsewhere be-
gan investigating along the lines laid down by Dr. Braid, and just about a century after Mesmer had been condemned and called an imposter by the French scientists, his teachings began to receive
the attention they deserved, although many persons, while accepting the teachings, discredited the
teacher.
however, between MesMesmer taught that mesmerism is an emanation of certain particles called animal magnetism, from one person which affects the will and nervous system of another. Braid taught that there is no emanation from the operator, but either through the will of the operator, or through mechanical processes, an artificial men-
There was a
difference,
mer's and Braid's systems.
tal
condition
is
awakened
in the subject,
and that
during under the control of the operator. In other words, How it is the influence of one mind over another. one mind can affect another without an emanation
this condition the volition of the subject is
192
is
of Mind.
lecturer, but condition satiscan that perhaps hypnotists explain These are the at least to themselves. factorily, sup-
beyond the comprehension of the
posed lines of division between the two systems, but Mesmer really taught two systems in one. First, that there is a flow of magnetic force, which he designated as animal magnetism, and that this emanating force is curative in its nature second, that there can be coercion of mind by mind. He practiced the
;
first
and warned his students against practicing
the other.
ings, as
it
The world,
of course, confused his teach-
usually confuses anything of an Occult and remembered the second system without nature,
his caution.
At
as
the present time animal magnetism
is
known
Mesmerism, and Hypnotism is known produced. So we shall try to follow out the modern conception of it rather than the presentation of Mesmer, although reference may be had from time to time to Mesmer's teachings. He taught that Mesmerism is a Cosmic Force which is a part of the law of love or the law of attraction, and that it flows through man and may be directed by his For will, as an emanation from him to another. example, he showed that the force flowing from his hands was a force that he could draw into himself and then give it to another. He also showed that he could get approximately the same effect by using
as sleep,
artificially
large magnets, thus proving that this is a general and not a personal force which he used.
The law
of gravitation
is
a part of this magnetic
Hypnotism, and
force,
it
How
to
Guard Against
It.
193
all its gradations, whether animal love, or passion. The law love, of attraction manifesting through an animal body we now designate as animal magnetism. This Cosmic Force, passing through an animal, is nothing more nor less than the Universal Life Principle, the orange vibration, which you will be taught in the next lecture how to use. Passing through man as human-animal magnetism, it manifests itself as
and so
is
love in
be
human
that peculiar vibration or force which his devel-
opment permits. There is, however,
a physiological condition necin order to make it magnetic, just a to body essary as there is a physical condition necessary to make
any mass magnetic. For example: Glass is not magnetic as compared with iron or steel. The rate of vibration of glass is so different from that of
magnetism that
necessary to
or
it
does not
it
make
for that force as
flows over
it.
a good conductor The condition
human
a proper basis for the animal magnetism to manifest is the excess,
make
above the normal, of the number of red blood corpuscles in the body; and these red corpuscles must
vibrate at a high rate. With these two conditions there is established the physiological basis which
enables the Cosmic Force to manifest; and having the proper physiological basis, a person, either consciously or unconsciously, draws within himself this Cosmic Force through the left side of his body, and
passes
it
out through his right side.
The
left
being
194
the negative, and the right the positive side of the
body.
Animal magnetism
can
be
utilized
by
man
through the blending of his aura with that of another, or through transmission by physical con-
Most persons, tact, laying on of the hands, etc. such as faith curers, or magnetic healers, use this magnetic force without an understanding of the law
which underlies
it.
If
an Occultist desires to trans-
mit this force to another person, he places his right hand on that other person then, after drawing into himself the force, he permits it to flow through him into the other. This force can be used advantageously in all nervous troubles, because it is the nerve
;
fluid, or life force, which restores depletion; it is also helpful in cases of consumption of any of the physical organs of the body, and if properly directed, will build up diseased cells and restore wast-
ed tissues.
Many
persons possess this magnetic
force to a great degree, but do not
know how
to
it, while others perform cures unconscious of the power they possess, and without the action of
use
their
own
will.
person who makes a practice of using his animal magnetism or life force for the treating of disease must become greatly depleted at times, since
the natural inflow of
the outflow.
life
force
is
never so great as
If the natural inflow of the life force
were as great as the outflow, our bodies would last forever, because this would make an even exchange of atoms, and no robbery could be perpetrated.
Hypnotism, and
How
to
Guard Against
It.
195
There
is
another, and this emanation causes
an actual emanation from one person to an exchange
of physical atoms. Remember, please, that I am not speaking of the higher Cosmic forces which can be used for healing purposes without depleting the
healer,
and which
I shall
teach you
how
to use in
a subsequent lecture ; but I am speaking of the natural life force within the physical body, that can be used as a curative agency, as Mesmer used it.
of
because of the outflow exceeding the inflow magnetism that many Osteopaths suffer so much from depletion after their professional manipulations which are very good for the patients, but hard for the Osteopaths. Sometimes the Osteopath absorbs the old diseased atoms from his patients, through manipulating with both hands at the same time, thus forming a complete circuit for the magIt is
netic force, which carries from him his best atoms and returns the cast-off ones from his patients. It
is
not conducive to the good health of the Osteo-
path, or magnetic healer, to use both hands while treating the sick but in severe cases, where it seems
;
that a
should be kept from going out, it may be done. But immediately afterward both hands and arms should be bathed in hot water, rubbing the
life
arms and hands from the elbow downward to the

tips of the fingers.
In this
way
it is
possible to re-
move, by aid of the hot water, many of the low vibrating atoms which have been taken into the
system.
When
a Mental Healer begins to lose his force,
196
or
of Mind.
"If
power to heal, as many do, Mind is infinite, why has this

is
the world says healer failed?"
The
reason
this:
First, his brain
has become tired

its
by continuous concentration, and
material at-
oms have taken
a slower rate of vibration because
the outflow of magnetic force has been much greater than the inflow. Through his intense interest in
his
to his patients with his treatments, an expenditure of emotional force.
cases perhaps his sympathies have gone out and here was
Without un-
derstanding the reason for his waning power, he tries to go on with the work of healing when he
should rest and sleep, and in this manner draw back to himself the life force he has given away. After
a time he finds himself depleted and is compelled to retire from service humiliated and chagrined, perhaps, because of the unkind criticisms he has
leceived from those to
force.
whom
he has given his
life
There
sick than
is
a better and a higher way to treat the by the magnetic force which made Mesthat
is
mer famous, and
to remain in a positive
condition of mind, control your sympathies, and thus hold your own magnetic force as a basis over
which you may draw the higher Cosmic forces, and pass them on to your patients without depleting yourself. If you can control your sympathies, and remain positive, you can treat without depletion as
many
hours.
patients as
you can entertain during
office
But, you may say, this is not the aspect that modern science is investigating. It is true that
Hypnotism, and
it is
How
to
Guard Against
It.
197
not practiced along the lines Mesmer laid down, except by the physicians who are beginning to use electricity in their practice, and who attempt to do with their batteries precisely what Mesmer attempted to do with his magnets and I am not sure that
;
they are any more successful, because Mesmer also used the greater force of mind to assist these currents.
And now we come

the subject which
investigate,
to that particular aspect of modern science is beginning to

is
which
known
as hypnotism.
Hyp-
which may be produced upon one's self or upon another and it may be produced by the power of will, by mechanical processes, or by the will supplemented by mechanical processes. The mechanisms that are used to produce
notism
is
artificial sleep,
hypnosis are revolving mirrors, bright lights, or anything which will serve to excite the optic nerves
and
raise them to a rate of vibration which will enable the subject to pass into hypnosis, or sleep. Unnatural stimulation of the nerves of the eyes, or of the nerves at the base of the brain, or by
focusing the sight at an angle of forty-five degrees, and then gradually raising it until the pupils are turned upward above the upper lids, will produce
an abnormal nervous excitation and while the subject is in this condition he readily accepts the men;
tal
suggestion of sleep, and passes into hypnosis. In this manner he is forced out of his physical body is under the control of the operator's mind, and is
;
also exposed to
any or
all
influences
upon the sub-
198
jective
If
of Mind.
plane which he has abnormally invaded. the hypnosis is complete, then both minds of the subject are absolutely under the control of the
operator; but if the hypnosis be only partial, then nothing but the objective, or lower mind, of the
subject
is
controlled.
But while
in this condition,
will of another, the subject must as true everything suggested to him by that accept
and passive to the
controlling mind; and whatever command is given to him in sleep he will obey when he wakes, and
without knowing why.
From
the
first
moment
the
subject yields his will to another he others slave, if that one desires to
becomes that make him so.
So long as the operator

will he
lives in this world, so long
in France It is and in America that the mind of the subject is not dominated to the extent of coercion, or beyond the
be able to control that subject. contended by the modern hypnotist
of the subject to act independently. In other words, that he cannot be compelled to do a wrong
power
against his will. Cases are cited where subjects refused to stab a man when the operators gave them
real
to do so. where the same subjects were given paper daggers and were told to strike designated persons. This command they obeyed with alacrity; and because they obeyed in the last instances and refused in the first, it was supposed that they could not be coerced to commit a crime
daggers
and
commanded them
Other cases are cited
against their wills. The Occultists say these cases do not prove the theory advanced, but only show
Hypnotism, and
How
to
Guard Against
It.
199
that both minds of the subjects were not under the control of the operator; and that if they were, the subjects would have obeyed in the first instances as
quickly as in the
last.
In the East, where
men
have made a study of the power of mind for hundreds of years, it is taught that nothing will prevent a hypnotized subject from obeying the commands of the operator, or controlling mind, when once the subject is fully under his influence. Some of you may have seen the account in one
of our local papers where a man was hypnotized and compelled to deed everything he had in the
world to another man. After the victim became conscious of what he had done, he appealed to his attorney who took the matter into court, but when
the victim appeared to testify, the hypnotist would not permit him to speak and the man's throat was
paralyzed in the presence of the room full of peoThe hypnotist was incarcerated in jail until ple. the paralysis passed away from the throat of his
victim and
when
his influence
was removed and
the true testimony was given, the court decided that the property should be restored to the original owner.
And
only a few months ago here in
New York
tried
City,
you remember how Patrick was
and
It
convicted of the murder of the millionaire Rice.
was proved that it was the old man's valet who had killed him while under the hypnotic influence of Patrick and these are only two cases that have come to the public's notice. It is gradually being
;
2OO
understood, however, that morality does not enter

at all into the question of control, but that
it
de-
pends wholly upon whether or not both minds of

the subject are controlled. Occultists believe that there is no disease, no trouble, or anything in the
world that can justify a person in attempting to hypnotize another. If a person consents to be hypnotized, then it is because he does not know the dangers he incurs by consenting, and his ignorance should not be taken advantage of by one who knows
better.
There is another phase of this mind controlling mind which is more subtle and dangerous than that
of mechanical hypnotism, because it can be used without the knowledge of the subject, and without the immediate presence of the operator. This branch is called by the Occultists Mental Dominion, and is just beginning to be understood in the West. Hypnotism by mental dominion is produced by mental suggestion alone, without physical contact or mechanical aids. It makes no difference whether the subject be present, in the next room, or in the same State with the operator, he can be reached equally as well at any time or place. The method formerly
adopted was to suggest sleep to the subject, or victim, and when he had received and obeyed the suggestion, then the operator impressed whatever he desired upon the mind of his subject, who had to obey his will upon waking. But after a time the
American Hypnotists discovered that putting the subject to sleep was not essential, and that just as
Hypnotism, and
effective
How
to
Guard Against
It.
201
tion until the subject should accept it, believing it to be his own thought.
work could be done by repeated suggesand act upon

This process
of mental control can only be called hypnotism by courtesy, since hypnosis is now omitted as a neces-
sary condition in
will continue to
its accomplishment; however, it be called by that name until a more suitable one shall be adopted. Unless you have made a study of this practice of mental dominion, you have no idea of the extent to which this subtle power is being used in the United States. It is flagrantly and openly taught by "colleges," chartered by various States all news;
papers, and
magazines, contain their alluring advertisements offering to teach "Personal Magnet-
many
etc.
ism," "Hypnotism," Under various
colleges, professors, tary consideration to teach you how to dominate your fellow men, how to enslave another Son of God,
to exercise a
"The Secret of Power," etc., names each of these teachers, and doctors offers for a mone-
and how to "positively enable any intelligent person marvelous influence over anyone whom he may wish to control" I quote from one of the
advertisers of this largest and most persistent branch of education. Traveling salesmen, doctors,
lawyers, brokers, real estate men, and, in fact, persons in every branch of business are studying and using mental coercion. In my own personal experience, in the practice
of law, I have had a dozen or the malign influence of persons
more cases
which had been used to get

in
202

others.
money and property away from

of these cases stock brokers
In three
had used mental coerto entrust
cion compelling
my
clients
money
it
to
their keeping with the permission to use
as the
broker saw fit. The money had been appropriated by the hypnotist stock broker for his own purposes, and my demand for restitution was met with the assertion that it had been lost in speculation by my client. In two of these cases, after the arrest of the respective brokers, the proceedings had to be stopped, because my clients had again yielded to the influence of the men who had coerced them and refused to prosecute them further. There is a member of this class who heard these lectures last year and said that such an influence could never come into her life; yet within a few months afterward, while her husband was away and she was 'alone, a stock broker called, and asked her to place in his hands a large block of valuable
stock with
full
thought
best.
permission to dispose of it as he After urging the matter for an un-
reasonable length of time, he finally left her, after gaining her promise to let him call the next day for the stock. After he had gone the woman began to realize that the man had influenced her against
her will and judgment and she wrote to him refusThen ing to see him or to let him have the stock. for three days she had to fight his mental suggestions to change her mind and accept his offer, but
finally
Another member of
succeeded in saving her property. my class, who heard this
lee-
Hypnotism, and
How
to
Guard Against
It.
203
ture last year, thought she was exempt from such influences because of the quiet, retired life she was
She discovered her mistake when a stranger one day and persuaded her to give him a large contract for advertising a book she had written. After securing this he called again in a few days, and tried to coerce her into giving to him her rights and copyright to the book and had it not been for the sudden recollection of what she had heard about hypnotism and also for the aid of another member
living.
called
who was a student along this line, the would have succeeded in getting what he hypnotist wanted. As it was he very nearly put her to sleep and she had a hard battle to resist complete hypof her family,
nosis.
When
the Countess
Wachmeister was
in this
country, several years ago, she told of the following case: There were three men in this city who had
studied hypnotism and decided to combine their efforts and victimize a wealthy man. They each
took a turn in working upon him mentally during each day, sending suggestion after suggestion to
him, until he became absolutely under the influence of the trio. After a time he became so sensitive that
would
the picture of the face of each of his tormentors rise before his mental vision while he was
being worked upon. Then he could hear them speak to each other, but continued to resist them until he went to sleep from weariness. But when he awoke he was impelled to write a check and send it to the address that had been impressed upon his
204
mind. This kind of robbery continued for some time and finally the victim went to the Countess, and asked her to deliver him from the power of his tormentors.
There
its
is
no
limit to the
power
of mind, nor to
operation through suggestion. In the of the use of Occult forces, suggestion is beginning one of the most powerful of the mind's instruments which the student learns to use. It should not be
field of
identified
with hypnotism although
it
can be used
to produce hypnosis. Like any other force, it can be used for good or for evil, and the line that lies
between the right and wrong use of it is as narrow as the edge of a knife, and is just as sharp. In the practice of magic these two ways diverge, and we find what is called White and Black Magic. The first is a straight and narrow path which leads to the mountain top of power and wisdom, and to reach it is salvation. The other is the broad road which leads to pitfalls and destruction; and I regret to
say that
It
many
souls are enticed to travel therein.
of this power of suggestion which destroyed us as Atlanteans, and from the present indications it would seem that we did not learn, through that sad experience, that we have no right to enslave the minds of others. Mind must be reached by thought, if the thought be constantly repeated, and nothing can prevent a suggestion from reaching its destination, because telepathy is based upon law. But whether the suggestion shall be accepted and acted upon depends
was the wrong use
Hypnotism, and
How
to
Guard Against
It.
205
recipient to decide; and it is upon the acor ceptance rejection of suggestion that the freedom or enslavement of a mind is determined. There
upon the
are different kinds of suggestion, two of which are known as audible and silent. Audible suggestion
we are constantly we should learn to
indulging in, and control, because it
is
may
something be either
constructive or destructive, and if the latter, may do much harm to others. For example:
we
We
meet a friend who looks tired, and we say: "How bad you look; are you ill?" This is a destructive suggestion, and may have the effect of really making our friend ill if he accepts it as a truth. Parents and teachers are constantly making audible suggestions to children which have a great effect upon them. If a teacher calls his pupils dunces and dolts, and tells them how stupid they are, he is pretty sure to find in them just what he suggests. If a parent tells his child that if he misses his lesson he will
of
be punished, that child will remember the suggestion punishment and probably miss his lesson, be-
ment of
cause the suggestion of punishment brings an elefear with it which makes an indelible impression upon the child's mind.
It is a destructive
suggestion, because it destroys the child's ability to learn his lesson. But if the parent were to say "You can learn your lessons, because you are a
bright, intelligent child," the suggestion would be constructive, and the child would respond to it by
having a desire awakened
in
him
to learn, since the
2o6

of a child
is plastic,
of Mind.
mind
and
is
easily impressed
by
audible suggestion.
always ready to see the life, any audible of a destructive and since there suggestion nature; are constructive suggestions which can be made to help others, why should we be continually hindering instead of helping our friends? Why is it not better to bring sunshine rather than shadows into their lives? Suppose a friend of yours is about to make a business connection with a Mr. Jones, whom
objective
is
The
mind
dark side of
and
will readily accept
know, and you say, for the sake of "Mr. gossip, Jones is a dishonest man." This suggestion, whether true or untrue, will have a tendency to make Mr. Jones dishonest if he hears of what you have said, because the thought dishonesty has been impressed upon his mind, and he will think he may as well be what people think he
you
slightly
Then your friend to whom you made the suggestion will think of it when he sees Mr. Jones, and the unfortunate man will get both silent and audible suggestions.
is.
Silent suggestion is of two kinds, Hetro and Auto. The former meaning suggestion to another, and the
meaning suggestion to one's self. There is power in silent suggestion, whether it be used for right or wrong, than there is in audible
latter
greater
suggestion, because the silent thought sent to another is subtle, and the recipient knows nothing of its source, and is often unable to combat it, think-
ing
it
originated in his
own
mind.
Silent sugges-
Hypnotism, and
How
to
Guard Against
It.
207
tion can be used for the benefit of another so long as it be suggestion, and is not carried to the extent
of coercion.
For example
You may have

:
a friend
who is likely to give way You would have a right
to temptation to to say to him
do wrong.
"You
are
good and true; you can resist that temptation because your own divine nature has asserted itself." And your friend will come through his struggle
victorious.
suggest mentally to a person and right to say to him audibly it is often inexpedient for you to say audibly what If a you have a moral right to say. For example person calls and is taking up more of your time than you can spare, it is morally right for you to
You may always
what you have a
you go?" You have a from intrusion upon your work. Or perhaps someone has borrowed money from you, and you do not like to ask him to return it though you really need the money. It would
say mentally,
"Why
don't
right to protect yourself
be perfectly legitimate for you to say mentally: "Return the money you borrowed." Again, you may be seeking a position and perhaps several other persons are trying to secure the same position.
When
called into the office to state your qualifications, say mentally to the person who is examining you, "You had better give me a chance."
you are
You have a right to help yourself through life by the aid of suggestion, when it is not at the expense of another person; and you have no conception of
the
number
of obstructions this silent
power
will
208
of Mind.
remove from your path, or how much good you can accomplish with it. Like all other forces, this power grows with use, and you can use silent suggestion legitimately as a moral stimulus. Suppose a person makes a contract with you agreeing to
give you certain things in consideration of certain money. After a time you perceive that the contract
not going to be kept by him. You have a right to say mentally to that man, "You are an honorable man and you want to keep that contract," and in this manner you will create within him a desire to
is
keep
it.
Silent suggestion can be used as a defence. For example: When you are conscious that a person is
tions
trying to influence you, refuse to accept his suggesand declare that he cannot accomplish his purpose. This will turn his force back upon himself,
and render him impotent to
affect you.
is
If
you know
a person in fiduciary matters
advantage of you, commence nature until you quicken into activity
trying to take an to work upon his moral

all
the latent
In this manner you are doing a double good; you are working for yourself and are also bringing out the best in another. But
good there
is
in him.
you have no right to coerce another person under any circumstances. You may suggest strongly,
but not to the extent of coercion, not even to develop the moral nature of another. You may suggest to a friend, "You do not want to drink from drinkliquor you never will get any pleasure
forcefully,
;
Hypnotism, and
ing.
How
to
Guard Against
it."
It.
209
You do
not like the taste of
And
in this
manner you may help to destroy his desire and taste for drink; but you have no right to say, "You shall not drink liquor your hand will be para;
lyzed try to raise a glass of it to your throat shall close when you try to swallips; your low any intoxicating drink," because such declara-
when you
him and
Should you succeed in coercing you would but hypnotize him, it would be your will, not his, which would control his appetite and his body; and as soon as
tions are coercive.
to stop drinking,
your will is removed his taste will reassert itself, and will remain with him till he overcomes it himself. You may help him to overcome his desires, if he wants you to, but you have no right to dominate his will.
You may suggest to a person who owes you, "Give me that money you owe me," but you have no right to say, "You shall return to me that money you shall never sleep again till you have paid me." You have no right to coerce another, either mentally or physically; and though the line of demarkation is very fine, yet it is clear. It will be well to remember these two rules which
;
may help you in using suggestion. First, when you are suggesting to another to do something for you, speak of yourself as a third person. For example:
Suppose Mr. Jones had given you his note, and you wanted him to pay it. He may have given his note to a dozen other persons, and if you were to say mentally to him, "You want to pay that note," he
2io
of Mind.
would not know which note was referred to. But if you were to say, "Pay Mr. Blank the note due at such a time," your suggestion would be understood, and very likely be acted upon. In olden times it was often the custom of physicians to meet their patients with a frown and a discouraging remark but the modern physician is beginning to understand the value of suggestion, and meets his patient with a smile, and the optimistic remark, "You are looking better to-day, and are
;
This is an audible suggestion. feeling better/' a friend Suppose says to you, "I am feeling misershould ably," you reply mentally to him, "There
no reason why you should not feel well." If you were to make this statement audibly, after he had
is
declared to the contrary, he might be offended, because some persons cherish their ills, and resent But the a refusal of anyone to recognize them.
silent,
those
ful
who have
optimistic remark helps to make positive favorite ills, and they become hope-
and healthy. Second, whenever you make a mental suggesMake one suggestion for the tion, suggest doubly. and one mind suggestion for the objectsubjective ive mind, and by doing this your object may be accomplished in a
much
shorter time.
In suggesting
to the subjective mind, tell it the truth; when you suggest to the objective mind, advise it along the For example: man lines of personal interest.
has leased an apartment, but finds the owner does not intend to keep his agreement to renovate that
Hypnotism, and
apartment.
How
to
Guard Against
It.
211
Having a contract, he has a moral upon the terms being fulfilled, and he says mentally to the subjective mind of the ownright to insist
er of the apartment, "You are an honest man and you will be glad to keep your promise to Mr. Blank." to his objective mind, "It is to your interkeep your promise with Mr. Blank; he will be a good tenant and it will be a great loss to you to lose him." The man has been told two aspects of the truth, and each aspect appealed to the mind which was able to appreciate and understand it best. Auto-suggestion is suggesting to yourself, and you should always let the auto-suggestion be made by your higher mind to your lower self. Let the
est to
Then say
subjective
to
mind
give,
suggestion.
The
and the objective receive the greatest objection an Occultist has
hypnotism is that it emphasizes the objective mind, and teaches it to make its dominion stronger over its subjective mind. Suppose you wished to
break a habit; you should say to your objective mind, "Now you cannot do that thing again." Sometimes the objective mind will answer, "Why can't
I do that?" You should reply, "Because it is not to your interest to do it, and you do not want to; you have no desire to; all your desire is gone forever." And the objective mind will begin wondering
where the desire has gone, and cepts the suggestion made and
;
at that
in this
moment
ac-
can break any habit if you will ing suggestions. Deity does not coerce Its children and no child
manner you but persist in mak-
212
of

coerce another, because
it.
God has a right to morally wrong to do
it is
on the mental plane must become embodied upon the material plane sooner or later, and a man's body is a limited expression of his mental traits, as are also the tendencies and habits of his body. Suppose a mother comes to you, crying, "Save my boy from becoming a gambler 1" and you undertake the task of stopping the boy from gaming. You may make your passes, and your mental suggestions, and say: "You shall not gamble any more; you shall suffer an agony of fear every time you atexists
Whatever
tempt to make a wager or touch a card." You may prevent the boy from gambling, but you have not destroyed his love for it, and you have really only delayed his evolution, since he will have to come back to face the same conditions at another time; if not in the same body, then in another one, in a future life, or whenever your will has ceased to control
him.
dis-
Hypnotism or mental dominion never cures
ease; it merely prevents the temporary manifestation of effects. The limitation of its so-called cura-
power depends upon the will of the hypnotist, and the extent of the hypnosis produced. Henry Wood, in "Practical Ideas." for December, 1900,
tive
tian
points out the fact that a percentage of the Chrisand Mental Science patients have a recurrence of their diseases within a well-defined period after
they are cured. This is because either conscious or unconscious mental dominion was employed by the
Hypnotism, and
How
to
Guard Against
It.
213
mind of the practitioner in holding back the manifestation of the trouble; and these returns occur in periods or half periods of seven-year cycles, according to the power of the practitioner. Even though a patient be actually cured, not by mental dominion, but by bringing new elements into his body, unless
he puts himself into a

likely to return.
new
condition of
mind and
bodily habits, the old disease in
On
course of time is the death of a hypnotist the
disease he has held in abeyance usually returns, because the magnetic cord which connects him with
his subject is then broken,
and the stronger influence being removed, the weaker mind, with its old
line of thinking, reasserts itself. There is a great limitation in the therapeutical use of hypnotism since its best effects are upon ner-
vous and kindred diseases.
In chronic cases, blood diseases, or independent growths within an organism, such as cancers and tumors, it is not successful. In cases of insanity it is more successful, but even
there it is subject to limitation. Continuous hypnotic influence upon a patient not only destroys his mental poise and makes him a negative, vacillating
creature of impulse, but it also depletes his nerve fluid, and while the operator may seem to temporarily neutralize this weakness, there comes great
reactions in course of time and the nerves controlling the circulation of the capillary blood vessels become weakened, and the entire circulation be-
comes irregular and imperfect. Cold hands and feet, with sometimes an intense rush of blood to
214
the head, are the physiological evidences of this condition.

It should not be forgotten that hypnotic influence has a reactionary effect upon the operator. For example, suppose a person attempts to throw his hypnotic influence upon you and you are so positive or
your vibrations are so high that
his influence fails
to affect you, then as a natural operation of law that force which he sent out, not reaching its intended destination, returns to the sender. If it be a malig-
nant force it will do for the sender what it was intended to do for his victim. The greatest crime known to the Great Law is the coercion of an individual center or mind to do evil. No one ever coerced another or used suggestion to the detri-
ment of another; no one ever brought disease or misfortune upon another, that he did not have to
drink to the dregs the cup he held to that other's He may escape punishment from the human lips.
law, but it will be impossible for him to escape from the Divine Law. In order to send malignant influ-
ences to another the sender must hold in his mind

the picture of the disaster he wishes to create for that other. It is impossible to do this without creating a matrix in his own aura and this matrix will
draw back
to the sender just
what he has
created,
for the Great
automatically and imparof the fact whether he has and irrespective tially disaster upon his vicdown succeeded in bringing tim or not. Did you ever see a person supposed to
Law works
Hypnotism, and Hoiv
to
Guard Against
It.
215
be a witch or a black magician graceful, happy or wealthy?

sires
who was handsome,
Hypnotic influence may last till the operator deit to be broken or till a stronger will than his, If a at the request of the subject, shall break it.
person submits to complete hypnosis but once, in the course of time the influence will become dissipated; but an intense hatred for the operator will become engendered in the heart of the subject when that influence is destroyed, and it will never be
works
If
eradicated during the lifetime of either. The law in the same manner in cases of coerced love. a person succeeds in compelling the love of an-
other through hypnotic influence, that love will turn to the bitterest hatred and then there is nothing that
the victim will leave undone to avenge what he believes to be his wrongs. It is right to ask for honest
love or to suggest that another person should give you his love; you have a right to picture another's
love flowing from him to you, but you have no right to coerce another into loving you. Hypnotic
by a person who is stronger than the hypnotist. For example: A may coerce B, but C can break A's influence at B's request even though he is no stronger than A, because C is working for the right and has the Universal Consciousness to aid him.
influence can be broken
will
this
There are certain conditions of mind which if you make use of them will make you immune from
:
First. Be mentally positive malignant force then you are not what the hypnotist calls "suggest;
216
able."
of Mind.
is suggestable is in a passive receives suggestion easily. If you make a practice of concentrating your thoughts upon whatever you are doing, your mind is active
person
who
condition of
mind and
and positive and thoughts foreign to you cannot find lodgment with you. Few operators are persistent enough to continue with their suggestions
when they
Second.
enslaves.
fail in
reaching the subject after a conaccepting the suggestion which prevent the suggestion from the operator is persistent, but you
siderable length of time.

It
is
You cannot
you
if
coming
to
need not accept it. Third. Be on your guard against all suggestions. Examine critically all thoughts that come to you, and test each with this question "Is it true ?" There will be no one who will come in contact with you for many years who will be strong enough to make a suggestion to you and accomplish his purpose imThe effort must be repeatedly made mediately. before he can succeed. If you examine the thoughts which come to you and find them undesirable, repudiate them and declare you cannot be influenced by them. For example: Suppose you were to suddenly become dissatisfied with your present home. You have always been pleased with it, but suddenly you are seized with a desire to move from that neighborhood and buy somewhere else. Examine those thoughts and ask yourself why you should change your mind without any apparent cause. And if in a few days or weeks a real estate broker meets
:
Hypnotism, and
How
to
Guard Against
It.
217
you and offers a piece of property in the neighborhood you have been thinking of moving into, it may be well for 3 ou to consider whether it was his thoughts that have caused your change of mind or whether they were your own.
r
not entertain visiting thoughts until character any sooner than you would entertain persons whose character you know
Fourth.
Do
you know
their
nothing about.
Fifth. Select only such thoughts as you want, and reject such suggestions as you do not desire. So few people are able to do this, but are constantly
being swayed by the influence of those with whom they associate. Other people's manners, words and thoughts mold our lives to a much greater extent than we imagine, and this is because we do not think for ourselves; we do not generate our own thoughts, but accept whatever comes floating along to us. A woman goes shopping. She knows in a general way what she wants, but with her mind full of indefinite thoughts she comes to a positive saleswoman who wants to sell all the goods on her counter. In a vague way the shopper tells the woman she is going to buy a dress and the saleswoman sees an opportunity to dispose of something she is anxious to get rid of. She immediately makes a selection for her customer and impresses her mind with the thought that this is just what she wants. The shopper does not know what she wants, and although this does not seem to be quite the shade or kind of goods she had thought about getting, still
2i8
she
is

not sure
it
of Mind.
would not
do.
She wavers and
the saleswoman sells her the dress, and when it comes home and the positive-minded saleswoman
is
not present, the woman is disappointed and diswith her purchase. A man goes into a restaurant and an obsequious waiter suggests by his manner that a liberal tip is expected. He gives the man no more attention than
satisfied
the proprietor pays him for giving to any other customer, but he wants a tip and he thinks, looks and acts tip till the man cannot, dare not refuse to
it. He is for the moment under the mental dominion of that waiter and even though he be a Judge of the Supreme Court he must yield to the
give
man who perhaps own name.

will of a
life is true.
can scarcely write his

in
That no hypnotist can succeed permanently
person can retain possession of a thing gained through black art or by dishonest methods. A thief may seem to prosper for a season, but eventually the Great Law will make the proper adjustment and his illgotten gains will be swept from him, because Divine Justice does rule
the Universe.
No
LECTURE TEN.
HIGHER OCCULT OR SPIRITUAL FORCES AND THEIR USES.
an old saying that "Birds of a feather which is another way of saying: "Tell me who a man's friends are and I will tell you what manner of man he is." Through both
is
There
flock together,"
these
maxims
the
same thought runs

;
that like
mentalities are found in groups. There are certain groupings of forces and of truths there are also a
grouping of minds. Literary people are likely to be drawn together; musicians naturally seek musicians for their friends, and this is due to the fact
that the individuals
brate in the
who compose these groups visame common key. They think along the same general lines; they have what is someis,
times called sympathetic vibration, that

vibrate at the
they
same general
strike a note
rate.
In physics
tions.
If
we
you
see evidences of sympathetic vibraon the piano you will
frequently hear a part of a chandelier, or a wine glass on the sideboard vibrate in sympathy with that particular note. This shows that the mass
tone of the glass is identical with that of the note upon the piano. In thought there is sympathetic
vibration also, and for this reason it is sometimes difficult to determine who is the real inventor of a
219
22O
thing.

For example
If
:
Who
then
was the inventor
of the
necessary to have all the controversy that occurred between him and those claiming it under Gray? Why was
telephone?
Bell,
why was
it
necessary to have a lawsuit and then to compromise their claims? Bell, Gray and Edison were
it
thinking along the same line, had become attached to a certain thought current and developed the same
ideas simultaneously. often hear the expression
We
"I got into a cer-
tain current of thought." To the careless thinker this expression means nothing in particular, but to the student of Occultism it means a great deal more
than a mere form of expression; for there are currents of thought in the great magnetic sea of consciousness in which we live, and we can and do attach ourselves either consciously or unconsciously
to different currents with definite results.
Picture to yourself for a moment this magnetic consciousness of which we are a part. It is pulsating with life and is capable of receiving and transmitting thought. In this great magnetic sea there
are thought currents as clearly defined as there are currents in the air or in the ocean. You know
there
is
a current in the ocean which
is
called the
Antarctic Drift and another called the Gulf Stream, etc. In Universal Mind there are currents of
thought which are as distinctly separate as are these two currents in the ocean; and it is as necessary that we should know about the one as that we should know about the other, because a man draws
Higher Occult or Spiritual Forces and
their Uses.
221
from the currents

or ideas as he
is
in Universal
Mind such thoughts
When you
eral line
and
we
sympathetically vibrating with. are thinking along the same genare in a current of thought, which is
I
one of those in the Universal Consciousness; and because your mind and mine are attached to this
current,
we
are for the time being receiving in
unison the same general ideas. Plagiarism may be often explained in this manner. Oliver Wendell Holmes wrote the poem, "Man Wants but Little
Here Below," and
after
it
was published
a friend
called his attention to the fact that
Adams had
written not only on the same theme, but had used the same similies and many of the same expressions,
many
years before; yet no one would think
of calling Doctor Holmes a plagiarist. By thinking along that line his mind had become attached to
the
in
same current
of thought that
Adams had been
when he expressed himself in a similar manner. Inventors often get into the same current of thought, and work along similar lines, and then
suddenly startle the public with inventions of a nature, each inventor declares himself the sole
like dis-
coverer of the thing invented. During the last two decades or more there has been no great discovery
made
of
physics that can be attributed to the mind one man, since several minds have conany tributed towards each and all the discoveries that have been made. Man draws from the Universal according to his mentality, and groups of men may
in
222
of Mind.
draw simultaneously the same
ideas from the
same
un-
currents of thought. These currents of thought are used by
men
consciously, semi-consciously and consciously. For example, a man desires to possess great wealth, and decides he will have it. He knows nothing about
the scientific use of mind, but puts certain natural laws into operation through his desire and decision to gain wealth. If he persists, wealth must come to him because he has set the law into operation which will bring it, but it may be a long time coming, because he does not understand how to use his mind Another man who has scientifically to hasten it. studied along the line of Mental Science and who
knows there
is
power
in the individual
mind
to de-
mand from
wealth."
the Universal Mind, says, "Give

persists in
me
fre-
He
making
his
demands
quently and earnestly and in time the wealth will come to him. He has used the law semi-consciously and will obtain what he demands more quickly than the first man. The Occultist knows that by making a mental image of wealth and by concentrating his thoughts upon it he has put into operation a law, and that through the magnetic cord
which connects him with
his creation he will
draw
to
himself the wealth he has created.
He
uses the law
consciously and therefore realizes his desires much sooner than the other two. To live is to use these currents of force either consciously or unconsciously, but men always attribute their successes to external causes until they learn something about
their Uses.
223
the laws which governs success. At this time many persons are using these Cosmic currents of force
for therapeutical purposes
of
and are performing cures Each mental processes. through bodily claims to cure through a system of healing different from the others; as witness Christian Scientist, Mental Scientist, New Thought Scientist, Faith Curer, Divine Healer, the priests of the Water of
ills
the
Spring of Lourdes, Magnetic Healer, HypIt
notists, etc.
makes no
difference
what the claims
of these respective schools may be, the phenomena of healing must be based on the same law. Jesus
knew
the nature and use of these Cosmic forces, and taught them to his disciples, who produced the
phenomena
called miracles
Apollonius of
Tyana and
through the use of them. his disciples performed
same manner; and before these the Essenes, Pythagoreans, Buddhists and Brahmins used these currents of force for the same
miracles and cures in the
purposes; and during the early Christian centuries and Middle Ages the Neo-Platonists, Mystics and Rosicrutians used them in their work with mankind. These currents are Spiritual Forces and are a part of the Universal Spirit or Mind. Spiritual force may be defined as motion generated by Divine Mind in contradistinction to motion generated by individual mind or by mechanical processes. You
remember the
in this
all important fact so often reiterated course of lectures that the sensitive etheric
is all
mind of the Universe

rounds
around
us, as air sur-
man
or as the ocean surrounds and sustains
224
of Mind.
it. Like the ocean, Divine always in motion. The ocean has its inherent motion due to the tides, and also its superficial or wave motion due to external causes such as wind, etc. Divine Mind has Its motion, per se, which are the currents within it, and these currents are superficially modified by the thoughts of men. An individual mind cannot permanently work against a Universal current nor misuse it any more than it can keep the tide in the Bay of Fundy from rising; but it can work along the right lines and
the fish which live in
Mind
is
make use of these great currents to its own advantage, and in this manner work with nature instead of against it. While it is true that force is one, yet force manion this planet under different aspects, and we will consider five of these as five forces or five great
fests
currents.
Remember,
all
force
is
one
force,
but
manifests at different rates of vibration according to the media through which it acts, and these different rates of vibration
we
will call, for convenience
sake, separate currents. Each of these five currents is subdivided into other currents, and each of these
sub-divisions, like the great currents, is separated from each other by a difference in their rates of
vibration, the same as the Gulf Stream is separated from the main body of water through which it
flows
by a difference in the rate of its vibrations. These Cosmic currents vibrate red, orange, green, blue and yellow, and may be pictured as vibratory currents of color. To illustrate them crudely we
their Uses.
225
may compare them with physical we are familiar. The rainbow, for
things with which
example. Imagine a great rainbow encircling the earth, and suppose it to be in motion and you will have an idea of
how these currents look as they encircle this planet, with each force representing one of the colors of the rainbow only instead of the alleged seven colors of the rainbow you will have five distinct colors. It is true that the real currents have been
partly or dimly seen by zodiacal lights, and the
men and are called the many colored Northern
Lights also give us glimpses of portions of these currents, which sweep round and permeate the earth in every part of it. The Cosmic currents sweep not
only over the surface of the ground, but through it, passing down on one side of the globe and up on the other side. They also sweep down and through one side of man and up on the other side, for man is but a small world, and so he and every portion of the world is touched by all these currents. Looking at them from the subjective side of life they appear as if a great number of ribbons of the five
different colors
were being waved up and down and

the earth as
if all
wound around and around
men
and living creatures were being entangled in them. Doubtless you have looked out over the hot pavements of a city in the month of August and have seen the heat vibrations rising from them in
wavering clouds. Imagine those grayish white heat vibrations to be of five different colors and you will have a very good picture of how the Cosmic forces
226
look.

Suppose
of Mind.
my hand
were
full of
ers of these different colors
and
ribbon streamshould shake
them rapidly before your eyes; some of you being the red and partially color blind would see only colors and two those see green ribbons, others might the see some would the blue, while yellow and Each three. person would see orange and the other for seeing, and it is the according to his capacity same with your ability to see and use the Cosmic You see and function in the color with forces. which you are connected by reason of your corresponding vibrations. The human mind is related
to these currents very much as a telegraph instrument is related to the telegraph wires. It may be attached to any wire and repeat all messages that over it. The human mind can attach itself to
pass the blue, the red, the yellow or the green current, as the case may be, and receive everything in that current, and it is through its power to tap the different currents that it is able to draw anything that it may desire from those currents. You may ask, "How can there be a Cosmic current that
we
cannot see or feel?"
attention to the fact that because

see a force
I must call your you do not feel or
You is no reason that it does not exist. cannot see free electricity and certain conditions must exist before you can see or feel it, yet you do not deny that it is a force and many of you are
You do not feel the Cosmic learning to use it. currents because the necessary conditions have not

been made to make you
feel
their Uses.
227
them.
If
you were
shut in a room where you could not feel the wind and it blew very hard outside, the conditions would not be right for you to feel it, and since it is a force
which cannot be seen you would not know that

existed.
it
The
first
color currents
thing to do to become conscious of these is to image or visualize them, and re-
member
that nothing
was ever imagined by mind
If you are and the blue has vibrating green begun to tinge the aura then blue and it will be visualize your drawn into you, since whatever you concentrate upon or image you must draw to yourself. If you have developed to the point of the blue vibration
that does not exist in the Universe.
tinged with the yellow then you can draw the yellow Cosmic current into yourself. And whenever you
draw to you a current that is vibrating than higher your predominating color you raise your
are able to
own
vibrations and receive
capable of assimilating
the good that you are from that current. These

all
mental pictures and concentration are the two instruments we utilize for the purpose of connecting ourselves with Cosmic currents which are constantly flowing around the earth.
you to image or visualize the you desire then secure a bit of ribbon of the proper shade, or a drapery of the color you want and look at it until you have the color impressed upon your mind. This will help you to visualize the Cosmic currents, and when you are concentrating
If it is difficult for
color
228
you should realize that they are currents of force, though you speak of them in terms of color. When the blue current is mentioned that force is meant which vibrates at a rate that makes it appear as blue. Electricity is a part of this current and when the proper mechanism is used to condense and conduct it, it manifests as blue to the physical eyes. Commencing with the red current we will study that first because it is lowest in the scale. Red vibrations in anything mean emotion of some sort.
In man it indicates that his animal nature is in the ascendency; in animals it is a perfectly natural vibration but can be stimulated by external suggestions to an ungovernable or furious extent. For ex-
ample; the bull or turkey gobbler are often driven into a frenzy of rage at sight of a red rag. This is because the color red makes a picture in the mind of the creature and by looking at that picture its mind becomes connected with the Universal current of red. Having "tapped" that force it draws into itself all that it can assimilate of that rate of vibration and is angry. Man, like the animal, sometimes uses the red current unconsciously and whenever he gets angry he connects himself with it whether conscious of it or not, and this is the reason he loses his self-control so quickly. As soon as he becomes enraged his aura changes to the vibration
red
then his aura is vibrating sympathetically with the red Cosmic current and the connection between
;
two is instantly made. The red current has been tapped, the man's aura is the conducting inthe
their Uses.
229
strument for that force and immediately the man becomes filled with that vibration. Self-control is swept away and he rages like a mad animal. He has connected himself with everybody in the world who is angry at that moment and he is functioning
in
He is receiving telepathically the ugly things that other angry people are thinking about, and he does things while in that condition which he had never before thought of
these vibrations.
all
doing. If he commits murder while in this angry condition the legal fraternity call him emotionally
insane and he escapes capital punishment by being incarcerated in an asylum for awhile. Red is a low,
disruptive, jagged vibration, and when it is drawn into a person it begins its disruptive work upon the physical body of that person, and all the good
creations which he has
made
are instantly repelled
not only are good things and good people repelled from him, but he attracts all the so-called evil manifestations and unless he recovers his mental poise and gets out of that red current nothing but misfortune will come until he is
from his aura.
And
swept out of his body. Anger demagnetizes the atoms which compose the physical body. There is a positive and a negative side to every atom as there is to every magnetic
thing in the world.
When we
we mean
speak of a body hav-
that to the negative ing magnetic polarity of one side stands the positive of the next and that to the negative of one atom stands the positive side
230
of another
atom
and when the body
is
demagne-
tized this relationship is destroyed. The higher forces of nature flow rhythmically over
these atoms
but
a
when
it
body
when they are magnetically polarized; the red current, which is repellant, enters demagnetizes the atoms and prepares a
condition for bacteria to enter and disease to follow.
by
Sometimes the body becomes instantly disrupted this demagnetizing force and apoplexy is caused.
times paralysis is produced because the red so great that the atoms which compose the nerves of the body become demagnetized and never
Many
force
is
afterwards regain their polarity. Different shades of the red compose the sub-currents of the great red current. The light shade, called scarlet, indicates anger; the darker shade, called crimson, indicates sex desire. Fear is indicated by a still darker
shade, which
is a red-brown and which sometimes deepens to almost a brown-black, and the sense gratification is represented by a shade of wine color.
The
Occultist uses this red current solely for the
purpose of restoring the sex functions in a person who has become depleted and who desires to use his powers solely in a creative manner. The black magicians use the red current for the purpose of destruction, for that force can be utilized to destroy and it can also be used to precipitate anything
it.
upon the material plane which floats or lives within In Black Magic it is used for producing pests, plagues and all kinds of diseases. The White
Magician can use
it
when
the law requires or
when
their Uses. 231
mankind may be helped thereby, as Moses the Occultist and the Egyptian magicians used it when Egypt was made to suffer for her sins.
The orange
that lives
current or force
this earth.
is
used by everything
current and
upon
It is the life
sustains every plant and animal body that exists. Every creature that breathes inhales it with the at-
mosphere, and things that do not have lung capacity absorb this great force through their bodies as sponges absorb water or moisture. If an animal becomes ill it immediately goes out into the sunlight and breathes deeply of this orange force and if permitted to remain in the sunshine and all drugs, such as our sometimes unwise veterinary surgeons give to animals, are withheld the creature will get
well.
The
animals,
who
uses this life force in treating children and undeveloped persons have not reached the point in their evolution
Occultist
young
where they vibrate green. He also uses it in stimulating the growth of plants. The Indian Yogi puts a seed into the earth and then condenses this orange
force into it with such intensity that while you stand looking at him the plant is forced out of the soil, comes to maturity and bears fruit before your
eyes. This wonderful feat is imitated by sleight of hand performers and by hypnotists who deceive people into believing they see it done. But there are men who can and do produce this phenomenon and it is done by using the orange current in the manner I have described.
232

is
of Mind.
It also
Green
the current of individualization.
represents selfishness both in its higher and its lower forms. Manifesting in this great current is all desire for personal possessions, distinctions and individual aggrandizement. It is the current of intel*lectualization without intuition. There are many
people who have a great deal of book learning, whose objective minds are trained and who are intellectual, and their memory of facts and alleged facts is wonderful; but their subjective minds may be altogether undeveloped and yet these persons
pass for very wise individuals. They vibrate green and have but little or no real knowledge. For ex-
ample, a lawyer
the State of
may know
thoroughly the laws of
and may know exactly what decision has been given in a similar case to any proposition you may submit to him but to-morrow the legislature may meet and do away with all the old statutes and pass a new set of laws and the lawyer's knowledge would be legislated out of existence. There may be what we call intellectualization of a very high order and yet it does not rise above the green current.
;
New York
Selfishness in its lowest aspect is in a subcurrent and belongs in the shade called bottle-
green.
tinction
The
and for aggrandizement

see in the
desire for personal possessions, for disis the color of the
grass
we
Autumn,
is
a very pronounced
shade, but not so dark as the bottle-green. Intellectualization without intuition is a still lighter
their Uses.
233
shade and a wise individualization without ness is of the shade called pastel-green.
selfish-
Individualization manifests as the green vibration everywhere in the Universe and when you look out
into the heavens at night and see a star sending forth a green light you may know that it, like our earth,
is
and
passing through the period of individualization, like our own world, is the fourth planet in a
chain of seven.
The
planet of individualization
is
where Men or Minds become self-dependent, independent, self-reliant. The grass and foliage upon our earth is green because in the vegetable kingdom Universal Consciousness is making an effort to individualize. The keynote of our world is Fa, which corresponds to the green color and which produces Animal souls are of this color it by its vibration.
at birth, but soon take the deeper color red when their bodies become strong enough to express desire
for pro-creation.
As man develops and becomes more and more individualized he vibrates green in
proportion to his development. The Occultist uses this color to create for himself
and for others wealth, honor, position and every material thing that can be desired. Suppose he desires to make a material creation, he would concentrate
his entire
upon the green current until every part of being was vibrating green or until he had
his connection
connected himself with this current. After making he would select the sub-current he desired and in that make the mental picture of the thing to be created. Suppose he wanted some
234
of Mind.
money, he would know that the financial current, which is a part of the green current, was the one to use. After making his connection and the picture of the amount he wants he will no longer think of the
color current, but will put
all
his
force in con-
centrating upon his creation, and the Great Consciousness will bring his creation to him out of this green current. The Occultist gets quicker results
than unconscious users of this law because he does not waste his force, but goes directly and scientifically to work. He knows what he wants and how to
get
it
his efforts,
and there is no uncertainty or indecision and as a consequence no delay.
in
to
In cases of nervousness, the Occultist uses green individualize and strengthen the nerves, and
this vibration into the
when he draws
which give new
body
of a
patient he brings in
life.
new
materials and
new atoms
For failing eyesight and most the proper current to use since the optic nerves are revitalized and individualized by its strengthening vibrations. The Occultist also
eye troubles, green
is
uses this current as an antidote for altruism.
There
life every he must be an Atlas and go about carrying the world on his back. He wants to bear everybody's sorrows and thinks it a great privilege to give away everything he has in the world. He becomes a devout believer in poverty and piety and sometimes goes so far as to study the pictures of Jesus of Nazareth and of the martyrs and trims his beard to look like theirs, that he may
comes a time
in the career of
man
in
some
when he
feels that

look the
life
their Uses.
235
of sacrifice he tries to live.
He
dissi-
pates himself mentally, physically and financially and sooner or later nervous prostration if not star-
vation claims his body, and he goes out upon the next plane of consciousness. For such a person
to a
the Occultist uses the green current to restore normal condition of individualization.
him
taught never to give more of anything than his surplus, and never to assume the burdens of another, for by so doing he would be robbing that other of the experience he came into this world to get. In every walk of life we see people who have assumed burdens that do not belong to them and who are crying aloud to Deity for help and are demanding to know why such burdens should be laid upon their shoulders. God never
Occultist
is
The
laid
upon any
of
His children anything that was
greater than they could bear; and
when we
find
our accumulations of sorrow and care becoming too great to endure, it is time to examine the bundle and see if we have not taken something that does not belong to us, for a mistaken sense of duty often
leads us into as great difficulties as a real duty does. The color blue represents all the higher mental
In the sub-currents are literature, music, the art, higher education, organization, order, form, harmony, etc. This force can never be used by
qualities.
animals, but only by the subjective mind of man. All inspiration along any line of thought is due to
the inflow of this blue current of which
men
are
many
times entirely unconscious.
Artists in any
236
of Mind.
line express greater things
than are in their
own
minds
"He
to express. often hear it said of another, taught better than he knew." This kind of
We
work has been
called inspirational, but the real source of inspiration has never been understood or One man believes the soul of his deexplained.
parted wife inspired him to write the burning lines of verse that made him famous. Another thinks an
old Master stood behind
him while he knelt and
in the deepest reverence painted his best picture.
The
alone can hear and he
musician's soul thrills with the melody that he tells you in a whisper that
the angels came, while he sat alone, and played such symphonies as were never heard on earth before and that in his poor, stumbling way he had
them on his instrument. And he had been unconsciously connected through concentration with the blue Cosmic current and had received from it a few of the gems
tried to reproduce none of these knew
that are stored therein.
Suppose you desire to be a musician; the indigo is the one you should connect All with. great composers have taken their yourself this current and it was according from inspiration
blue sub-current
to each one's capacity to draw into himself this force and listen to "the music of the spheres," that made him the musician that he was. The musical
currents run from the deep indigo blue to the sky blue, but no one known to the world has yet been
able to reach the highest sub-current and to bring from it the music that lies there. That soul is yet

to
their Uses.
337
be the gift of the twentieth century to the world. But each and everyone can draw inspiration to himself that will enable him to understand, to interpret, to execute and to compose music
will
come and
according to his own development. The sub-current for literature is a light blue the blue we see in the Autumn sky. Anyone can write if he will be persistent enough to become a good grammarian, master the technicalities of rhetoric and learn to tap the universal current in which the
gems
of this art are stored.
In each
human
soul
lies latent
which is and sub-currents to become perfect

;
the ability to learn every art and science known and by aid of these great currents
in his
knowledge
of
all.
The
storing
Occultist uses the blue current also for re-
harmony and health
to persons
who
are be-
ginning to have a tinge of blue
Persons
passing
tive
who
beyond the green. vibrate between the blue and green are
development from where the objectentire dominion over the subjective, but shares with it the honors of controlling the body and its mundane affairs. Yellow is the highest color vibration upon this It is planet and is therefore the greatest force. Spiritual and Creative Love. It is Wisdom, Intuition, Divine Harmony and is the highest aspect of
in their
mind no longer has
time.
Deity that we are capable of understanding at this It embraces all the spiritual qualities we can conceive, and I regret to say that man does not possess very many of them as yet. To acquire this
238
force
The History and Poiver
of Mind.
subjective mind controls the
develop to the point where the objective, and when he can attach himself to the yellow Cosmic current he can accomplish anything he may undertake to do upon this planet. An undeveloped person cannot use the yellow current of force because it is a vibration so
man must
much higher than
his
own
that there
it
is
no
it.
sympathy between him and
it;
and
can be used
to help only such persons as are in
sympathy with
In using the Cosmic currents for healing, the Occultist takes the left hand of the patient in his
right hand, and after drawing into himself the current he desires to use he passes it out through his
right
hand
into the left side of his patient.
The
being the receptive side, the patient receives this force without difficulty; and it passes down his left side and up the right and round and over and through his body until every nerve and
left side,
fiber of his
body
is
soothed and relaxed by this won;
derful divine force.
how
for,
to use
A knowledge of these forces and them gives one almost unlimited power
will alone
where the human
and unaided
is
un-
able to accomplish its purpose, it can by putting into operation these universal forces have Omnipotence
working with
it,
making an assured success
of
its
every undertaking.
LECTURE ELEVEN.
THE CAUSE AND CURE OF

Disease
is
DISEASE.
and
as the
name
indicates, dis-ease,
means an absence
ing, according to
of ease.
Pathologically speak-
one of the definitions of the Century Dictionary, disease is a "deviation from the healthy or normal condition of any of the functions or tissues of the body," and therefore it is necessary to ascertain what the normal condition of the body
is
before
we may know when
it is
in
a diseased or
abnormal condition, and to know this we must learn how the body is builded. Starting with its lowest aspect we find that the
physical body is made up of a great number of little individual lives which the modern physicist calls
atoms.
These atoms group and form what
is
called
molecules.
number
together form called a cell and the grouping together of a number of cells forms an organ, tissue, muscle, etc., and a combination of the necessary muscles, tissues,
organs, bones and fluids, forms a mass or body which has a common rate of vibration and a shape. Did you ever stop to think why your physical should not your arm fly body holds its form ?
of these molecules grouped a complex individual life which is
Why
space in one direction while a foot goes in another direction ? It is because there is a dominant
off into
239
24
mass vibration which holds together the different portions of the body responding to it. The earth is held together by the law of gravitation; there is a mass tone which holds its component parts together as one, and so long as that vibratory force continues
to play
upon
this planet there
can never be a disin-
tegration of it. In the same way each person has his own personal law of gravitation or mass vibra-
which holds all the parts of his body together. This magnetic force, personal law of gravitation or mass vibration of the body, is the vibration of the objective mind which ensouls it. Its normal color should be green, but the development of the man determines the color at any time in his evolution; and in the earlier stages of his development, when his desires and passions are dominant, his vibrations drop lower than the green and he becomes a dirty brown.
tion
The objective mind gives the physical body its shape, and it is because of the presence of the mind in the body that the particles, which come from all
sources to make up the magnetic sphere, group themselves into the form of the physical man. You have placed a horse-shoe magnet over a quantity of steel filings and have seen them rush together and crowd themselves around the magnet, taking its form. The atoms, like the steel filings, are drawn to the magnet mind and though they come from
earth, air, food
the position they occupy the objective mind.
and water they are held together in by the mass vibration of
The Cause and Cure of
Disease.
241
While there is a mass vibration, still each organ has an individual modification of this vibration, otherwise it could not be an organ separate and distinct from the rest of the body; and while each organ responds as it were to the dominant tone it
also has its sub-tone.
In the
liver,
for example,
the orange life force which has drawn toall the particles which compose that organ. gether The blood passing through the liver has a tendency
there
is
modify the orange vibrations with its own, which The dominant note of the objective mind, which is green, holds together this mass of red and orange vibrations because it is higher and therefore stronger, and you have the three colors blended together in a mass of mixed vibrations which make brown. The color of the liver seen subjectively
to
is
red.
looks very much as it does objectively. When the vibration of the objective
mind
is
the
controlling or dominant vibration of all the organs of the physical body then it is in a normal or healthy
condition. Disease is the lowering, below the normal, of the vibrations of a part or of all the body except in cases of disruption or misplacement of
bones or other parts of the body.
we
will take the liver again,
For illustration which has its own
separate organic, complex existence by reason of its Its cells are held together by the construction. orange organic vibration, yet these vibrations are
modified and controlled by the higher mass vibration of the objective mind; now suppose the liver instead of responding to the higher mass vibrations,
242
of Mind.
gradually begins to lose them and takes a lower rate of vibration, then you have what is called a torpid
liver.
Diseases manifest in one of two general ways. where the vibration of an organ is itself lowered and it manifests disharmony within itself; and
First,
second, where the vibration of an organ
is
lowered
becomes demagnetized sufficiently to permit foreign atoms to enter and set up an independent acand
it
tion.
The first condition, if it be not corrected, will cause disintegration or disruption of the entire organ the second condition results in great relaxation with large interstices between the atoms, where foreign elements enter and set up a disharmonious sep;
arate organization, as for example in tuberculosis, cancer or tumor.
Occultism teaches that

in
all
disease has
its
root or
origin ignorance. The reason persons do not have long lives is because they do not know how to
live.
It is
thews and others think that
reported that Professor Loeb, Dr. Matif we could discover
the proper electrical conditions we could prolong the human life to more than two hundred years. It is said by physicists that most animals live about
five
times as long as
is
required for them to mature.

to live to be at
five
Applying least one hundred and
this rule to
man he ought
years old.
That he does not live to this age is because he does not understand the laws of life and the real nature of disease. He knows nothing about controlling the atoms which compose his body nor how to use the Cosmic
The Cause and Cure

forces with
of Disease.
243
constantly surrounded for the purpose of revivifying his physical body. "The wages of sin (ignorance) is death," and disease is
which he
is
the result of mental conditions.
For example, take a common cold. In ninetynine cases out of one hundred, colds are contracted when people are mentally negative. The mind, instead of being positive, instead of dominating its physical particles and holding them contracted into a proper shape, becomes relaxed and negative and As a consequence, the body reloses its force.
sponds to this relaxed condition, the molecules become abnormally separated, and foreign elements enter, and set up an independent activity of their own. The cause was mental relaxation, or negativeness.
Why
does a piece of glass receive the impression
from the point of a diamond when the diamond will not receive an impression from the glass? Because the diamond is of a quick, positive, high rate of vibration, while the glass is negative and of a much slower rate than the diamond. The glass
cannot enter the interstices of the diamond because of its intense vibration. Thus it is with the
mind that is positive and strong; it can dominate and control its body so well that foreign destructive elements cannot enter into
it.
Some
diseases can be traced back to the mental
condition which produced them and some cannot. Many cases of heart trouble are directly traceable
to fear.
The mind working upon
the body, causes
244
an irregular flow of blood; the fear, with its concomitant heart disturbance, commences a vibration of an abnormal rate, and soon that condition, which, in the beginning was a functional trouble, becomes organic disease. Many fevers are due to fear. The first thing you should do for a patient who is suffering with fever is to take away his fear, and his
temperature will drop degrees at a time. The cause of congestion of different organs of the body can often be traced back to a violent paroxysm of anProfessor Elmer Gates, of Washington, D. ger. C, has found that a large number of acids and poisons in the blood are created by the direct action of the mind. Sometimes the mental cause cannot be traced, because there have been several different mental con-
which combined to produce the material Then, too, a disease is often produced menand before it appears physically other mental tally, conditions have arisen which prevents its being
ditions
result.
traced to
Occultism goes so far its original cause. as to declare that even the so-called hereditary diseases are due to the mental condition of the suf-
ferer,
because
it
is
the mental condition or quality
of the
mind during a previous incarnation, which brought him into that particular family, and compelled him to take the diseased body at birth. Disease may be divided into two classes, the
real. Imaginary disease is a picheld ture firmly by the objective mind, which causes This kind less physical correspondence. or more
imaginary and the
Disease.
245
of disease is often created in total disregard of the laws governing anatomy or physiology; and is the hardest to cure, because persons possessed of it hold to it so persistently that an entire revision of their mode of thought must be made before it can be cured. It is not at all infrequent to have a
patient complain of kidney disease, locating the pain and the organs several inches below the waist
line.
The
spleen
is
often supposed to be on the

all
right side of the body,
and disappear.
held
But
and phantom tumors appear these mental pictures, if

matrices
that
long
enough,
create
or
vortices,
and draw into them the elements that

finally the actual
will bring
disease
was
at first purely
imaginary.
and gases
organ,
it
in
For example: Sometimes indigestion the stomach cause a distention of that
heart region, presses up against the functional of a disturbance the heart, and causing the patient becomes convinced that he has organic heart disease. This picture in the patient's mind
the matrix, and his fear of the disease draws it to him in course of time. If the mind holds the
is
picture of anything long enough, whether it be disease or health, poverty or prosperity, that picture must and will materialize. You who have
followed Charcot's experiments need no further proof of the action of the mind upon the body. The second class or real disease, produced pri-
marily by mental causes, and often supplemented by a proximate physical cause, must be cured by conAnd in this connectrolling the imaging faculty.
246
tion let
it
of Mind.
be understood that the words "cure" and
"heal" are used as popularly understood, and will

sense, as
be used interchangeably not in any specialized some modern metaphysicians use them.
cure real disease
is
To
to restore to a
normal con-
dition the functions or tissues of the body, and to do this the vibrations of the affected part must
be raised to their normal rate. In cases of misplacement, dislocation, or broken bones, the quickest way to obtain relief is to send for a competent physician or an anatomist and have an adjustment made of the injured member or organ. In cases of disruption of blood vessels, or muscles, a surgeon's aid should be immediately sought; not because mind is unable to cure any or all of these cases, but because of the fact that at the present
time, even
among educated
people,
mind
is
many
times impotent through misuse or non-use. Mental treatments should follow these physical treatments in order to obviate unnecessary suffering
and to obtain rapid recovery.

In cases where the vibrations of a part of the body have been lowered, or where foreign particles have entered, there are several material meth-
ods of restoring health or harmony to the affected

of these is stimulation by physical main the practice of Osteopathy; anas nipulation, other is stimulation through electrical appliances. Neither of these methods, however, reach the
parts.
One
mental cause for the disease, and even though the physical disturbance be removed through either
The Cause and Cure

method,
it
of Disease.
247
it can be only a question of time before reappears. The electric current is a part of the Cosmic blue current, and by intelligent use it may be made to raise the vibrations of an affected part
and restore
it
it to its normal condition; unaided by can mind, only remove the effects, and never the cause of the disease. The time is not far distant
when
the
two great therapeutical agencies
for heal-
ing the sick will be electricity, representing the material school, and mind, representing the metaphysical school.
A third means of curing disease is by properly prepared non-poisonous vegetable compounds. The Occultist does not believe in the use of mineral drugs, nor does he believe that poisons should be
administered to a patient. Most minerals and poisons are of such a low rate of vibration that when
introduced into the physical body they serve to lower its vibrations rather than to raise them. Though they stimulate temporarily, the refinally
action leaves the patient in a worse condition. Poisons sometimes appear to effect a cure because upon
their administration the acute
;
form of the disease
disappears but even a close study of effects teaches us that the disease was not cured its expression was changed, but it soon appeared in another form and
;
place,
nate
and a new name had to be invented to desigfrom the old one. To deny that drugs have an effect upon the human body, as do some of the
it
radical metaphysicians at the present time,
is
to
248
deny and ignore the observations of daily life, and also the law of physics, which asserts that two or
more bodies coming into juxtaposition mutually and also excludes consciousness from a part of the Universe. Yet these same metaaffect each other;
physicians eat food to sustain their physical bodies, while denying that matter affects matter.
The mineral kingdom supports
the
vegetable
kingdom, and the latter supports the animal kingdom; and according to the natural order of things, it is unreasonable to pass over and ignore as impotent the very kingdom that supplies our food, and
to
go among the minerals
for our medicines.
The
vegetables used for remedies must be properly and scientifically compounded, however, if the best results are to
be had from their use; but the same
also be observed with the preparation of our food. In Materia Medica there is never an
care
must
allowance made for a difference

of persons
in the vibrations
who
ing green would a physician that one would receive who was vibrating red or brown. This is the reason modern medi-
are being treated. man vibratreceive the same prescription from
what it is called, an experimental science. a vegetable remedy has been suitably compounded for an individual according to his vibrations, a cure will be effected by that remedy. When the same medicine, if it were given to another percine
is
When
son suffering from the same disease, but whose
vi-
brations were of a totally different rate or color, would have a different effect. The vibrations of
Disease.
249
the vegetable remedies must supplement the lowered vibrations of the person using them, if good
results are to
Let
it
be had. be understood, however, that Occultism
teaches that mind is the supreme power, and, when properly developed and trained, can cure all diseases, and that in the course of time it will be the
only force that man will use to keep the human in a normal, healthy and harmonious condition. But until that Arcadian time shall come, it is not well to deny that the Great Consciousness has also provided for Its undeveloped children ma-
body
terial
ways and means
for their relief
from physi-
cal
ills.
is
In curing disease by the power of mind there the conscious and the unconscious use of the
forces. All the modern metaphysical schools somewhat among themselves in regard to the process by which cures are performed, yet all perform some remarkable ones. Some schools
Cosmic
differ
use strenuous denials, and, consciously or unconsciously, hypnotize their patients, and while the patients are in this condition change their thought,
and
in
this
manner change the manifestation
of
the disease they are suffering from.
Other schools,
through repeated suggestion, cause the patient to accept a new line of thought, and with the change of thought the body changes. In both these classes
of cases
it
is
the direct action of
mind upon mind
which brings about the change

the patients.
in the condition of
250
Other schools, through denials and affirmations,

or through affirmations and demand, petition or prayer, and through picturing the desired result,
unconsciously put into operation the Cosmic forces. The Occult school uses consciously the Cosmic
forces for the purpose of healing. In the two lastnamed schools there is not only the action of mind
upon mind, but new elements are drawn into the physical body of the patient, whereby the old, diseased atoms are cast out and new ones are left in
their places.
There are three things that the Occultist attempts making a cure through mental means. First, he destroys the mental picture of disease which his patient holds as a matrix; second, he raises the vibrations of that portion of the body which has become lowered, and makes it vibrate normally, thus forcing out all foreign elements and third, he supto do in
;
plements the elements driven out with new elements, which are introduced into the system by the Cosmic force flowing through it. Here are a few rules that may be helpful to you It is well in demonstrating over disease: First. to avoid seeing the manifestation of the disease, if
possible.
By doing this you will not have the picture of disease constantly in mind and will be able to see more clearly the picture of perfect health you must create for the patient. If you do not see the objective
symptoms
it
of an ugly
growth,
is
easier to
make a
wound, or an artificial perfect image and
The Cause and Cure
of Disease.
251
to present that picture to the mind of the patient. In cases where there are only subjective symptoms, never let your sympathies go out to the patient, but hold yourself positive against any emotion of fear which he may have. The moment your own emotions become joined with his, your power to destroy his mental pictures of disease is weakened you have then accepted his creations and are but accentuating the pictures in his mind.
;
Second.
When you
have learned from the patient
what
his creations are,
you are able to destroy them
by denying their permanency, if they exist temporarily, or by denying them absolutely if they are
imaginary. After making your denials, follow them with affirmations of that which is true; create a perfect
physical condition for your patient, and hold that thought picture till he himself accepts it. Should
a patient come to you claiming heart disease, when the physical disturbance was nothing but indigeshis claim audibly lest he be ofnot necessary to give a patient a diagnosis of his actual condition, because sometimes this would but intensify his fears. In actual disease deny its permanency and affirm
tion,
do not deny
It is
fended.
For example, in case of a cold, deny its permanency and declare positiveness for the patient, and as his vibrations are raised, direct the Cosmic
health.
force through his body. As his relaxed condition is corrected and the interstices between the atoms
grow
smaller, the foreign elements
become crowded
252
out or expelled from the system; and under this treatment every part of the body will respond to the positive condition of your mind. Denials destroy ; affirmations create.
The
Christian Scientists,
and many Mental Scientists use denials largely and sometimes exclusively, while the New Thought SciIt is urged by this last-named class of healers that the denial is contained in the affirmation; but to mentally affirm a healthy condition without denying or destroying the
entists use affirmations alone.
pictures of disease held by the patient, is like attempting to build a new house on a site already
occupied by another building without first clearing the ground. You could take out an old brick and put a new one in its place till the new house was
built
it
;
but
it
would require a much longer time than
would
Third.
to tear
down
the old structure
first.
In ordinary treatment, take the left hand of your patient with your right hand, that the Cosmic Force may enter your left side and pass out at your right, or positive side, into the left, or receptive side, of the patient. You should remain in a positive condition of
mind
while treating in this manner, or your own personal magnetism or life force will be drawn from you with the Cosmic Force into the patient. Fourth. In a case of depleted mental condition
of a patient, in epilepsy,
trouble, place your right

patient's
insanity, and in hand upon the top
spinal of the
head while giving the treatment.
This
The Cause and Cure
of Disease.
253
position throws the current where it is most needed, and the results will be more nearly immediate.
In cases of cancers, tumors, boils, swellany kind of separate growth, cover the affected part with a white silk handkerchief, and then
Fifth.
ings, or
place your right hand over
it
while giving the treat-
ment.
First, by object in doing this is twofold. the with the handkerchief, you do covering growth
The
not see
it
in its place
and are better able to picture perfection and second, by placing your hand upon
;
the affected part you bring the current of force directly into it, and this conserves force.
Sixth.
treating.
Keep your
left
hand
off the patient
when
Otherwise you form a complete circuit with him, and as the new life goes into him through his left hand or side, you draw his old, worn-out or demagnetized atoms into yourself, thereby lowering your own rate of vibration, and bringing a physical condition upon yourself similar to that which you are
trying to relieve. Seventh. In separate growths, use the highest shade of the particular Cosmic Force or color you
have selected to use for your patient. Suppose you desire to use green then treat with the ultra ray of green, because that is the highest rate of vibration of that color and will bring the quickest results. Herein lies the great success of the Occultist over the majority of healers, and over those who use mechanical processes. When
;
254
of Mind.
the X-ray which is now known to be one of the higher shades of green is thrown upon an individualized
immediately commences its disand much better results are obruptive process, tained than with the knife. Its limitation is like
growth,
it
;
that of surgery, in that it does not reach the blood consequently, if the germs are through the blood
of the patient, there will be a return of the disease. But if the healer places his hand over the affected
part and uses the ultra shade of the Cosmic color selected, and directs the current through the entire
system, the germs will be destroyed, and a return of the disease will be impossible. Eighth. Concentrate on the aura of the patient
to get his predominate color, and then ask of the Universal Consciousness that the color may be made
known
to you.
This should be done in case you are not clairvoyant, and do not see Cosmic colors at will. Through
this practice you will learn to sense the color or vibration of a person as you sense his character.
Ninth.
Demand
of Deity that
you may be used
as an instrument for It to manifest through. This demand, like any other, must, and will be,
met, because whatever
is
held in mind constantly
If you desire to and to relieve sick, suffering, that thought in your mind makes of you that kind of a center, and if you are honest and faithful all the healing powers in the Universe will flow in order that through you your demands may be
must sooner or
later materialize.
be a healer of the
The Cause and Cure of Disease.

fulfilled.
255
It is
the mental condition which draws
or repels Cosmic Force, and the better life you live, the purer your thoughts, and the higher your aspirations, the
more perfectly can Cosmic forces be used by you to restore health to others. Tenth. Always treat yourself for positiveness
before treating a patient.
According to your own positiveness can you be a channel or center through which Cosmic forces
can flow. Declare mentally something like this: "Divine Force is made manifest in me. I am posiI have the power to detive, positive, positive.
This declaration stroy sickness and ignorance." will raise your own vibrations and make you a better instrument.
If
you are not

is
positive,
your own
animal magnetism
dition.
your patient, and Another
likely to pass from you to you will be left in a depleted conreason for becoming positive be-
fore
commencing
to treat a patient
is
that you
may
not take upon yourself the pains or disease from your patient, as so many metaphysicians do. Eleventh. Always use the color, or shade of the
next higher in the scale of vibration than the predominating color of your patient. Suppose you are going to treat a person who vibrates in the higher shade of green. Then use the blue Cosmic Force, which he must respond to,
color,
but which he will react from. But by using a color higher than his normal one, you raise his vibrations
and when the reaction comes he
will not
go
256
of Mind.
below the highest shades of his own color; and the relief he receives will be permanent. Twelfth. Realize that these Cosmic forces are
manifesting as vibrations or color.
Do
not think of
them as
color merely.
predominant in them, picture them as sparkling vibrations flowing into you, and through you into your patient.
Thirteenth.
aid to the treatment
Let their force aspect be your mind and when treating with
Use suggestion by color.
as a supplemental
it for the purpose of destroying in the mind your patient the picture of disease, and for creating a new picture of health. For example First get the full name of your patient, and then call him mentally by that name until you feel you have his attention. Remember, everyone must receive every thought that is repeatedly sent to him whether he
Use
of
accepts it or not is another matter. If your patient has a pet name, one that he hears most at home,
use that until he

say.
is
We will suppose he
listening to what you have to is called Jim Smith. You
should say, "Jim Smith, you are mind, and, being mind, you cannot be diseased." Immediately you
have made a distinction in the patient's mind between his mind himself and his body; and now you have his mind working with you to establish the physical condition you desire. Then say "Your body is constantly changing, but you are mind, and
:
new
can control your body; you can draw new atoms, life into yourself, and health can be restored."
Suggest the power to control and to bring health.
The Cause and Cure
of Disease.
257
With every treatment say: "You have no fear of disease because you know you are getting well."
It is best to repeat each of these suggestions slowly several times in order that the patient may grasp them fully, and when you have removed the demag-
netizing low vibrations of fear, the higher vibrations of health will flow into the patient. Destroy fear
and
feverish conditions disappear. Suppose the Fear that patient has consumption of the lungs. he has an incurable disease is the first thing to reall
of perfect lungs with
mind then image for him the picture the Cosmic Force flowing them and use such through suggestions, denials and
his
;
move from
affirmations as your intuition directs. Fifteenth. Use as few words as possible to ex-
press your thoughts.
The more clearly and concisely your ideas are expressed the more easily will they be impressed upon the mind of the patient. Instead of saying: "God
is
love and you are a manifestation of His idea and
therefore cannot express anything but love," and instead of giving a philosophical explanation of the
between God and the patient, and showwill answer his prayers for help and health, say something short and decisive, such as "you are not afraid of this disorder; you cannot be
relationship
ing
how God
afraid,
because
it is
nothing to
fear.
You
are get-
ting well.
You
are
mind and can control your
body."
These are a few of the rules and suggestions which may be used in successful mind healing.
258
There are others, but I am now trying to show you those which exemplify the laws which underlie the phenomena of healing. There is a law which lies
behind form and
if
you understand and
practice
these suggestions I have made, you can gradually change the rates of vibration of your body and also
its
desire.
to
until you can make it precisely what you Through this practice will come the power help others, for with every effort you will grow
form
stronger.
By attending a course of twelve lectures on harmony you will not become a great musician, but you may in those lectures be taught how to study and how to practice. It is by diligent practice that
a proficiency in anything can be attained, and so it is with Occultism. It is the regular mental practice, the use of Cosmic forces, the imaging, the controlling, the directing, the thinking that make you
Having given you the rules it remains with this knowledge shall be purely intelwhether you lectual or whether you will make practical use of it.
strong.
LECTURE TWELVE.
THE LAW OF OPULENCE.

In the preceding lectures you were taught
to acquire spiritual perception and through the use of Cosmic forces.
how
mental qualities You have also been taught how, by the power of Divine Mind, to use your mental forces, not only for your own benefit, but for the benefit of others and now, having learned something about the spiritual and men;
planes of being we shall take into consideration the third and last plane. This is where man acquires or fails to acquire an abundance of wordly
tal
goods, and where he must understand something about the law of Opulence if he is to succeed. Since
many
wealth
persons believe the possession of material is as essential to happiness as is the posses-
sion of perfect health,
and since there are no
acci-
dents in the world and every detail of our lives is governed by law, it seems absolutely necessary that we should thoroughly understand the law governing
Opulence, so that
we may
control our finances in-
stead of becoming victims of circumstances. If you have not possessions then it is because you have not used the law of Opulence for your own
benefit.
It is a
well
known
fact in
Occultism that
everyone has
is
just what he deserves, and this as true relative to Opulence as it is to spiritual
now
26o
and mental qualities. But before we discuss the law of Opulence in itself let us consider certain other aspects of the law of evolution which may have a bearing on what I shall say later. If you have studied the creatures in the animal kingdom you know how a mother bird will work
to feed her
young
until
it
when
the time has
come
reaches a certain age, but for each little bird to work
for his individual self, she
crowds them
all
out of the
nest and throws each one upon his own responsiOther animals are devoted to the care of bility.
their
desert
young until they reach a certain age and then them or quarrel with and drive them away to
wise
learn independence and to act for themselves. man gives to his child a proper education and
training during the years when its character is forming; but when it reaches its majority he sends
it if
forth to
it
is
to
assume the responsibility it must assume become individualized. And the great
Mother, for the
Universal Consciousness, Fatherfirst
half of the evolutionary period on a planet, stands behind man as the evolutionary impulse
to the point
pushing him onward in his career until he develops where he becomes self-reliant. Then this impulse is withdrawn and from that time on
man must
develop through his own inherent force, and through a knowledge of the laws of nature and
their uses.
According to the Occultist's estimate the
first
half of the cycle on this planet was reached in 1898; Beat that time the childhood of the race ended.
The
Law
of Opulence.
261
fore that the evolutionary law provided for Its children, but since that date the Cosmic Consciousness
has been gradually relaxing Its effort, and henceforth each individual must learn to rely upon his own strength and knowledge of law for his success
in life.
is
This may seem cruel at first thought, but it really kind and just, because it gives each man an
opportunity to develop his best qualities.
importance that we who represent principles somewhat in advance of the race should realize that all things are governed by law and that not one of the least of these is the law of Opulence. Deity does not give attributes or things to us because we are good. It does not give opulence as a reward for Spiritual acquirement; but if
It is of the greatest
we want
Spiritual qualities
we must
use certain
laws to receive spiritual things, and if we want material things we must use the laws which govern the distribution of them. In the first part of the period which ended in 1898
the old Adamic curse was upon humanity. "In the sweat of thy face shalt thou eat bread." But as the race advanced in evolution some men came from under that curse and were able consciously or unconsciously to use the laws of nature for their indi-
vidual benefit.
by thinking and planning they were not obliged to earn bread by hard manual labor, but could assume the relationship of employer to other men and have the work done by those who had not the faculty for planning
They found
that
262

In this manner there arose between
and managing.
men
of employer and employe. Please do not understand me to say that the employer, the thinker, ceased working when he laid
the
relationship
down
his tools
and became the manager
of his
own
business, because I do not wish to be so understood.
Cessation from work means retrogression; and retrogression soon becomes degeneration and stagnation. Stagnation whether it be spiritual, mental or material causes death. The great Consciousness
Itself works during each Cosmic Day and each and every child of God who desires to progress must also work. A great mistake most people make is in limiting
the
meaning
of the
labor.
effort.
Work Man
word "work," to purely physical does not necessarily mean physical is mind, and mental strength and
growth can come only through the exercise of his mental powers. The misapprehensions of the meaning of the Scriptural quotation, and of the laws of life and the law of opulence are due to the misconception of the meaning of the word "work." Last year when these lectures were first delivered several
persons said, "It is very wrong to teach that you can draw material things to yourself by the use of
work
mental forces; you should teach that people must for what they get." It is obvious that these cautious souls have not developed beyond the physical plane and are unable to appreciate the fact that there may be mental as
well as physical labor.
Then
there are other persons
The
Law
of Opulence.
263
not desire to use Spiritual forces to draw to themselves material things and therefore protest against teaching this knowledge. It is quite reasonable to suppose that such persons find it difficult to manipulate spiritual forces and because they do not understand how to use them, they object to others using them. To such persons I have nothing to offer except good wishes for their progress along the
who do
development they have chosen. Man's evolution has enlarged the meaning of the word "work," and we now say, "In the sweat of thy face or through mental effort shalt thou earn bread." Employers, capitalists, and thinkers plan day after day and work very hard mentally, yet many of them never raise a hand to do physical labor, but leave that part of the work to be done by those persons who still believe they must earn bread in the sweat
lines of
of their faces.
There are three classes of workers first, the phyworkers second, the physico-mental workers and the third, or purely mental workers, and each
;
sical
of these classes
mark a period of human evolution. purely physical workers I mean the hewers of wood and the drawers of water the mass of hu-
By
manity. The physico-mental workers are those who, while recognizing that the laws of mind have a won-
man in his development and minds for planning and enlarging their work and drawing Opulence to themselves and yet use physical means also for the The third class empurpose of manifesting it.
derful
power
to aid a
resources, use their
264
of Mind.
braces all who are purely mental workers, those who have learned to use their minds along all lines and who use mental forces so fully and so completely
that they receive whatever they desire without manual labor of any kind. These are conscious
users
of
what
is
commonly
called
the
Law
of
Opulence or the law which brings opulence. Some students call this the law of Demand and Supply. It
really does not matter what it is called, it operates as unfailingly on the plane of mind as it does in the
realm of economics.
Each person places himself in one of these three classes of workers, according to his evolutionary development. In the first mentioned class the law
of opulence never manifests.
Those who only work

can
never
acquire
little
physically
and
individually
opulence. They earn a living, plus a than an actual living and that is all.
more
of
The law
opulence commences to manifest in the second class, the physico-mental workers, and passes by slow gradation up through it to the third class where it manifests in its fullness. Every person in the course of his evolutionary career must pass through each of these three classes, and most persons who have reached our point of development are in the second class. This class is working with the laws of nature consciously while having a center
through which to draw opulence.
By
a "center"
mean a
certain
definite
vocation
or
avocation
through which money comes. For example, suppose you have a small business a news-stand per-
The
Law
of Opulence.
265
haps. You have learned that there is such a thing as the law of mental supply and demand and you
desire to use this law for your financial betterment. The small business is your center, and having a
center you wish to enlarge it. You make a mental picture of a larger business and see yourself with
a cigar and news-stand combined. You continue to look at that picture day after day and mentally
you never destroy time your your demand will be met and the ways and means will be provided for you to get what you want. But you should not stop with the news-stand and cigar store combined, because it is never well to be content with a little. You should immediately go about making another picture, as soon as your demand has been met, and in this one you should see yourself supplying other news-stands; you should become a dealer and disthat
it
demand
shall
be yours.
If
picture, in the course of
tributor.
Or perhaps you do not wish to have a You may be engaged in another kind
news-stand. of business
and are working for a salary. Perhaps you would like an advancement in your salary and a better position. Then you should make a mental picture of yourself occupying the position you want and drawing the salary you require, and by using this position for your center you will work upward and onward to any height you desire. For illustration let us look at a woman who at the
of metaphysics. I refer to Mrs.
present time stands before the public as a teacher Mary Baker G. Eddy.
266
of Mind.
She began her work as a practicing physician and

after studying under Dr. Quimby learned that it was possible to make a practical application of the Berkeleyan philosophy for the purpose of healing
She started with a very insignificant medwhich gradually grew to large proportions because of the remarkable cures she performed through mind. By the use of medicine and the knowledge that Dr. Quimby had given her, she proceeded to enlarge her center, to draw more people to her from different j5arts of the country, whom she healed and taught, receiving large sums of
the sick.
ical practice,
money
is
for her services.

is
Her
said, she
possessed of
center grew more than a
until,
it
million
dollars.
we do not like our occupation there is no reason why we should continue to work at it forever; but we should hold the thought that we shall use it only for the present until we can draw to ourselves a
If
and a higher one. Faith in the law and the power of mind enables us to demonstrate over adverse financial conditions and make them what we
better
desire.
master of this
art,
whom
knew, was once a
of poor parents in one of the poornewsboy. est quarters of Paris, he lived like all other children His father and of his class in great destitution.
Born
mother were rag-pickers and lived in a cellar. One day when he had reached the age of eighteen or twenty years a great Soul came into his life, and after engaging the boy to do some work for him
The
Law
of Opulence.
267
became
to teach
interested in his welfare, and commenced him something about the power of mind.
He
also gave
him a manuscript and
told
him
to
study and practice the teachings he would find

therein.
the manuscript home and spent his last penny for a candle to give him light while he read about the Law of Supply and Demand ; and as
The boy took
he read he began to believe that he could use this law to help himself out of his wretched condition. Looking around the tiny place which he called his bedroom, with its bare walls and stone floor, he
said:
"I shall
commence now
first
for myself
and the
is
comfortable
thing a piece of carpet three feet long, that
to create opulence need to make me
I can stand on while dressing when I get out of bed on cold mornings." He made the mental picture of the carpet and held steadily to his creation. After
awhile a piece of new carpet was given him by a woman whom he had served and from the moment
was made, his faith in the law never wavered. He became a master at making demonstrations and when I first met him was possessed of a great many hundred thousand dollars. Faith in something we cannot understand is hard to acquire and rarely amounts to anything more than a hope; but faith based upon immutable law grows to be knowledge. The small demonstrations made in the beginning of our work with the law are often the most important, because they prove to us
his first demonstration
268
that
tion.
we have
the power to put the law into opera-
In the class of the physico-mental workers
we
find the progressive student increasing his center and also attempting to make demonstrations inde-
pendently of it. Such persons have made a marked advance in their evolutionary progress. For example, let us take the attorney who knows how to use the law of demand. He says, "I want a good law practice," and pictures clients coming in large numbers into his office. After a time the clients come as he has pictured, and then he begins to make a distinction between them. He says: "I want to represent only those whose cases I can win," and in this way he works for the mutual benefit of all who are interested. Then he begins to create things
separate and distinct from his law practice.
He
wishes to go to Congress, perhaps, and makes a

picture of himself representing his district at the Capitol, and after holding the picture for a while and
earnestly
making
his
demands
that
it
shall
come
to
him, an opportunity will be given and his pictures will materialize, because the law has been put into operation by his power of mind.
In the third class are those individuals who are able to draw to themselves whatever they desire Constant practice has irrespective of any center.
these persons skilled operators of the law and with them faith has grown into absolute knowledge.
made
a person has reached this point in his development he may go out of business and go wherever
When
The
Law
of Opulence.
269
he desires because he can draw to himself anything he wants at any time or in any place he may happen to be. Many students pass through the second
that of the physico-mental workers, very few pass rapidly since some have more slowly.
stage,
faith
than others and after
all it is
largely a quesin his
tion of faith, for heart so is he."
"Whatsoever a man thinketh
Mrs. Helen Wilmans-Post, the leader of the Mental Scientists, started,
world.
as you know, penniless in the She went to San Francisco with but a few
dollars in her purse.
When
demanded and secured her
first
she arrived there she position on a news-
paper, then she gradually drew to herself through that center money enough to enable her to live more
comfortably than previously. After awhile, in answer to her demands she got a better position. In the beginning she used the law of demand uncon-
Then sciously -by following her own intuitions. she began to gain something of a knowledge of the working of the law and soon her brilliant career began as a conscious worker with the law. From a
journalist she
and
became an author, wrote several books added healing and teaching to her long list of accomplishments. Through it all she continued to draw more and more opulence to herself until she is now in possession of great wealth and
finally
has built a city in the State of Florida. By her own example she has shown that she belongs to the second class of workers and makes the statement in her book, "The Conquest of Poverty," that
270
of Mind.
no one can draw wealth to himself independently of

physical effort. Dr. Emily Cady
is
member
of the third class.
She has performed very remarkable cures and has helped the world through her writings as much as any metaphysician of this time. Dr. Cady had used the law in healing and her faith was great enough
to believe she could
make
other demonstrations of
more material nature. She passed into the third class when she showed her implicit faith in the law, by demanding and receiving a large sum of money,
which she needed to reimburse herself for the time and money she had given to suffering humanity. She pictured the amount that she wanted and then claimed it for her own and within a short time after
made her creation, a stranger brought what she had demanded. According to her and her faith was it given unto her.
she
to her
picture
it
To
put this law of opulence into operation
is
necessary to realize three things.
That everything you want exists now in Do you want jewels, gold, silver? market besides, there are in the in the all are They
First.
Divine Mind.
mines as yet undiscovered all these things in great abundance. All these things exist and you can put
into operation the law which will bring them to you. The history of the world shows that every mental demand of man has been met. Man grew tired of
walking and carrying things and the cumbersome ox cart was evolved to supply his needs. But he was
The Law
of Opulence.
271
not satisfied with this crude vehicle and demanded something better. Then came the horse and a
wagon, and after that came steam cars, and automobiles and still man is not satisfied he wishes to fly and flying machines are in the process of evolution. By degrees, from the boat
lighter
bicycles,
;
made by burning out the center of an old log, has the modern steam yacht been evolved, and from the
slow, tedious process of sending verbal messages by footmen from place to place has been evolved
the wireless telegraph. There is no lack of anything in the world; and there should be no envy or jeal-
ousy between men, because there thing for everyone who lives.
is
enough
of every-
should not be so vain-glorious as to think we came into the world destitute of anything. and everything go out of it with nothing except character and some even go without that. While we remain here we may borrow of Deity something
We
Second. Realize that all things belong to Deity and that you can only have a temporary use of them.
own
We
or nothing according to our manner of thinking. Third. should realize that all things are distributed by the Universal Consciousness according
We
to law.
other
One man is not poverty-stricken and anman a millionaire by chance, fatalism or
caprice; but everything is distributed according to the law of mental demand, or of asking and receiving. Those of you who are Christians know what the Nazarene said on that subject. Everyone who stops to think knows that the successful man of
272
is, and always will be, the can demand i. e., make a positive picture of what he desires. If you want anything, create it mentally, demand it and according to your faith be it unto you. There are certain rules whereby you may hasten your creations whether you work with or without a center, and your experiences will demonstrate the
business has always been,
man who
accuracy of the rules. Rule First. Meditate and ask Deity if there is any reason why you should not have the thing you
desire to create.
This removes all uncertainty from your mind about the advisability of creating it. Uncertainty produces a negative condition, disturbs your aura and therefore delays the materialization of your creations. When you have received the answer from the Universal Consciousness that it is right and
proper for you to have the thing that you desire, you are then in a positive condition of mind and
can forcefully put the law into operation. Rule Second. Having decided to create something make your mental picture of it and demand it un-
answer A from Deity often commences his creations, but abandons them after a time because his objective mind suggests that he may have been mistaken about his answer from Deity, and it is not best to continue with his demands. Do not listen to the suggestions
falteringly until it comes. person after having received a favorable
The
Law
of Opulence.
273
from your objective mind, but once having decided upon your creations go on with them to the end. Rule Three. A positive demand accomplishes more and better results than a request or a petition. The mental attitude while making a demand should always be reverential but very positive. The Lord's Prayer is an excellent example of the proper attitude of mind to be assumed while demanding and we will analyze that prayer. Jesus said "After
:
this
manner therefore pray ye:" "Our Father which art in Heaven, hallowed be
in earth, as
Thy name. Thy Kingdom come. Thy will be done The attitude of mind it is in Heaven."
manifested by the Nazarene while making the
first
part of this prayer was reverential, and His words expressed His desire for perfect harmony between
Himself and the Father. Having established harmony between His individual mind and the Universal Mind He proceeded to make His demands in this
manner
"Give us this day our daily bread And forgive us our debts as we forgive our debtors. And lead
:
us not into temptation, but deliver us from evil." After this manner therefore pray ye.
There is not one negative thought in this prayer. There is a positive demand for every thing desired
demand was
rather than a petition. a respectful
We
command
can almost say that the that the things
desired should come, and you will find that those of you who ask of the Universal in this manner and
274
of Mind.
with this mental attitude will always receive what
you ask
for.
contrast the mental attitude that the Nazarene Occultist had when He prayed, with the mental
attitude of
Now
He
said
"When
His so-called followers of the present day. thou prayest thou shalt not be as
the hypocrites are: for they love to pray standing (kneeling) in the synagogues" (churches and cathe-
"But when ye pray, use not vain repetitions as the heathens do; for they think that they shall be heard for their much speaking" (chantdrals)
ing, litanies
and masses).
If
you wish
to witness
the contrast between the Master's and the
modern
forms of worship, go into some of the Churches on or near Fifth Avenue and listen to the words of the modern prayers. On Sunday you will hear Public
Confessions of sins something like this "We have left undone those things which
: ;
we
ought to have done and we have done those things which we ought not to have done: And there is no health in us." "Health" is defined by the Century
Dictionary as meaning in this connection, "natural vigor of the faculties, moral or intellectual soundness."
If we were to say about these same good citizens what they publicly admit about themselves that they are morally and intellectually depraved and
are secretly doing things they ought not to do we should very likely be sued for slander. But we do
not wish to say or to believe that these good people are guilty of what they unthinkingly say with their
The
lips
Law
of Opulence.
275
forms of worship. The illustration but a type of modern prayers, for they given are all more or less self-depreciatory if not selfcondemnatory. The thoughts behind them are negative and the prayers are repeated as a matter of form
in
their
is
more than
of faith.
Many
of these
same good
per-
sons have their prayers answered, but the answered ones were not the formal prayers read from prayer books. They are those that were sent forth from
the heart and were expressed in a positive form they were whispered in the silence of the night when there was no one near to hear but God to
;
whom
they were addressed.
that are efficacious, for prayer to be efficacious be a mental and not an emotional act.
These are the prayers must
Demand specifically what you want. of this rule is important. First you word Every must make a demand. Then that demand must be Make your mental picture clear-cut. The specific.
Rule Four.
your picture the sooner will it materialize. not what specifically what you want some one else wants you to have, riot what you think you ought to have, not what you believe it your duty to want but what you, yourself, wish to
clearer
Demand
have.
The converse
of this rule
is
equally important.
Never demand what you do not want. If you want money do not demand work. Almost everyone makes that mistake when he begins to make demands, because it is difficult to break the customs of many years. Unpleasant environment is the re-
276
suit of
of Mind.
demands we have made

not want now.
in the past for things
we do
Diseased bodies and unhappy conditions of mind are but the realizations of dein ignorance.
mands made
This rule
physics
is
by some metaphysicians.
very likely to be misunderstood even A local teacher of metathis rule
given in last year's that if a person had a drug store, for instance, and wanted money, he should demand patrons because they would bring money. To an Occultist this is strange logic. The druggist might have a thousand patrons and sell If all his customers bought his his entire stock.
lectures said
it
who heard
was misleading
goods on credit and neglected to pay for them afterwards, his desire for money would not be fulfilled although his demand for patrons had been fully met. It is best to demand the specific thing you want and
then you will
make no
mistakes.
of last year's class who thought she understood this rule, said to me several weeks after
member
to Europe.
tal picture
the lecture course ended that she had created a trip When I asked her to describe her men-
she said, "Oh,
I just
created a one thou-
sand dollar bill which I shall use for my trip." She had not created a trip to Europe, but had created the money to pay for one. This was no surety of her getting the trip, because when the money came
might occur to prevent created the picture of have her going. She should herself on board ship crossing the ocean and should
an
infinite
number
of things
The
Law
of Opulence.
277
have seen herself landing safe and well on the other

side.
Rule
strong.
Fifth.
Only demand when your
desire
is
When
it
you
feel the
need of a thing your desire for
strongest. Many students begin enthusiastically to make their demands, but soon grow lukewarm. good way to intensify your desires is to
is
think of the pleasure the possession of the thing would give you, and when the desire for it comes
sweeping over you then make your demand for it. Do not demand because the hour set apart for demanding has come, or because you regard it as a duty you have assumed. Demands made under such conditions amount to nothing, and the time put into
work
still.
of that kind
is
Rule Sixth.
If
Mind works
wasted. best
when
the body
is
you are drumming with your fingers or swinging your feet while making demands, a part of your mental force goes into the physical motions you are making; and your forces being divided the mental work is robbed of much of its power. You should
conserve your force. At intervals during the day you may think of your demands and you can hold
them sub-consciously
and while
complish as much does have an effect.
this kind of
of the time; picture-making does not acas when the body is at rest, yet it
in
mind much
Rule Seventh.
You may have
a strong desire but
Never demand when excited. no excitement.
278
A demand made during intense

met
This
is
We are quite likely to become impatient and are often tempted to make positive and often violent demands. It is a dangerous thing to do, as I shall show you in an illustration. There was a student of Occultism in this city who had met with several misfortunes. Disasters followed each other till everything he had on the mateBut he was possessed rial plane was swept away. of a great deal of force, and knowing how to make demands for what he wanted he commenced making new creations. He demanded ten thousand dollars, which to him was financial opulence. The demand was not met immediately, and the young man became impatient and finally angry. And when he wakened one morning to find himself without money enough to pay for his breakfast, he walked to the park, threw himself upon the ground and lay there for several hours with his teeth set, hands clenched and with the perspiration standing out all over his body, so intense was his excitement while making The his demand for the money he had pictured. the after next day he boarded a freight train and, usual delays and inconveniences attending upon
venience.
at times
excitement is always an forcefully. important rule, the observance of which may save you much incon-
transportation of that kind, the student of Occultism managed to reach a Western town. But he had no sooner entered the place than a cyclone came along When the it off the face of the earth. and
swept
young man
of the violent
demands came
to con-
The Law
sciousness he
of Opulence.
279
was lying on the ground some distance from the place where he was at the last moment of his recollections. His body was a mass of bruises, and when he tried to rise to his feet he found one leg broken. Bodies of dead animals and men lay all around him, and wagon loads of debris were strewn in all directions but jtist within reach
;
of his
man
lay a plethoric leather wallet. The young reached his best arm out and got the wallet and
arm
immediately examined its contents. There were just ten one thousand dollar bills in it and not a scrap of paper or a card to tell to whom it belonged. He
placed his prize in the pocket of his ragged coat and crept on his hands and knees for some distance till
He was cared for and The owner of the money could not be found, and the young man kept it as an answer to his violent demand, which so nearly cost him his
someone came
finally
to his relief.
got well.
life.
Please do not understand me to say that the young Occult student's violent demand created the cyclone, because it had nothing to do with its creation. But the student was drawn into the cyclone, and suffered the horrors of it, because of his own tempestuous mental condition when making a demand, which had to be met after the manner that it was made. Rule Eighth. Always be deliberate and quiet but
positive
when demanding. Never demand in a hurry.
engendered by your creation.
Mental perturbation the materialization of hurry, delays
280
of Mind.
Rule Ninth.
or the
way
in
Avoid speculating on the time when which your demonstrations will be
made.
When you begin speculating about the ways and means by which your demonstrations will come, immediately your force becomes scattered or divided and a repellent expectancy arises. There is an expectancy that draws and also one that repels. The
quiet expectancy, such as is used in meditation, is helpful in drawing to you whatever you have de-
But the impatient expectancy of the mind is repellent, because it causes your objective aura to become disturbed and then nothing you want can reach you. For example You have made a demand and have commenced to wonder through whom that demand Your objective mind suggests Mr. will be met. Blank as the most probable person, and if you accept the suggestion when you meet Mr. Blank you
manded.
:
are not mentally poised because of your impatient expectancy. Mr. Blank feels your mental condition
he were inclined to form a business connecyou he would hesitate and become uncertain because of your perturbed condition thus the ways and means that you expected to bring your demonstration would not be used because of your
and
if
tion with
nine
repellent expectancy. The person who violates rule is likely to make very bad investments. Rule Tenth. Anger, discontent, envy and lack of
self-control repel
If
you make
and delay a demonstration. a mental picture of a thing and hold
The
it
Law
of Opulence.
281
it will be delayed attitudes just mental any you mentioned because any of these puts your aura into a perturbed condition, which is repellent. Divine Mind may be likened to the ocean which is bearing a boat ladened with your creations to you who are
for a time
it
will materialize, but
if
indulge in
;
of the
standing upon the shore. If you are perturbed your mind acts upon Divine Mind as the wind off shore acts upon the ocean. It is forever driving back the craft in which are the things you desire. This rule is one of the hardest to observe, but like anything else it can be followed. It is the disregard
which leads investigators and beginners law or power of mind, and which makes so many students finally abandon in despair their efforts to use the forces of nature. But if we do not use nature's forces then we shall be used by
of this rule to disbelieve in the
them.
The earnestness with which a made, the frequency with which it is made and the persistency with which the mental image is
Rule Eleventh.
is
demand
consciously held in mind hastens the demonstration. In another lecture you were told how your mental
picture becomes a matrix, and that from this matrix goes forth a vibratory force like a blue magnetic cord
which connects with the thing you desire. The material thing is then drawn by this blue magnetic cord closer and closer to you every time you concentrate your thoughts upon your creation until the thing finally reaches you. The earnestness, the fre-
quency and the persistency of your demands and
282

it
concentration draw
cultist
faster
and
faster.
An
Oc-
never destroys any of his mental pictures. Rule Twelve. The realization that you are using an immutable law hastens your demonstrations. Get out of the old theological belief that because
you are good God is going to give you a reward. Get out of the thought that you are a chosen child of God and that He is looking upon you with special favor. Get into the thought that you are a student of Occultism and that by working with mental law you are going to be able to make quick demonstrations and a better environment. Realize that you are using an immutable law and that what you demand comes to you because you are using a law and that nothing can prevent its coming, that God Himself cannot prevent it without violating His own nature a thing inconceivable.
Rule Thirteen. After your creation is made and you have demanded it, the declaration, "God has met
my
demand," hastens the material manifestation of
the demonstration.
For example, suppose you have made a picture, have held it, have demanded that it should materialize and you have followed faithfully all the forerules. But after awhile your objective mind demonstration will never come." Then "that says: I would suggest that you change your form of de-
going
mand, and instead of saying "Give me this," say, "God has met my demand. It is mine now." Claim it. You know your demand has been met on the mental plane, and since it is law that you are using,
The Law
it is
of Opulence.
283
yours as much before it has materialized as it This declaration gives you a will be afterwards. positive realization of possession which has a tendency to bring more quickly your creations and removes anxiety and perturbation from your mind. If this lecture on opulence has been made clear, you will understand that I am not teaching a mentalget-rich-quick affair, nor the getting of something for nothing; but that you must work mentally in The order to accomplish whatever you desire. of mental work this of system particular advantage over physical work is this: you can select your own time to do it, and arrange your own compensation.
The
results are absolutely certain
if
the
complied with. But when a person says he has complied with the rules given here and has not got results he has made a mistake somewhere. He
law
is
-'.
.
has not complied. Your experiences with prosperous business men and all successful persons in the world show that
unconsciously they work along these lines. I say unconsciously because the majority of them as yet only unconsciously put the law into operation. Observation of the metaphysicians of the present day who are semi-consciously using the law and their name is legion will show that even with their
limited knowledge they are repeatedly making remarkable demonstrations. A large per cent of those who listened to these lectures last season have been enabled to demonstrate health for themselves and many have brought health to others some have
;
284
business and
demonstrated happiness, others have enlarged their many have drawn to themselves money. All have increased their store of knowledge and a few have become ennobled in character and have gained spiritual qualities. This shows that the law has worked on the three planes of being with this band of students and if a few can accomplish many
can.
If
you
will but persist in
your
faith there
can be
no
you can demonstrate a piece of carpet three feet long you can demonstrate a million dollars. If you can cure a headache you can cure in the course of time any disease if you can demonstrate a seat in the street car you can demonstrate a seat in Congress, in time. If you can be happy a week you can be happy for a lifetime, because what can be done in a small delimit to
your
possibilities.
If
gree can, with persistency, be

degree.
It rests
done
in
large
with you whether you will or will not use law consciously. There are some of you who There is always a percentage of persons who will. succeed and a percentage who do not. Each of you can do with your knowledge what you choose. This much is true, if you persist for two years to consciously use these laws in your daily affairs of life, by the end of that time your environment will have changed sufficiently, and demonstrations enough will have been made, to prove to you that you are dealing with Law.
this
INDEX.
Accidents, none in the
Acids,
World Mind in Action Creates Adamic Curse 261.

64.
19,
259.
244.
Adepts 19, 23, 26. " Aid Men 27, " as Teachers
23,
186.
Custodians of Occult Sciences 20. 34, 35, 89. Affinity, Chemical, a Form of Consciousness " Sex desire manifests as in Minerals 89.
Affirmations in Disease
Ages
"
"
"
"
250, 251, 252, 257. of Earth, 21 to 26. " " Fifth, Present One 21, 25 to 27. " " First 21. " " Fourth 23 to 25. " "
Second
21.
"
"
"
Sun Cycles Determine

Third
21, 22.
104.
"
Aggrandizement, Individual Altruism, Cause of 234.
232.
Force Dissipated in 235. Green Force Antidote for

versus Selfishness
45, 46. 25.
234, 235.
America, Ancient Civilization

Anesthetics,
Man
Mind
Is
is
Mind Proved by
85.
50.
Not Product of Brain Proved by
59.
Anger, Caused by Fear

"
"
Causes Congestion 244. Color of 142, 143, 230.
ii
INDEX.
79.
Anger, Control of Others Necessitates Elimination of " Demagnetizes Atoms of Body 229, 230. " Effect on Self-Control 79.
Red Color of 142, 143, 228, 230. Repels Demonstrations 280, 281. Animal Kingdom., Consciousness in 35, 69, " " Independence in 260.
" " "
41
70.
Re-embodiment
Souls in
174.
in
107 to 109
248.
"
" "
" Vegetable Kingdom Supports Animal Propensities, Color of 135. Animals, Blue Force Cannot be Used by 235. " Orange Force Used in Treatment of 231. Answers to Demands 152 to 157.
Rules to Test
156, 157-
Anthropomorphism 33. Appolonius of Tyanna, Cosmic Forces Used by

Art, Blue Force Inspires
235, 236.
223.
Asceticism, Moral Reaction from Sensuousness

Spirituality
88.
Not Gained by
88, 89.
Assyria 26. Astrology, Revival of 17. Atlantis, History of 23, 24. " Misuse of Suggestion Destroyed
"
204.
Occultism Openly Taught in 23, 24. Desires to Become an 234. Altruist Atlas, Atoms, Anger Demagnetizes 229, 230. " Conscious Side of 66.
" Dual Nature of 41. Atonement 92. Atrophy of Body Not Taught 90. Aura, Animal Magnetism Utilized by Blending " Color and Size of 128 to 130, 132, 138. " Conductor for Cosmic Forces 228, 229. " Creating a Matrix in the 160, 214. " "
194.
Defined
128, 129.
Development Determines
128 to 130.
INDEX.
Aura, Disturbed by Loss of Self- Control
"
80.
Ill
Uncertainty Disturbs
128.
272.
Aureola, Denned
Auric Egg, Denned 128. Babylon 26. Bad Luck, Result of Mental Creation
94.
Baraduct, Dr., Inventions of 131, 161, 162. Berkeleyan Philosophy, Mrs. Eddy's Use of
Beliefs,
266.
Birth,
Do Not Amount to Much Man Determines His 118.
21.
Black, Abnormality Indicated by
132.
Blood, Vibration of, is Red 241. Blue, Color of Aura 138, 139. One of the Primary Colors 123, 124. " Normal Color of Subjective Mind, 62, 133, 137 to 139. Blue Cosmic Force, Animals Cannot Use 235.
" "
" "
Art Inspired by 235, 236. Aspect of Divine Mind 224. Electric Current Part of 247.
Inspired by 235. Healing by 247, 255. Indigo Inspires Music 236. Light Blue Inspires Literature
Literature Inspired by
Harmony
"
"
237.
"
235, 237.
Mental Force
" "
158.
Inspiration Caused by
235, 236.
Music Inspired by 235, 236. " " Order -235. Organization Inspired by 235. Subjective Mind Alone Can Use
235.
Body, Physical
Not Taught 90. Body Is Not the Man 58. Burial of Dead 55. Change in Conscious 113, 119,
Atrophy
of,
258.
118.
55.
Changes Constantly 108, 109, Christian Fear Dissolution of
IV
INDEX.
Composition of 239, 241. Cremation of 175. Determined by Soul 118.
Body, Physical
" "
'
<
"
" " " "
.
<
" " " "

* '
Drugs Affect 247, Influence on Mind
248.
277.
Man
Modifies
1 18.
Objective
"
"
Boils,
" "
Mind Holds Together Should Be Kept Long 113, 119. Soul Chained to 175.
Thought Affects
119.
239, 240.
Why
It
Retains Its
Form
239 to 241.
Treatment of
253.
of Life, Photosphere Is 182. Brahma, Days and Nights of 101, 102. Brahmins Used Cosmic Forces 223. Braid, Dr., and Braidism 191. Broken Bones Should Be Set 246.
Book
Brotherhood, Silent 92. Brown, Color of Aura 136. Brownies Are Elementals 172.
Buddhists Used Cosmic Forces 223. Bulwer's Writings, Mystecism in 169.
Burdens of Others Should Not Be Assumed

Cady, Dr. Emily, Mental Cancer Caused by Fear
235.
Worker
73, 74.
270.
Treatment of 253. Catholic Church Occultism

Prayer in Causes, Occultism Teaches
"
in the
28.
145, 146.
16, 17.
Center, Magnetic, Depletion of
45.
"
"
Duty
to
Become
a Positive
44, 45.
46.
Preservation of
Use
of to
Draw Opulence
264 to 266, 268.

63.
Centers, Evolution Carried on
Through
Chains, Planetary, Evolution on 67. Chaldean Occult Record, Genesis Is 71. Character Effect of Thoughts on 119.
INDEX.
Character,
"
Known by Color 62. Man Makes His Own

Only Thing
118, 119.
We
Take Out of World

62.
271.
Vibrations Indicate Man's
Chemical
Affinity,
Consciousness in
12.
34, 35, 89.
Chemistry, Once an Occult Science
Chicago, Infants' Court in 115. Children, Orange Force Used to Heal 231. Christian Science, Denials Used Mostly by 252. " "
Healing by Based on
tive
Law
223.
of, Is
"
"
Malicious Animal Magnetism
Objec-
Mind
in
76.
"
Mistaken
tions
Not
Recognizing
Affirma-
252.
"
Mistaken in Not Recognizing Drugs 247. " " Matter 40.

" "
41.
"
Physical
of
"
Side
Atom
Patients
Sometimes Have Recurrence of

212.
Disease
"
Patients
Sometimes Have Recurrence of Disease, Cause of 212, 213.
Christianity
Esotericism in 14. Occult Bodies in 28.
Prayer in
Christians, Dissolution of
145, 146, 274, 275.
Body Feared by
55.
80.
Clairaudience, Self Control Necessary in
Clairvoyance
60, 113, 183.

Artificial
183, 184.
Magnetic Connection Visible

Unreliability of
in
113, 114.
183.
Passive
"
183, 184.
Unreliability of
183.
80.
Self Control Necessary in
Students Taught 184. Subjective Plane Seen in
61.
True
"
184, 185.
Pineal Gland
Used
in
184.
INDEX.
CoercionCrime
to
Use
162, 209, 212, 214.
Deity Does Not Use Examples of Mental

"
211, 212.
202 to 204.
Hypnotism and
Mental
198 to 200.
202, 203.
"
"
"
Students Never Helped by 186. Suggestion and 207 to 209. To Do Evil Greatest Crime 214.
97.
120. 124, 125.
Colds, Cause of 243. Objective Mind Creates
Color
"
Ancient Europeans' Idea of Necessary in Manifestation

Negative 138, 139Of Objective Mind,
"
62, 133, 137,240.
"
Subjective
138,
139-
62, 133, 137-
Positive
Primary
"
123, 124, 132. 132, 133-
Quality of Thought Determines Theories of 121, 122.
"
Vibration and
121 to 125.
52.
Colored Glass Modifies Light Ray Concentration 147 l &2 to l67"
Aids, in
164 to 166.
52.
Blood Drawn to Part by

Defined
"
162, 164.
Difficulty of
163. 163, 164.
Law
"
of Periodicity in
Materialization Hastened by 162. Most Forceful Mode of Mind 147, 163.
"
Not a Fiery Ordeal 165. Opulence Created by 234.
Power
" "
of
166, 222.
Practice of
" "
164 to 167. Practice Required in 12, 166. Quietness Best for 164.
"
Rules for 164 to 166. Self-Control Necessary in Tool of Occultist 147-
80.
INDEX.
Congestion, Anger Causes 244. Conscience, Memory of Past Events Consciousness Centers in 87, 112.
Vll
109.
Creations Controlled by Dominant Currents in 47.

Divine, See Deity. "
"
74.
Automatic Action of
of
102.
50.
Awakening
Centers
of,
Evolution
Takes
44, 63.
112.
Place
"
"
Through Men Are 87,
"
Mice Are-87. Should Be Preserved

45, 150.
44,
" "
Defined 35, 36. Forces Are Aspects of
39 to 41, 223, 224.

52,
Man, Assisted by
Manifestation of
68, 260, 261.
34 to 41,
101.
Must Rest
101.
Thoughts Impress 50. World Managed by 91. Environment Shows Which Controls
Immortality Means Preservation of In Animal Kingdom 35, 69, 70, 107,
74.
150.
108.
" Chemical Affinity 34, 35. " Gases 35. " Mineral Kingdom 34, 35, 69, 106. " Vegetable Kingdom 35, 69, 106, 107.
34, 52.
Objective, Manifestation of
Planes of
Self,
141, 142.
Manifested in
Man
31. 43.
Subjective, Manifestation of
Control
Synonymous with Mind 34. Of Fear 85 to 88, 92 to 99, 141.

'
Sensuousness
88, 89,
'
Sex Desire
Vanity
"
89, 90,
99.
92 to 99. 92 to 99.
90 to
viii
INDEX.
See Currents.
160. 94.
Cosmic Force
Creation
Always in Pictures Bad Luck Result of
Dawn
of,
Described
101, 102.
Demand
Until Realized
272, 273.
98, 99.
74.
Destruction of
"
Wrong
94.
Dominant Consciousness Always Controls

Evil Results of
Goodness Does Not Affect

" "
166.
Hastening of Ignorance in
272 to 283.
74, 276.
Meditation Before 167, 272. Mental Brings Everything But

158.
Knowledge
159, 160.
157,
"
Mental, Concreteness Necessary in
Denned
" "
157-
Law
Practice Built
in
Up
by
159.
"
"
" "
Matrix Formed
Operation of
Particles
160, 161, 281.
160, 161.
162.
Drawn Together by
" "
"
'*
" " " " " " "

*'
Photographs of 161, 162. " Universe Result of Divine Objective Mind and 272. Of Consciousness or Ether 47.
"
"
160.
" " "
Mind Forms 65. Money 159 to 161,

Opulence
163, 165.
259 to 284.
101 to 105.
158,
The Universe
Material Plane
On
159. 162.
Precipitation Is Highest Form of Self-Control Necessary for 80.
Thoughts Continually Result in 113, 157. Cremation, Occultists Advocate 175. Souls Freed from Body by 175. Crime, Coercion to do Evil Greatest Known 214.
"
"
Disembodied Entities Cause Hypnotism Cause of 198 to
176.
200.
INDEX.
Currents. Cosmic, Black, Abnormal 132. Blue (see Blue Cosmic Force). Conscious Use of 222, 223, 249.
"
"
"
IX
Defined
219 to 226.
Green (see Green Cosmic Force). Healing by (see Healing). How to Connect with 227, 255.
Jesus Used 223. Mental Conditions Attract or Repel
"
255.
Scientists
"
Orange (see Pass from Left to Right 252. Reel (see Red Cosmic Force). Semi-Conscious Use of 222. Surround Us Constantly 242, 243. Unconscious Use of 222, 249. Use of 222, 223, 238, 250 to 258. White, Abnormal 132. Yellow (see Yellow Cosmic Force).
220 to 223.
"
Use 222, 223. Orange Cosmic Force).
Thought
" "
How
Used
222.
Plagiarism and 221. Used in Disease 223.

101. 102.
Dawn
of Creation
"
Day, Cosmic, Alike, More or Less

"
"
Beginning of 102. Evolution Carried on in

Failure in
15.
One
Each
30.
Laws
" "
for
103, 104.
Periods in 21, 25, 26. Supreme Consciousness
Re-Embodies
Itself
for
New
"
104.
15.
Vast Period of Time
Death
of
Worlds
105. 87, 88.
Declarations
Against Fear
Beneficial
98, 99.
INDEX.
Deity, See Also Consciousness Divine. " All in All 15, 16.
"
"
Anthropomorphic Idea of
33, 151.
"
"
Awakening of Change in Idea
101, 102, 103.
of
31, 32, 151. 151.
"
" "
Conceptions of 31 to 33, Created Only Good 173.
Demand from
99, 150 to 152, 155, 162.

152.
" " "

" " " "
Depend Upon, Instead of Persons or Things Does not Coerce 211, 212.
Everything Belongs to
"
271.
15, 16, 270, 271.
Exists in
Is desire-
Force
of
It
39.
Idealizes
What
117.
Will Accomplish in a Cosmic
Day
15.
Instrument
Just Is
of, in
Healing
254, 255.
"
"
Laws Made by
Manifestation of
103, 104.
15, 39 to 41, Conception of
101.
"
Men
with
No
"
31.
Nature Worshipped as 32. Nearness of Man to 151, 152. Physical Ills of Undeveloped Provided for by
249.
" "
Re-Embodies Itself 102. Solar, Denned

"
103, 104.
Radiates Life Force

Tribal
102.
"
"
Worship of 32. Universal, Nature of 33.

Universality of the Idea of Is Manifestation of 101.
15, 16.
"
31.
Universe
"
Unfoldment of
"
"
Wisdom Should Be Demanded of Works During Each Cosmic Day

Yellow Force
Is
99.
262.
of, for
Highest Aspect Demagnetization (see Vampirization).
Us
237.
Demand, and Supply, Law

"
of, is
Law
of Opulence
264.
Desire Necessary 277. Earnestness Necessary
281.
INDEX.
XI
Demand
Effect of Excitement
on
277 to 279.
For Knowledge 154. " Wealth Hastened

"
222.
155, 162.
"
"
"
"
From Supreme Power 99, 150 to 152, How Answered 50, 155Hurry Delays 279. Objective Mind Sometimes Answers
Repelled by Speculation, Anger, Should Be Deliberate and Quiet
" " "
Specific
275etc.
27.9.
152, 157.
280, 281.
Positive
273, 279.
Success Obtained by
"
271, 272.
156.
When Answered
155,
Denials
"
"
Desire
"
Hypnotism Produced by 249. in Treatment of Disease 249, Mental Scientists Use 223. Color of Sex 230.
Its
250, 251, 252, 257.
Function in Making a
Demand
277.
"
Positive Side of Objective Mind 83, 148. Power to Do Anything, One 238.
Will Is Greater Than Desire 84. Despondency, Caused by Fear 85. Destiny, Man's Affected by Every Thought
119.
Development, Adepts Aid 64. Rest Between Lives Determined by Dewey, George, His Self-Control 79. Discontent Repels Demonstrations 280, 281. Disease (see also Healing).
112.
Cause of
Classified
73,
93, 242, 243, 244, 257.
244 to 246.
194, 237,
Cure of
"
245 to 258.
"
Defined
246.
Defined
239, 241.
Emotions and Their Relations
to
79, 93.
Habit in Picturing 96, 97. Hereditary, Caused by Mental Conditions How It Manifests 242.
244.
xii
INDEX.
Disease Hypnotism Does Not Cure 212, 213. " Ignorance Is Cause of 242.
"
Imaginary, Cause of 244, 245. Manifestation of 242.
Mental Dominion Does Not Cure

Negativeness Produces
"
150.
212, 213.
Real, Cause of 245 to 247. Dissolution, Evolution Alternates With
100.
Divine Healers Use
Law
223.
Mind
(see Consciousness Divine;
Deity).
Doubt Caused by Fear-^85. Drinking Overcome by Suggestion 97, Drugs, Mineral and Vegetable 247. Physical Body Affected by 247,
98.
248.
Duty, Mistaken Sense of, Leads to Difficulties Dwellers on the Threshold 169 to 174. Earnestness in Demands 281. Earth Ages of (see Ages of Earth).
"
235.
Fourth Planet
233.
Keynote of Is Fa. 233. " Why It Does Not Disintegrate Eddy, Mrs. Mary Baker G. 265, 266.
Education, Higher, Color of
Effects, Science Studies
16.
"
240.
235.
Egg, Auric, Defined
128.
Egypt
25,
26.
Occultism in 26. Egyptian Bodies Preserved to Use Again 55. Empire Founded by Advanced Souls Electricity, As a Cure for Disease 246, 247. Is a Force 148.
Physicians' Use of 197. Subdivision of Blue Force
247.
25, 26.
Elementals
171 to 176.
Created by Thoughts of
Men
172, 173.
Good and Bad
172, 173. 172.
How
Created
INDEX.
Elcmentals, Leave Creators
"
Xlll
173, 174.
174.
Utilized in
"
"
Magic
Elimination
" "
Of
" "
"
Psychic Phenomena 174. Fear 85 to 88, 92 to 99, 140, 141.
Sensuousness
88, 89, 92 to 99.
Sex Desire
89, 90, 92 to 9999.
Vanity 90 to Elohim (see Planetary Spirits).

Difficulties in
16.
Elusinian Mysteries, Evolution of Souls Taught in
27, 28.
Embryology, Emotion, Action Upon Regretted 93. " Ascendency of, in Beginning 133. Conquering of, Aids in 84, 93 to 99.
" "
"
"
of Periodicity Helps 94 to 96. Suggestions Used in 97, 98. " Thinking With Subjective Mind
"
"
Law
Helps
"
92.
Will Must
Be Exercised
in
92.
Disease Caused by 79, 93. Fear An 84 to 88 (see Fear). Four Basic 84.
Ignorance Cause of Uncontrolled 93. Intellect Can Control 136. Mental Condition of Objective Mind
Natural Forces on
81, 84, 92.
Own
Plane
84.
Red Color
92, 93-
of
136.
Self-Control Necessary in Control of
70 to 83,
Sensuousness An 85, 88, 89 (see Sensuousness). Sex Desire an 85, 89, 90 (see Sex Desire).
Subjective
Mind Can Control
92, 93.
Vanity An 85, 90 to 92 (see Vanity). Entites on Subjective Side of Life 171, 175 to 177. " Pose as Teachers 185. Environment Shows Which Consciousness Controls
74.
Thoughts Determine
116 to 119.
Envy Repels Demonstrations
280, 281.
XIV
INDEX.
180, 252.
Epilepsy, Mental Treatment of

"
Obession Causes
180.
Equilibrium, Law of (see Justice, Law of). Esotericism, Jesus Taught 13, 14. " Teachings of 12, 14, 15.
'
for Students
13.
See Deity. Essenes, Cosmic Forces Used by

Essence, Divine
Eternity,
223.
Length of
100.
Ether
" "
Birth of
Minds from 65
43, 44.
to 67.
Defined
Nature of 43 to 48. Everything, Ability to do, Can Be Gained " Belongs to Deity 271. " Distributed by Law 271, 272.
"
12, 166.
Enough
Is
of for
Everybody
16.
271.
Exists in Deity
" "
Unfoldment of Deity
16.
Law Governs
117, 118, 259, 261, 271.
Evil, "
Must Unfold ii. Temporary Use of 271. Creation of Objective Mind 75,
"
76.
Result of Ignorance 74, 76, 94, 108. Evolution As Divine Energy or Impulse 15. Centers of Consciousness Necessary for
Dissolution Alternates
<44, 63.
With
100.
Occultism Teaches
15.
Of Soul
"
28.
Universe
100 to 102.
Process of
12, 15,
62 to 64, 114.
279.
Works Through Individuals 63. Excitement, Effect of on Demands 277 to

Exotericism, Jesus Taught "
13, 14.
13.
Masses Are Taught
Cure Fa, Corresponds to Green Force " Keynote of Earth 233.

Eyesight Failing,
to
How
234. 233.
INDEX.
Failures Caused by Fear
Fairies
Faith, "
"
73, 74, 85, 140, 141.
172.
It
XV
Are Elementals According to, Be
Unto You
272, 284.
Assists in Conquering Circumstances 266. Based Upon Ignorance Only a Hope 267. " "
Law, Becomes Knowledge
267.
"
"
Curers, Healing by, Based on Law 223. Salvation Does Not Depend Upon, Alone
67.
Fear (see Emotion, Conquering of). " Acquired Before Birth 72. Acquirement of Objective Mind 72, 73. " Analyzed 85. Base of Most Anger, Jealousy, Murder, Failure, Theft, Discouragement, Despondency 85.
Basic Emotion
84, 85.
73, 74. 73, 74, 85,
Causes Cancer
Failures
"
140,
141.
Fevers
244.
244.
" "
"
"
Heart Troubles 243, Color of 140, 230. Control of 85 to 88, 92 to Creates Diseases 73, 257.
Declarations Against
87, 88.
99.
Diseases and
"
257.
Draws That Which
"
"
Is Feared 85. Elimination of 85 to 88, 92 to 99, 140, Force Saved by Fight Directly on 85. Healing Requires Removal of 256, 257.
141.
Humanity
Shifts
85.
"
1
Ignorance and 94. Lives Wretched Though Objective Mind Cause of
87.
72, 73, 93.
" "
"
"
Of persons
"
"
86.
Public Opinion
86, 87.
87.
the
Unknown
Suggestion of Punishment Causes
205.
XVI
Fevers
"
INDEX.
Caused by Fear 244. Cure of 244. Flammarion, Student of the Occult Force (see Currents, Cosmic).
" "
15.
"
Consciousness Ensouls 103. Defined 39, 40, 41, 223, 224. Desire of Deity Is 39. Divine Essence Manifesting as Motion Is
224.
40, 41, 223,
" " "
Expression of Divine Mind 36, 39, 41. Manifests Under Five Aspects 224. Misuse of, Brings Destruction 24, 84, 166,
Persistency of
100.
167.
" " " "
Product of Mind
40, 224.
Thought Uses Us
Identical
if
We
39.
With 40. Do Not Use It
281.
Form
"
Cause of
"
"
Defined 41. In Manifestation 124, 125. Mental Basis for 72.
Mind Has
"
60, 62.
125.
114.
Vibration and
"
Free Will, Justice Limits,

"
Man Has
112, 114, 118, 119.
System Deranged by 119. Gambling Forbidden to Students

Fright,
187.
Gases, Consciousness of
35.
Gates, Prof., Experiments of 244. Genesis, a Chaldean Occult Record

Glass,
71.
Cause of Diamond Cutting
243.
Goblins,
Are Elcmentals
172.
God
See Deity.
Godhood, Possibility of Reaching 67, 108. Grant, His Self-Control 79. Gravitation, Earth Held Together by Law of
Greece
Colors in Ancient
120.
240.
Materialism in Ancient Occultism in Ancient 27.
27, 28.
INDEX.
Green, Fourth Planet Always 233. Indicates Individualization
"
"
XV11
137, 232, 233.

Is
Intellectualization
Without Intuition
232, 233.
Normal Color of Objective Mind

241.
62, 133, 137, 233, 240,
"
"
Positive and Negative Selfishness Indicated by

of
139.
232.
Is
Green Cosmic Force, Acquisitiveness

232.
Autumn Grass Shade
"
"
"
"
"
Altruism Cured by 234, 235. Eye Troubles Cured by 234. Growth Disrupted by 253, 254.
Healing by
234, 253 to 255.
233.
is Pastel Green Nervousness Cured by 234. Selfishness is Bottle Green Shade
"
" " " " "
Individualization
232.
Used
Creating Wealth, Power, Position and Material Things 233, 234.

in
Habit
"
X-Ray, Shade of 254. Elements in Forming 94 to 97. Law of Periodicity 94 to 97. Self-Control and 94 to 97. Suggestions Aid in Overcoming 97,
98, 211.
Hades, Penetrates Physical World 174. " Place for Departed Spirits 174. Harmony, Blue Force Inspires 235.
Divine, Color of 237. Hate, Coerced Love Turns to 215. Souls Bound Together by 113, 114. Healers, Magnetic Depletion of 45, 194 to 196. Precautions for 195, 196.
Healing (see Disease, Cure of) " Animal Magnetism, How Used
" "
in
194.
Avoid Sight of Disease in 250, Based on Same Law, All 223. Blue Force Used in 247, 255.
Boils
253.
251.
XV111
INDEX.
Healing, Cancers, Tumors, etc. 252, 253. " Concentration to Get Aura in 254. " Cosmic Forces Used in 195, 223, 250. " Depletion of Users of Animal Magnetism
"
194.
Destroy
Wrong
Used
Creations
in
251, 252.
Electricity
246, 247.
79.
"
"
" "
Emotions Must Be Controlled in Fear Should Be Removed in 256, Green Force Used in 234, 253 to Growths 253. Mental Troubles 252.
257.
255.
Mind Used
in
247 to 258.
"
" "
Elements Should Be Introduced in 250. Orange Force Used for Children and Animals, 231. " " " in Nerve Troubles 194. " Tissue Building 194. Picture of Disease Should Be Destroyed in 250.
Positiveness Necessary in
Realize, Forces in
256.
196, 252, 255.
New
"
" " "
Red Force Used

Rules for
to Restore
Sex Function
in
230.
250 to 258.
256, 257. 257.
"
"
Suggestion Used in Use Few Words in

"
Highest Shade in Growths 253. " Next Higher Shade or Color 255,
"
256.
"
"
"
One Hand Only
252, 253.
Vegetable Compounds Used in 247 to 249. Vibrations Should Be Raised in 250.
Health
Cosmic Currents and 223. Defined 241. Emotions Must Be Controlled for
79.
Habit in Picturing 96, 97. How to Obtain 231, 237, 245 to 258. Heart, Connects Deity With Individual 151. " Troubles Caused by Fear 243 to 245. Heaven, Man Determines His 112.
"
Several
112.
INDEX.
Help, Should Be Given 118. Holman, Referred to 37.
XIX
Holmes, Oliver Wendell, and Plagiarism 221. 233. Honor, Green Force Used to Create Hook, Robert 121.
Huxley
"
20.
Definition of Matter by
37-
Huygens, Christian 121. Hypnotism 58 to 60, 189 to 218. Coercion While Under 198 to 200. Crime Caused Through 198 to 200.
"
Defined 197, 198. Denials Produce
249.
Disease Not Cured by 212, 213. Effect of Continuous 213 to 215.
Emphasizes Objective Mind First Known as Braidism
211.
191.
Harm Done by
"
58.
How
"
Broken
Produced
202, 215.
197, 198.
58.
Little
Good Done by
Love Induced by 215. Malignant Force 215. Man Is Mind Proved by 59. Mental Dominion a Phase of
"
200 to 204.
56 to 60.
Mind Controlled in " Is Not Product Never Justified 200.

Obedience in
198,
198 to 200. of Brain Proven by
" "
199.
Operator Reaps
Persistenee of
111
Effect of
199.
214.
Patrick Case Cited
Mind Proved by
59.
215 to 218. Suggestions and 197 to 204. Will Destroyed by 198, 213.
"
"
Prevention of
Used
"
in
"
Breaking Producing
215.
197, 198.
XX
Ignorance
"
INDEX.
Cause of Disease Evil Caused by
242.
74, 94,
J o8.
"
In Creations 74, 276. Is No Protection 50.
Of Laws
"
Is
No Excuse
74.
Prevents Self-Control
93, 94.
93-
Uncontrolled Emotions Caused by Vanity and 94.

Imagination Is Creation 157. Immortality, Denned 150.
" "
How
Acquired
21.
150.
Hypnotism Furnished
Scientific
Data
to
Prove
59
Imperishable Isles
Incarnations. See
"
Re-Embodiment.
of Justice Causes Certain
112, 113.
116.
Law
"
Time Between
Independence, Animals Teach 260. India, Colonists of 22, 26. " Rich in Literature and Philosophy
"
22.
Temples in 120. Indigo Force Inspires Music 236. Individualism Versus Altruism and Selfishness Individualization. Deity Teaches 260, 261. " Green Color of 232, 233. Light Green Color of 137.
1 06.
45, 46.
Permits More of God's Plants to Manifest,

"
Planet
of, Is
Fourth
233.
150.
Positive Condition Necessary for
Wise Parent Teaches

Ingersoll, Colonel,
260.
Quoted 31. Caused by Disembodied Entity Red Force Causes 229. " Mediumship Leads to 181. " Mental Treatment of 252, 253. " Obsession Cause of Most 180. Inspiration, Blue Force Causes 235 to 237.
Insanity, Emotional,
176.
INDEX.
Negative Side of Subjective Mind
232.
20.
XXI
Intellect,
83.
Intellectualization, Color of
Intelligence, Gradation of
Intuition
Color of
237.
80.
Self-Control Necessary for
Inventors
Use Same Thought Currents
221.
Jealousy Caused by Fear 85. Jehovah, Male Female Creative Principle 33. j esus _Altruism Said to Have Been Taught by 45. " Altruist Desire to Sacrifice Self Like 234, 235.
"
Lord's Prayer Analysed
273, 274.
14-
Taught Estoterically and Exoterically 13, " Teacher of "Love Your Enemies" 142. Judaism Jehovic, Cabalistic and Talmudic 14
Ritualism in
Justice,
145, 146.
"
Law
"
" "
of,
" "
Brings Back What Is Sent Forth 115. " Causes Certain Incarnations 116. " Evolution Modified by 114.
"
Exists
114, 116, 117.
"
"
" "
Free Will Limited by 114. " Materializations Governed by 161. " Misuse of Mental Force Punished by " Thoughts Put Into Action 114.
115 to 117.
Is
41.
"
166, 167.
"
Will Prevail
"
Keynote of Occultism, Duality of Atom
Our World
Is
Fa
233.
Knowledge, Assimilated on Subjective Planes in. Higher Taught by Occultism 188. How Gained 18. Received from Demands 154. Through Meditation 150 to
157.
Land of
the
Gods
21.
Latent Ability to Know Everything in Man 237. Law, Divine Works Automatically and Impartially
214.
Governs Everything 117, 118, 259, 261, 271. Ignorance of, No Excuse 74. Of Demand and Supply (see Demand and Supply,
of).
Law
XX11
INDEX.
(see Justice,
Law Of Equilibrium
"
"
Law
of).
of).
"
" " "
Justice (see Justice,
Law
Opulence (see Opulence,
"
"
Periodicity (see Periodicity,

"
Practice,
" "
Law of). Law of).
Re- Embodiment (see Re-Embodiment,
Law
of).
How
to Build
159.
Laws, Govern Every Detail
117, 118, 259, 261, 271. 103, 104.
Method
of "
of Manifestation of Deity Natural, Are Plan of Deity 103.
" "
Each Cosmic Day

Universe
for
104.
103, 104.
"
Same
"
Each Side of Life

22. 22. 23.
103, 108.
Lemuria,
Man
Existed on in Third
Age
21, 22.
Sinking of Lemurians Fate of

Life Force (see
" " " " " "
"
-Reincarnation of
Orange Force; Magnetism, Animal).

135.
Body Preserved by
Builds Life
127, 134.
134, 135, 231. 102.
" " " "
Orange Colored
Planetary Spirits Radiate Solar Deities Radiate 102.
Vegetation Animated by
106, 107.
Formed by Molecules 239. Human, Prolonged Many Years
119, 242.
Light Blue Force Inspires Literature 237. " Colored Glass Modifies Ray of 52. Lights, Zodiacal, are Cosmic Currents 225.
Literary Thought, Color of 235, 237. Liver, Cause of Torpid 242.
"
Vibration
of, Is
Brown
241. 242.
Loeb, Prof., Conditions for Life by
Logos, Subjective Mind Is the 68. Lord's Prayer Analyzed 273, 274. Loudres, Priests of the Waters, healing by, Based
223.
On Law-
INDEX.
Love.
"
''
XX111
Constructive Force 142, 157. Coerced Turns to Hate 215. Color of, Yellow 142, 157, 237.
Deflects
"
" " " " " " "
'
Lower Vibrations
157, 158, 237.
143.
Divine
God
Is
114. 142.
Greatest Force on This Planet
Human
Creation of
158.
Hypnotism Produced, Turns
to
Hate
215.
Justice and, Are the Same 114. Right to Ask for Honest 215.
Souls
Bound Together by
113, 114.
"
"
and Creative, Yellow 237. Your Enemies, Good Reason for 142.
Spiritual
27.
Power of 26 Magic, Ceremonial, Defined " Laws Used in 15.

Magi
"
"
Practice of
15, 174-
Red Force Used

"
for Destruction in "
230.
Help
in
230, 231. 231.

161,
White and Black, Distinction Between 204, 230, Magnetic Connections, Concentration Produces 154,
281.
"
"
"
Thought Makes
154, 160, 161, 281.
Magnetism, Animal, (see Orange Force; Life Force). *' Best Condition for 193.
Curative
Power of
194, 195.
Depletion of
194, 195, 196.

is
Malicious, Christian Science Believes
Personal Devil Occult Force 29.
76.
Used
Man,
in
Mesmerism
87, 112.
192.
Utilized by Blending
Auras
194.
Centre of Consciousness
Adepts Aid Development of 27, 64. Assisted by Universal Consciousness 68, Cannot Imagine the Non-Existent 272.
260, 261.
XXIV
Man, Color
"
"
INDEX.
of Early, a Dirty Brown 240. Denizens of Next Plane Use 176, 177.
"
" "
"
"
Destiny of 68. Destructive Things Created by Man Determines His Own Birth 118.
173.
Early Conceptions of 53 to 58. Elementals Created by Thoughts of
172.
God
"
"
Easily Reached by 151. Habitation of, Between Embodiments

17.
109 to 112.
"
Not Bound by Time or Space Psychic, Denned 81.

Realizes
Is Mind 17, 58, 59. Becomes Earthbound After Excarnation " The Magnetic Field Around 126, 127. " The Real, Defined 72, 81. Mass, Sung in Certain Key 175.
"
He
"
Sensual,
in.
Masters, Atlantis Helped by 23. " Custodians of Occultism

"
20.
Defined
19.
"
"
Divine Stage Reached by 19. Grades of 19. Teachers of Occultism 19, 23,
186.
Mata, the Magician, Quoted 65, 66. Materia Medica, Difference in Vibrations Not Considered
248.
in
Materialism, Artistic Form of, in Greece 27. Called Discovered Science 13.
Laws Unknown
to
15.
Reached Lowest Point
in I9th
Century
29.
13.
Stamped Belief in Subjective Superstition Materialization (see Demand).

Concentration Hastens
162.
Delayed by Hurry
Matrix, Material Thing Drawn to " Mental Creation Becomes
279.
281.
160, 161, 281.
INDEX.
Matter, Consciousness Ensouls 103. " 100. Indistructibility of
44
XXV
Is Persistent
100.
"
"
44
Particled
37 to 39.
Subject to
Mind
17, 41.
Unparticled
37 to 39.
242.
Matthews, Dr., Necessary Conditions for Life Maxwell, J. Clerk, Referred to 37. Medicine, an Experimental Science 248.
Meditation, Analyzed
149, 150. 156. 167.
Answers During
Before Creation Defined 149.
Demand
in, Direct to Deity 150, 151. In Creation of Opulence 272. Knowledge Received Through 150 to 157.
Method
of,
"
Proper
153, 156, 157. 149, 150, 152, 155.

149.
Wrong
Necessary for Quick Demonstrations Negative Warnings Against 149, 150. Opulence and 272.
Philosophical 149 to Rules for 149 to 157.
157.
Time
for
154. 181.
Mediums, Controls of, Are of Low Order Force of, Wasted 181. Frauds Among 181.
Insanity Is Result Among 181. Instrument for Excarnated Souls
179, 180.
Low Order
of
181. 180.
Magnetism of, Absorbed by Controls Moral Character Degenerate in 181.

Obsession, Result of 180. Passive, Unreliable 179, 183. Positive Character, Cannot Be
181, 182.
Vampirized by Controls
181.
XXVi
INDEX.
Mental, Blue Force Is 158. " Connections Between Persons 113, 114, 154" Creation (see Creation, Mental).
" "
" "
<
Depletion, Treatment of 252. Dominion, Coercion by 202, 203. " Defined 200 to 204, 212. " Disease Not Cured by 212,
" "
213.
Examples of
202, 203.
200.
"
Extensive Use of 201 to 203. Used Without Knowledge of Victim Force Transmuted from Sex Desire 89.
"
Form
" "
Precedes Physical 72. Increase of, Force, How Gained
158.
"
Inspiration Caused by Blue Force 235, 236. Pictures Become Physical Things 50, 172.
Qualities, Blue
Scientists,
is Color of Higher Cosmic Forces Used by Denials Used by 252.
"
"
235.
222, 223.
" " "

'
"
" "
of, How Restored Healing by, Based on Law Mistakes of 40.
Depletion
195, 196.
223.
Workers
(see Workers, Mental).
Mesmer
"
"
'Cures
by
189, 190.
197-
History of 189 to 192, 195 to Student of Occultism 189.
Mesmerism, Animal Magnetism Known as 192. " Cosmic Force 192, 193. " Nature of 190 to 193. Metaphysicians, Differ in Process of Cures 249. Effect oif Drugs Denied by Some
Mice, Small Centres of Consciousness
87.
247, 248.
Mind
"
"
"
52 to 77.
Acids
"
in Blood Caused by 244. Animal, Becomes Objective Minds
70.
Growth
of
70.
" "
Body Controlled by
Body's Influence on
Positive
277.
243.
INDEX.
Mind.Brain Does Not Produce
"
58, 59.
XXV11
" "
'
Color of 60, 61, 62. Divine (see Deity; Consciousness, Divine). Division of 59, 60.
"
Drawing Power of 85. During Hypnosis 198.

Excarnated 176, 177. Force Is Produce of
40, 224.
Form
;
of
60, 62.
" "
"
" "
"
Higher Form of Consciousness 35. Impotent Through Non-Use 246. In Cure of Diseases 249 to 258.
Invisible Part of
36.
Man
"
Realizes
He
Is
17, 58, 59.
Must
Now
36.
Use His-68.
157.
Manifested
Answers Uncolored by
Matter Subject to
"
17, 41.
Objective,
Argument With, Useless Body Held Together by
98.
240.
Colds Created by 97. Controls of 75 76, 81 to 84, Dark Side of Life Appeals to
170.
206.
Demands and
Detached
152,
157.
170, 171, 176, 177.

176.
Sensitives Controlled by Victim of 176.
Devil, Personal, of Christian Science
76.
Disease and
Disintegrate,
179-
93.
When Abandoned
by Subjective
of
Si, 84,
Emotions Are Mental Conditions

92.
Evil Is Creation of
75, 76.
Evolution of 68, 69, 70. Fear an Acquirement of

First Consciousness
72, 73, 93.

Is
Reached
60.
XXV111
INDEX.
76.
Mind, Objective. Ignorance of

"
" "
"
Mastery
of,
How
Obtained
98, 99-
Meditation Influenced by
156, 157.
Nature of
71, 72, 83.
" "
" "
"
Negative Side of, Origin of 68 to

Re-incarnation of
Self-Control and
Is
70.
Reason
83.
Positive Side of, Is Desire

170, 171.
3,
148.
"
"
"
" "
92, 93.
Separation from Subjective
Mind
170, 171.
"
"
"
"
Shapes Physical Body Sin a Creation of 75,

Subjective
240.
76.
Mind Controlling
81 to 84, 98.
in,
" "
272.
170.
Suggestions by and to
97 to 99, 206, 210, 211,

70 to 73, 170.
Union With Subjective Mind

" "
Particled
37 to 39. Persistence of 59.

in
"
" " "
Poisons
Blood Caused by
Unlimited
204.
244.
Power
of,
Reached by Repeated Thought

Subjective,
"
204.
Awakening
Classes of
of
83, 84.
Blue Force Can Be Used Only by

67.
235.
"
"
Color of
"
"
62, 133, 137, 233, 240, 241.
Creation of
64 to
66. 92.
Emotions Conquered by Evolution of 67.

Functions of
"
68, 82, 83.
Incarnation of 67, 72. Intuitive Part of Man 68.

"
" "
Negative Side
Objective
170.
of, Is Intellectual
83.
"
Mind Controlled by
66. Is
81 to 84,
in,
Origin of 64 to Positive Side of,
Will
83, 84, 148.
INDEX.
XXIX
Mind, Subjective, Remembers Past 109. Second Consciousness That Is Appealed to
-60.
"
"
Self-Control and
92, 93.
Separation from Objective

179-
Mind
170,
171,
" "
"
" "
Strong Enough to Do Anything 83. Suggestions by 97, 98, 210, 211. " Union with Objective Mind 70 to Supreme Over Disease 249. Synonymous with Consciousness 34.
"
73, 170.
Thought
Universal
Is
Product of See Deity.

204.
40.
" "
Unlimited Power of Unmanifested 36.

Visible Part of
36.
Minerals, as
Drugs Should Not Be Used

of, Is
247, 248.
34.
Cohesion Power Consciousness in
Consciousness
34, 35, 69, 106. 69.
Individualization of
Kingdom Supports Vegetable Kingdom
248.
Low
Rate of Vibration of
in
106.
247.
Re-Embodiment
Misuse of Force, Brings Destruction 24, Molecules from Complex Individual Life
166, 167.
239.
Money
(see Opulence). Creation of 159 to 161, 163, 165, 222. to Materialize 234, 259 to 284.
How
Motion
39, 40. 21.
Mount Muru
Music, Blue Force Inspires 235, 236. Color of 235 to 237.
Napoleon, His Self Control 79. Nature, Unaided Fails 63, 64.
Worshipped as Deity 32. Necromancy, Spiritualism Is, Revamped
178.
XXX
"
INDEX.
243.
150.
Negativeness, Cause of Colds
Death Produced by
Defined
148.
"
"
Diseases Produced by 150, 243. Evolution Hindered by 150.

Failure
Due
to
46.
Caused by 149, 150. " Hypnotism Permitted by 216. " Immortality Prevented by 150. Meditation Hindered by 150. " Obsession Results from 149. Neo-Platonists, Cosmic Force Caused by 223.
'
"
Harm
Nerves, Treatment for Diseases of Nervousness, Green Force Used for

"
194.
234.
Cure 234. " Orange Force Used in 194. New Thought Scientist, Healing by, Based on Law Newton, Theory of Light 121. Nice, Council of, Immortality Accounted for by 55.
to
How
223.
Night, Cosmic, Condition in 101. " Lasts Eons of Years

"
101.
Of Brahma, Description of
101, 102.
Nimbus, Defined 128. Nineteenth Century Materialistic 17. Obsession, Epilepsy Caused by 180. Insanity Caused by 180.
Negativeness Induces
Occultism, Atlanteans
149.
Were Openly Taught

175.
23, 24.
Causes Taught by 16, 17. Cremation Advocated by Criminal Use of 24.

Definition of
12,
13.
Deity Is All Taught by 15. Everyone Has vvfhat He Deserves Taught by

260.
259,
"
Evolution Taught by History of IT to 31.
15.
INDEX.
Occultism
In Catholic Church
"
28.
28.
12.
XXXI
Christian Church
"In
"
Middle Ages
'
Keynote to 41. Knowledge of, How Gained 18, 28, 29. Law of Being Taught by 188. Laws of Divine Unfoldment Taught by 16. Meanings of 12, 13, 15. Misuse of, Brings Quick Destruction 24.
Original Research One Perfect Sciences 20.
Way
of Studying
18.
"
"
Priesthood Contained Knowledge of 28. Results Gotten Quicker Through 234.

Science of Cause and Effect " " Divine Unfoldment
17.
"
" "
15, 16.
Secret Societies Depositories of Self-control Necessary in 80.
28, 29.
Survivors Will All Be Students of

"
50.
Taught
in
Greece
27.
Teachers of 18, 19, 23, 186. Teaches No Sacrifice of Self

Verification of
44, 45.
n,
12, 21.
World Now Ready For

Opulence, Creation of
" " "
"
"
29.
259 to 284. Anger Repels in Centers Used in
^280, 281.
"
"
264 to 266, 268. Concentration Required in 234. Creation Required in-^232, 233.
Declare "God
in
Has Met
279.
My Demand"
282, 283.
in
"
Deliberativeness in
"
Demand
"
272 to 275. Until It Comes
272. 275, 276.
'
Demands Should Be
"
Specific
"
"
"
Demonstrations Prove 267, 268. Desire Strongly in 277.
XXXll
Opulence, Creation
'
INDEX.
of.
" "
"
Discontent Repels 280, 281. Earnestness Required in 281.
" "
"
."
Envy Repels
271.
280, 281.
"
Everything Belongs to Divine Mind
"
Everything Distributed by
272.
Law
271,
" " "
"
"
Everything Exists in Divine Mind

270, 271.
"
Excitement Affects
Faith in
281. 266, 267.
277 to 279.
in
"
"
"
"
Frequency of Demand Required
"
"
"
"
"
"
Green Force Used

Illustrations of
in
233, 234.
"
265 to 270.
280, 281.
Law
of
233, 234, 259 to 284.
"
" "
" "
"
"
" "
Loss of Self-Control Repels Master of 266, 267. Meditation Before 272.

Positiveness
275-
Necessary
277.
in
272,
273,
" "
"
"
"
"
Quietness in
Realize
You
in
Are
282.
Using
Immutable
in
Law
" "
" Specific
276.
Demands
required
275,
"
"
Speculation Scatters Force in
280.
Mental Workers Draw 264, 268, 269. " Physical Mental Workers Draw 263, 268, 269. *' Physical Workers Never Gain 264. Orange Force (see Life Force). "Magnetism, Animal."
"
" "
"
"
"
"
Animal Magnetism Is 192, 193. Animals Treated With 231. Children Treated With 231. Cosmic Force 224. Depletion Caused by Using 194. Nerve Troubles Helped by 194.
INDEX.
xxxiii
Orange Force, Plants Stimulated by

"
"
231.
Tissue Builder
194. 134, 135, 193, 231. 194.
"
" "
Universal Life Principle

Utilised by Blending
Auras
Order, Blue Force Inspires 235. " of Universal Harmony 190. Organization, Blue Force Inspires 235. Organs, have Individual Vibrations 241.
Osteopathy, as a Cure for Disease 246. Depletion in Practice of 195, 196.
Pain, Escape,
"
from
80, 82.
Evidence That Objective Mind Has Not Been Conquered 82.
Palmistry, Revival of 17. Particled Matter 37 to 39.

Patrick, Hypnotic Influence of
199.
Paul, Mysticism of 14. Peace, Self-Control Necessary for

Periodicity,
80.
Law
"
of,
"
"
"
Concentration Aided by 163, 164. Defined-94, 95Habits Broken by Use of 96.

"
Formed
"
"
"
94 to 96.
103, 104.
Universe Governed by Periods of Evolution 21.

"
"
"
Fifth
First
25 to 29.
and Second 21. " Fourth 23 to 25. " Third 21, 22. Phenomena, Vibration Causes of Physical
42.
Photosphere, Is Book of Life 182. Physical Form, Preceded by Mental Creation

"
Life,
72.
Orange Force Causes 134, Phenomena, Vibration Cause, of Resurrection of, Taught 55.
40.
135.
42.
Universe Defined
"
Vanity Must Be Conquered 90. Workers (see Workers, Physical).
XXXIV
INDEX.
40.
Physicists Mistaken in Believing Matter Is All " " "
Not Recognizing Conscious Side of
Atom
41.
Physico Mental Workers (see Workers, Physico Mental).

Pictures, Mental, Finally Materialize
50, 96, 97. 50.
First Mental
" "
"
Things
Materialization of
96, 97.
Matrix Formed by 160. Photographs Made of 160 to 162. Pineal Gland, Center to Function on Subjective 184. Plane (see Subjective Planes).
Planet,
Ages of (see Ages of Earth).

First
67.
For Subjective Minds 67. Fourth 67, 68, 82. " Always Green 233. " Incarnation Upon Another in. Planetary Chain, Consists of Seven Planets Evolution Takes Place on
Spirits,
233.
67.
Great Beings
66.
" "
" "
Life Force Radiated by 102. Planets Created by 104, 105, 160.
Subjective Minds Created by

Poise, Students Required to Gain
178.
65, 66.
Poison. Disease Only Changed by 247. " Low Rate of Vibration 247.
"
Position,
Mind Causes Creation of 244. Green Force Used to Create

148.
233.
Positiveness, Defined
Demands Should Have

Evolution Requires Health Restored by
273, 274, 279.
46, 150, 180.

180, 196.
"
Hypnotism Prevented by 215, 216. Immortality Depends Upon 150. Mediumship Prevented by 181, 182.
INDEX.
Positiveness, Necessity
of, for
XXXV
Opulence 272, 273, 275. Progress 46, 150, 180, 196. " " " in Prayer 275. Required in Healing 196, 252, 255. Vampirization Prevented by 130. Power, Misuse of Brings Destruction 24, 166, 167.
" "
5
rayer, Different
'
Forms
of
145 to 147, 151, 273 to 275.
" "
Lord's, Analyzed 273, 274. Negative as a Rule 275.
Positiveness Required
in,
to
Be
Efficacious
275.
"
"
Rational
147.
Should be
Directed
162.
to
Universal
Consciousness
150 to 152.
Precipitation,
Denned
Highest
Form
of Creation
162.
Preservation of Self, First Duty to God 44. Priests, Occult Knowledge Possessed by 28, 175. " Students of Adepts 27.
Procreation,
Probation of Seven Years for Students Red Color of 233.
186.
Protestantism, Prayer in 145 to 147. Psychism Animal Minds Contacted, in 174. " Avoid Study of 168. Dwellers on Threshold Met in, 169 to
i
175.
Elementals in
171, 172.
Used in 174. Humanity Approaching

Ignorant Influenced by
168, 170. 178.
Imposition of Spirit Controls in 180, 181. Nothing Offered Students Now by 188.
Objective Minds Contacted in
Sensitives Study 177, 178. Used in 177, 178.
170, 171.
Students Protected by Cosmic Force in Studying

178.
Students Required to Develop Before Studying

178.
XXXVI
INDEX.
Psychism, Subdivision of Occultism 168. Threshold in, Souls Must Pass Over
175.
Psychometry, Denned 128. Public Opinion, Fear of 86, 87. Purgatory, Location of 174, 175. Souls Freed from, by Masses
'"
175.
Mrs. Eddy Studied Under 266. Reason, Actions Should Be Governed by 78. " Emotions Overcome, in Beginning 133. " Negative Side of Objective Mind 83. Red, Cclor of Anger 142, 143, 230.
Quimby,
Dr.,
"
<:
"
"
"
<v
"
"
"
"
" "
Animal Propensities 135, 136. Emotional Nature 135, 136. Fear 140, 230.
Procreation
233.
<c
Cosmic Force, Black Magicians Use, for Destruction

230.
"
"
"
"
Body Disrupted by 230. Crimson Indicates Sex Desire Darker Shade Indicates Fear
230. 230.
" " "

"
"
"
" "
"
"
"
Emotional Insanity Caused by 229. Emotions Result from 135, 136, 288. Lowest Force in Man 135. Natural Force in Animals 228.
Scarlet Indicates Anger 230. Sex Functions Restored by 230. White Magicians Use, for Punishment 230, 231.
"
"
'*
Wine Color
tion
230.
Indicates Sense Gratifica-
Re-embodiment,
A.
Cosmic Law
104.
Condition of
to 112.
Man
Between Incarnations
108. 103.
105
Consciousness Subject to
"
Deity Re-embodies
Itself
INDEX.
Re-embodiment, Fact in Nature 105, In Animal Kingdom
"
106.
XXXV11
107 to 109.
106. 106, 107.
Mineral
Vegetable
of
"
"
"
101 to 119.
Law Man
Determines Time and Condition of

105..
112, 117.
Manifests Everywhere
Not Disproven by
109.
Inability to
Remember
Of Objective Mind 170, 171. " Subjective Mind 67, 72. Time Required for 112 to 114. Upon Other Planets in. Reform, Carried on Through Individuals 63.
Re-incarnation (see Re-embodiment; Religions, Esoteric for Students 13, Exoteric for the Masses
Incarnation).
14.
13,
14.
Remembrance
109.
of
Past
Lives,
Condition
Necessary for
173.
Reptiles Produced by Poisonous Thoughts Rest, Subjectve Planes Place of in, 112.
Resurrection, Physical, Taught Ritualism, Defined 145.
55.
In Brahminism
"
'
145.
Buddhism
Christianity
14^.
145,
146.
Judaism 145. Roscicrucians, Cosmic Force Used by

Occult Body 28. Sacrifice, Occultism Teaches No, of Self Saint Germain, an Occultist 190.
Salvation Not by Faith Alone 67. Saviours of Men, Recognition of 92. Science, Chemistry Once an Occult 12.
"
"
"
223.
44-45.
Esoteric for Students 13. Exoteric for the Masses
14.
XXXV111
Science, Treats of Effects.
INDEX.
Unknown Now Being
Investigated by
28.
15.
Scriptures, Actions Controlled by 78. Secret Societies, Occult Knowledge in
Seers Function on Subjective Planes

Self,
61.
44, 45.
Occultism Teaches
Preservation, First
No
Sacrifice of
Duty
to
God
44.
Self-control, Aids in
1
92 to 99. Clairaudience requires " Clairvoyance

"
80.
80.
"
''
"
80. Concentration " 80. Creation Emotions and 79 to 83, 92, 93. Greatness Cannot Be Obtained Without
78, 79.
Habit Utilized in 94 to 97. Health Requires 79. Ignorance Prevents 93, 94. Intuition Cannot Be Awakened Without
80.
Means Control
jective
81.
of Objective
Mind by Sub-
"
"
Occultism Requires 80. Pain May Be Eliminated by 80. Peace Cannot Be Attained Without
Practice
of, Is
80.
Hard
78.
Rules for 92 to 99. Students Must Have

" "
80.
9379.
" "
Subjective Mind Used in 92, Success Unattained Without
Suggestion Used in 97, 98. Will Necessary in 92, 93. Selfishness, Green Is Color of 232, 233. " Versus Altruism and Individualism
"
"
"
45,
46.
Sensation, Manifestation of Objective Mind " at First
81.
"
Reason Displaced by, Vibration Causes 42.
133.
INDEX.
Sense, Gratification,
Sensitives,
XXXIX
230.
177.
Red
of
is
Color of
Demizens
Next Plane Use

176 to 178.
in
176.
Influences on
Moods Produced
Psychism Investigated by 178. Psychometrizing Done by 128.

Will of
Weak
177.
Sensuousness, Analysed 88. Asceticism Is Moral Reaction from 88, 89. Basic Emotion 85, 88. Earthbound on Subjective Plane Caused by in. Elimination of 88, 89 (see Emotion, Con-
quering
of).
in, Is Perversion Occultism Teaches
Over Indulgence
Regulation
of,
88, 89.
89.
89.
"
Wisest Course-88,
85, 89.
Sex Desire, Anaylsed 89. Basic Emotions

Bodies,
LJnmarred
89.
by
Passion,
Created
Through
Chemical Affinity in Minerals Is 89. Control of, Should Be Gained 89. Crimson Color of 230. Elimination of 89, 90 (see Emotions,
quering
of).
Con-
Force of Life and Love 89. Mental Force Made from 89. Regulations of, Wisest Course Function Restored by Red Force 230.
Silence,
89, 90.
Silver
Sin,
Going Into, Process of Meditation Cord Binds Soul to Body 175. a Creation of Objective Mind 75, 76.
Original
75, 76.
147,
152.
" "
Result of Ignorance
108, 243.
Smoking, Overcome by Suggestion
97, 98.
Xl
INDEX.
60.
Society for Psychical Research, Evidence Collected by
Mind Has Form Agreed

by 60. Psychism Studied by
178.
57,
Spiritualistic
Phenomena
by
182.
Verified
Solar Deities (see Deities, Solar). Soul (see Mind).

"
Bound
Color
to
"
" " "
Body
175. 133.
of,
Determined by Character
Courageous,
Make Mistakes
58.
18.
Early Conceptions of 53 to Evolution of 28, 108.
"
"
Godhood Possibility of Hate Binds, Together

Latent Ability to
108, 237.
108.
113,
114.
"
Know
Everything Possessed by
" "
Love Binds, Together

of "
114.
Animals 69, 174. " Bulb 107. Sound, Vibrations Cause of 41, 42. Speculation, Avoid in Demands 280, 281. Spencer, Herbert, Discussion of Force and Matter Spinal Troubles, Treatment of 252. 177. Spirit Controls, Crime Traceable to
Friends Impersonated by
"
Spirits,
'*'
100, 105.
179.
Low Order
181.
Planetary (see Planetary Spirits). Spiritualism, Aspects of 178, 179, 182, 183. " Eternal Progression Taught in "
57.
Evidence Collected by
60.
Necromancy Revamped
" "
Is
178.
Passivity Required in 179. Practice of 178, 179, 182.
Vampirization
in
179 to 181.
INDEX.
xli
Spirituality,
Tendency Towards Now 29. Yellow Color of 138, 237. Students, Clairvoyance Taught 184. Coercion Never Used on 186.
Experience of Seventy-two
Faults of
187.
187.
Great Ones Help All 186. Mental Development Required of
178.
People Finally Become Poise Required of 178.
18.
Prepared to Look Down on Psychic Plane Protected by Cosmic Forces 178. Self Control Must Be Gained by 80. Seven Years' Probation of 186.
"
175.
Teachers Demanded by Most

"
185.
Made from
of,
19,
186.
185.
Unattached, Without a Master

Study,
Each Life 18. Subjective Planes, Ancients Experimented Upon " Clairvoyants Function on 61.
different in
Amount
12,
13.
"
"
Denizens of 176, 177. Elementals formed on 171 to

Entities
176.
on
149,
171,
175 to 177, 185.
"
First Defined
174.
"
Forces Strong Upon 18. Knowledge Assimilated on in. Life Manifests as Orange Force Upon
134-
" "
Man Man
Contacts as He Develops 175. Rests on Between Incarnation
no
Number
"
to 112. of
109 to in, 174, 175.
61.
Seers Function on
"
Zones on
10,
in,
174,
175.
Substance,
Atom
Has, Side 41. Divine Essence Manifesting as Matter
40.
xlii
INDEX.
Attributed to Outside Causes
Success
222, 223.
Dependent Upon Self-Control 79. Laws Governing 222, 223. Suggestion, Acceptions of, Dependent Upon Recipient
205, 208, 216.
in Life Received from 207. Atlanteans Destroyed Through Misuse of Audible Denned 205.
204,
Aid
204.
" "
Examples
of
205, 206.
Auto, Denned 206, 211. " Should Be Made by Subjective to Objective

211.
98.
"
"
Examples of Coercion by, Not Right Constructive, Examples

Beneficial,
207 to 209.
of
205 to 207.
207.
"
Should Be Used 205 to Destruction Follows Misuse of 204.

Destructive Examples of 205, 206. Double, to Objective and Subjective Drinking Overcome by 97, 98, 208, Emotions Conquered by 97, 98.
"
" " "
210, 211.
209.
"
Use of 208. Examine All, Carefully Grows With Use 208.

Evil
216, 217.
" "
Healing by
"
256, 257.
206.
Hetro, Defined
"
"
Examples of 207, 208. Hypnotism Produced by 197 to

Kinds of 205, 206. Mental Dominion by Moral Stimulus 208.
Objective
"
206.
200.
200 to 204.
97, 98, 210, 211.
"
"
"
Mind Overcome by
"
Readily Accepts Destructive
" "
Obstructions
Removed by
207, 208. 205.
Parents Misuse, on Children
INDEX.
Suggestion,
xliii
Power of, Unlimited 204. Rejection of 205, 208.

Right,
"
May Be Made
to
207.
Use Use of
207. 204, 207 to 211.
Rules for Proper Use

Silent,
Denned
Stronger Than Audible 206. Smoking Overcome by 97, 98. Subjective Mind Using 97, 98, 210, 211. Teachers Constantly Make, to Children Wrong, Example of 205.
Sun, Centre of Life
" " "
63. 49.
"
209 to 211. 205 to 208.
205.
Fears Dispelled by Orbit of 104.
Treatment from
49. 49.
Vibration Strongest from

Surplus,
Only Should Be Given Away 235. Sympathy Should be Controlled in Healing

19, 186.
196.
Teachers, Classes of
Demanded by Most
Never Try
of Occult
185.
to Control
Anyone
185.
185, 186.
Law
18, 20. 185.
Subjective Entities Pose as
World
142.
Theft Caused by Fear 85. Telepathy, Based on Law 17, 204. Defined 130, 131.
Thought, Aura Determined by Intensity of 132. Badness Not a Quality of 147, 148.
Careless, Brings No Result 153. Cause of Vibration 62, n.i, 130, 131, 148.
Character Made by 113, 119. Color of, Determined by Quality Concreteness Necessary in 153.
132, 133.
Consciously Directed, Brings Results
48.
INDEX.
Thought, Creations Constantly Result from Creative Always in Pictures 153,
Currents of 220 to 223. Defined 147, 148.
113, 157.
160.
Destiny of Man Affected by Every Divine Consciousness Impressed by Elementals Created by 172.
119.
50, 273, 274.
Environment Determined by
113, 116 to 119.
Examine
All, Carefully
217.
Family Determined by 117. Force Is, or Result of 40, 41, 128, 223, Goodness Not a Quality of 147, 148.
224.
Kind
of
Depends Upon
Put
Its in
Use
147, 148.
114.
Law
"
of Equilibrium
Action by
173.
Licentious,
Becomes Vermin
40, 147.
Mind Produces
Negative,
Rate of Vibration 14?. Persons Connected by 113, 114, 154.
Low
Photographs of
"
161,
162. 109, 119, 258.
Physical
Body Affected by
"
Poisonous, Produce Reptiles 173. Positive, High Rate of Vibration
148.
Power
Sent
in
of
17,
113, 114, 131.

17.
Any
Direction
Stinging, Produces Wasps, Mosquitos, etc.
173.
Things Are
"
5cx
Vibration, Chief Characteristic of
148.
149.
Will Determines Direction of

"
" " "
148,
Intensity of 148. Nature of 148.

187.
Tobacco, Students Forbidden Treatment, How to Give 48.

"
Received from Sun
49.
41.
Trinity of Consciousness, Force and Substance
Truth Always Demonstrable Tumor, Treatment of 253.
II, 12.
INDEX.
Universal Consciousness (see Deity; Consciousness Divine), Universe, Deity Manifests as 101. " Evolution and Dissolution Alternate in 100.
Physical, Basis of
" "
39.
Creation of
Definition of
101 to 105.
40.
Manifestation of
the
87.
39,
100.
Unknown, Fear of
Unparticled Matter 37 to 39. Unseen, Fear of the 87. Vampirization, by Invalids 129, Defined 129.
130.
Of Spiritualists 179, 180. Of Young by Old 130.

Prevention of
130.
Vanity Analyzed
"
90,
91.
Basic Emotion
85, 90.
"
"
Causes Practice of
Artificial
Clairvoyance
90
(see
184.
Conquering
of,
Necessary
Emotion Con-
quering).
"
Control of 90 to 99. Evolution Greatly Retarded by

Ignorance
91.
Shown by
94.
"
Mental Aspect of 90. " Hard to Recognize 90. Physical Aspect of 90. Spiritual Aspect of 91, 92. Martyrdom Crushes Out Must Pass Away 92. Reformers Actuated by
Subtleness
of,
91.
91. 90.
Makes Hard
Its
to
"
Conquer
Unrecognized by
in
Vegetable Compounds
Possessor 90, 91. Cure of Diseases 247 to
249. 248.
Kingdom, Animal Kingdom Supported by

Consciousness in
35, 69, 106, 107. 69.
Individualization in
INDEX.
Vegetable Kingdom, Mineral Kingdom Supports Re-embodiment in 106, 107. Souls in 107. Vermin, Licentious Thoughts Cause 173.
Vibration, All Is
42.
248.
Cannot Lie
"
61.
42.
Cause of Physical Phenomena

"
Sensation
42. 62.
Character Cause of Man's
"
"
Disease Results from Law 242. Disk to Register 131. High and Low 129. Instruments Made to Measure 131, 132. of Color 42. " Diamond and Glass Compared 243.
" "
Man
62.
Sound 41. " Thought Forces 66. " Water Raised 35. Power Results from High
Produces Form and Color
46.
121 to 125.
Sun
"
Visible
49.
Sympathetic
219.
62,
Thought Causes Part of Mind 36.
in,
130,
131,
148.
Von
Reichenbach, Karl 126. Wachmeister, Countess 203, 204.

173.
Wasps, Produced by Biting Thoughts Wealth (see Opulence). White, Abnormality Indicated by 132.
Will
"
"
Awakening
of,
Our Great Object

184, 185.
83.
Clairvoyance by Effort of
Cultivation of
149.
"
"
Desire Is Weaker Than 84. Determines Direction of Thought

"
"
148, i-do.
148.
"
"
Intensity
Nature
"
"
148.
INDEX.
Will
"
xlvii
Domination of
Exercise of
92.
209.
Force of the
149. 114.
Free, Justice Limits
Man Has
"
112, 114, 119. 199, 215.
Hypnotism and 197 to Broken by
215.
Positive Side of Subjective Self-control and 92, 93.
Mind
83, 84, 148.
Wilmans, Mrs. Helen 269, 270. Wines, Students Forbidden 187.
Wisdom, Color of
"
237.
99.
Demand
"
How
Highest, of Deity Acquired 50.

212. 262.
Wood, Henry Work, Defined

"
Deity Does, in Each Cosmic Day, 262. Everyone Must, Who Progresses 262. " Mental, Included by 262, 263, 283. Workers, Classes of, Defined 263, 264.
Mental, Conscious Users of the
"
Law
264 to 268.
Mind Used by
264. 264.
Opulence Gained by
"
"
Physical Lower Than 263, 268. Success Obtained by 262 to 270.

263.
Physical, Defined
Mental Are Higher Than 263, 268. Opulence Never Manifests in 264. Physico-Mental, Mind Used by 263. Opulence Gained by 264.
Students
Among
268, 269.
Worlds, Creation of 103 to 105. " Death of 105. X-Ray, Shade of Green Force 224.
xlviii
INDEX.
Yellow Cosmic Force, Difficult to See 132, 133. " " " Divine Harmony 237. " Highest Force on Earth
" "
"
237.
" "
"
"
Intuition Is
237.
Love
is
157, 158.
" "
" "
Love, Spiritual and Creative 237. 138, 237. Spirituality gained from Sun Gives Forth 49.
User
of,
Can
Is
Do
Anything
238.
"
"
"
Wisdom
237.
Yoga, Mental and Physical
144.
Youth Restored Consciously 119. Zanoni, Seeker After Knowledge 169. Zodiacal Lights, Cosmic Forces 225.
Zones on Subjective Side of Life
no, in,
174, 175-
From Incarnation
Is
to Re-incarnation
By RICHARD INGALESE and ISABELLA INGALESE

an advanced course of lectures on Occult Philosophy and the Science of Mind. These teachings describe both the construction of the Universe and the method of man's physical, mental and
spiritual evolution.
The
:
nature of each lecture

it
is
cated by contents
its title
is
and by the sub-heads
contains.
partially indiThe table of
as follows
1.
THE RELATION OF
2.
3.
SEX. The Positive and Negative aspects of the Universal Principle Attraction and Repulsion in Lower Forms of Life -Sex in Organized Life The Law of Sex Relation The Result of the Abuses of the Law. MARRIAGE. Prostitution Celibacy Chastity Sacramental Union and its esoteric basis Contractual Union Rights and Obligations of each party to the Union Result of Marital Relations upon Individuals and upon Races. PARENTHOOD.- Attraction of Incarnating Ego to Parents Conception Building the Body Heredity The Incarnation of the
Ego -Real and Mistaken Duties of Parents "Race Suicide" versus

Parental Slavery.
in
4.
PHYSICAL AND PSYCHIC DEVELOPMENT. "A Sound Mind

a Sound
MENTAL AND SPIRITUAL DEVELOPMENT.

'
chic Development Spirituality.
Body" -Exercise Breathing and Yoga Imprudent PsyThe Inner Senses Mistaken Ideas Concerning
The Nature
of
Mind Will and Desire Development of the Objective Mind Of the Subjective Mind Misconceptions and Limitations of "Spiritual Growth 5 Ethics Morality Conscience How to Develop Clairvoyance or Seership.
Aids
to
6.
FOCUSING FORCES.
7.
8.
9.
Generation of Power-Its Use and MisuseMental Creation Exercises in Concentration. REPULSION.-Vibration -Friends and Enemies-Harmony and Disharmony Pessimism Causes of Failure in Demonstrating -Retrogression -Destruction. MENTAL ATTRACTION. Vibration-The Subjective Mind-Optimism Progression The Law of Success Evolution DEATH. Transition Physical Immortality Process of DeathCremation "Second Death" Mourning for the Dead.
MENTAL
10.
AFTER DEATH.
Soul
Post
Purgatory-Hell-Heavens or Homes of Mortem Occupations and Recreations. Cloth, 326 pp. including an index, price $2.00 post paid.
the

Publishers
9-15 Murray Street,
New York
LINKED LIVES
A
Tale of Yesterday and To-day
By ISABELLA INGALESE
is a story of the Law of Justice. It is a graphic presentation of the truth expressed by Saint Paul when he
"Be not deceived; God is not mocked; for whatsoweth, that shall he also reap." The necessity of a book of this kind is shown by the disbelief of many persons in the Law of Compensation, which is partially reflected in the following conflicting press reviews of the work.
wrote:
soever a
THIS
man
"Linked Lives" is a really fascinating story it is written in ex;
cellent
modern
style
and deals
with powerful issues in a powerful way. Boston Ideas.
a story of modern life as touch of the ghost* * It seems rather ly super added. unfair and unnecessary. New York Times.
This
is
it is
not, with a
The note the author strikes is that of the evolution of the individual soul. The story is well
told.
This is a story constructed for the

sole
New York Ethical Record.
theory.
purpose of elaborating a Saint Paul Pioneer Press.
From its pages we may learn how much happier our development would progress if we had
faith in the inner guidance.
on the
The narrative is founded entirely doctrines expressed by
Boston Occult Review.
those who profess faith in Occult Sciences. Chicago Tribune.
The
story
is filled
with dramatic
incidents.
Its characters are true
An
to \\te.-Christian Herald.
impossible story. Los Angeles Herald.

Price, $1.50 post paid
Cloth
in
Green and Gold, 235 pp.

Publishers
9-15 Murray Street,
New York
MAGICIAN MATA THE INGALESE

By ISABELLA
Is
not an ordinary or conventional novel.
It is
written for the
purpose of bringing lovers of fiction into an entirely new line of thought.

is an era of spiritual and intellectual progress and tremendous development of the human mind. All thinking men and women are beginning earnestly to desire a wider knowledge of the powers and possibilities latent within them, and this book is calculated to throw much light on the problem of individual growth. The story explains the operation of the vibratory law underlying all phenomena, and while it instructs it also entertains its readers with many strange and ludicrous characters and situations.
'T^HIS
J.
The author, Isabella Ingalese, has had exceptional opportunities to study Occultism, having been a pupil of both Eastern and Western teachers of the mystic sciences. In this story she describes phenomena that she has witnessed, and then explains them so lucidly and scientifically as to rob them of the characterization "occult" or ''supernatural." She gives the key with which to unlock many of the ancient mysteries and points out the path to greater wisdom. The pure and lofty character of the heroine though ideal is so natural as to stimulate emulation and raise womanhood to a higher plane. The story is written in plain, choice English. It is devoid of all metaphysical, occult, and Oriental terms and abstractions, and is of absorb"MATA THE MAGICIAN" marks a new era in ing interest throughout.
romantic literature. Following is a list of the chapters
1. 8.
:
A New Patient.
3. 4.
5.
6.
A Contract of Marriage. Dust to Dust. A Lying Cannibal.

Mrs. Smythe. Sealed Instructions. At Death's Door.
Magician or Lunatic
7.
8.
9.
The Magic
Fluid.
10. 11.
The Hon. John Brunt, Attorneyat-Layr.
My
Mother.
12. 18. 14. 15.
The Smythes' Last Appeal. The Mysterious Stranger.

Mata.
16. 17. 18. 19. 30. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30.
The Theater. The Woman's Dress Reform. Passing Away.

Little Mata. Clairvoyance. The Music Teacher.
The Thirtieth of November. The Governess. The Plague.

Occult Philosophy. On the Defensive.
"The Devil." The Railway Accident.

Conchision.
Angel or Demon
Our "At Home"
Cloth, 12mo, Daintily Produced, $1.50 post paid

Publishers
9-15 Murray Street,
New York
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY BERKELEY

Return
This book
is
to desk
from which borrowed.

the last date stamped below.
DUE on
MAY 28
1948
JAN
2QJan'50J R
6'
1957
6Sar'57LS
UMar'SOBG
REC'D
'
,;-
J^3.
1962
2Dec'57JZ
OEC
4
21953LU
30ct'55GB
REC'D
JAN
1 5
L,D
'.-
RECEIVED BY
APR 251981
CIRCULATION DE>T.
::
LD21 - 100m 9
-
'
47(A5702sl6)476
YC 31964
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY

The History and Power of Mind - Richard Ingalese

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The History and Power of Mind - Richard Ingalese

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

The History and Power of Mind - Richard Ingalese

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Charles Josselyn

THE OCCULT BOOK CONCERN

PREPARATION, DELIVERY AND COMPILATION OF THESE LECTURES.

of the kingdom of God :

but to others in par-

ables ; that seeing- they might not see,

ing they might not understand."

personal notes and

and the photograph of the author

The book may not appeal

to the orthodox religionist

"THE HISTORY AND POWER OF MIND/' was

not be amiss to state in conclusion that the

scribed in these lectures,

Nature and Manifestation

Dual Mind and

The Law of Re-embodiment

Meditation, Creation and Concentration

Higher Occult or Spiritual Forces and their Uses

The Cause and Cure

The Law of Opulence

THE HISTORY AND POWER OF MIND.

cally until this entire course shall be finished.

The History and Power

indicated in these lectures

will find that there

known through experimentation with

Occultism, Its Past, Present and Future.

that which pertained to defined as esoteric-

will find traces of this duality in

The History and Power

be the Egyptian, Buddhism, or

In Judaism there was the Jehovic teach-

Church and the writings

Occultism, Its Past, Present and Future.

The History and Power of Mind.

onward and upward,

not found. The student of Occultism says

Occultism, Its Past, Present and Future.

and then upon the subjective, or to study them

of the world the Occult Sciences have

The History and Power

we have the ally after many

and leaves the pupil

Occultism, Its Past, Present and Future.

Cosmic evolution, passed upward

through the Divine, and

and enlarging their consciousness as individ-

The History and Power of Mind.

evolutionary career; the one, of course, be-

advance of the other.

does not require

only logical to suppose that

The Masters and Adepts

and the subjective.

the facts and principles of these sciences by each person as he progresses

and you say "I

true because both the intuitive and

do not know whether

Occultism, Its Past, Present and Future.